JP6926033B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

Conventionally, a connector which is an electronic component having a metal fixing portion is surface-mounted on a component fixing portion on a substrate, and the metal fixing portion is soldered to the component fixing portion to firmly fix the connector which is an electronic component. There are gaming machines equipped with electronic substrates (see, for example, Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 9-75509 JP-A-2009-66081

However, in Patent Documents 1 and 2, if the connection strength between the connector, which is an electronic component to be mounted, and the board is low, the connector falls off from the board due to the load applied to the connector due to insertion and removal, resulting in poor connection. Therefore, if the area of the component fixing portion is increased in order to increase the connection strength between these connectors and the board, other wiring patterns, particularly the GND pattern that requires a large capacity, should be provided satisfactorily. There was a problem that it became impossible.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having a substrate capable of providing a wiring pattern satisfactorily while securing an area of a component fixing portion. ..

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine according to the means A of the present invention is
It is a gaming machine that can play games,
A specific electronic component having a connection terminal and a metal fixing portion different from the connection terminal is at least surface-mounted, and has a substrate on which a wiring pattern for electrically connecting each mounted electronic component is formed.
The surface of the substrate has a plurality of component fixing portions for fixing the metal fixing portion with the low-temperature molten metal corresponding to the plurality of the metal fixing portions.
All of the component fixing portions are electrically connected to any of the wiring patterns.
The metal fixing portion is provided on both of the longitudinal end portions of the specific electronic component so as to be drawn out from a mounting compatible surface which is a surface facing the surface of the substrate among the surfaces of the specific electronic component. Ori,
The portion of the surface of the substrate covered by the specific electronic component by mounting the specific electronic component electrically forms each of the component fixing portions corresponding to the metal fixing portions provided on both of the end portions. The connecting electrode to be connected has a planar pattern having a shape corresponding to the mounting compatible surface.
The connecting portion between the planar pattern and the component fixing portion is narrower than the width of the component fixing portion .
The substrate has a through hole in the component fixing portion and has a through hole.
The specific electronic component is electrically connected to the wiring pattern on the surface of the substrate opposite to the surface on which the specific electronic component is mounted through the through hole.
It is characterized by that.
In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine according to the means 1 of the present invention is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A substrate (for example, an LED substrate) on which at least a specific electronic component (for example, a connector) having a metal fixing portion (for example, a metal fixing portion 651) is mounted and a wiring pattern for electrically connecting each mounted electronic component is formed. 275)
A component fixing portion (for example, fixing pad P) for fixing the metal fixing portion with a low-temperature molten metal (for example, solder) is formed on the substrate.
The component fixing portion is electrically connected to any of the wiring patterns (for example, GND pattern).
Moreover,
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, and
A decidable means capable of deciding to control the advantageous state by a different ratio according to a set set value, and
An information output means that can output setting value information that can specify which setting value is set, and
An effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect based on the set value information output from the information output means, and an effect execution means.
Equipped with a variable display execution means that can execute variable display,
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the effect executing means executes the suggestion effect at a ratio corresponding to a predetermined set value having a low advantage for the player among the plurality of set values. It is possible and
The variable display executing means is characterized in that variable display can be executed in common when the suggestion effect is executed and when the suggestion effect is not executed.
According to this feature, since the component fixing portion can be formed as a part of the wiring pattern, it is not necessary to provide the component fixing portion separately from the wiring pattern, so that the wiring pattern can be secured while securing the area of the fixing portion. Can be provided satisfactorily. In addition, in a gaming machine configured so that control of an advantageous state can be executed based on a set set value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the means 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The substrate is formed with a plurality (for example, two) of the component fixing portions corresponding to the plurality of (for example, two) of the metal fixing portions of the electronic component.
Each component fixing portion is electrically connected to the wiring pattern (in FIG. 24, two metal fixing portions 651 are soldered to two fixing pads P corresponding to each).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the electronic component is fixed by a plurality of component fixing portions, the occupied area of one component fixing portion can be suppressed, the degree of freedom of wiring can be increased, and the electronic component can be used. It is also possible to prevent the applied load from being concentrated on the component fixing portion of 1.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or the means 2.
The wiring pattern in which the component fixing portion is electrically connected is characterized in that it is a ground (GND) pattern.
According to this feature, it is possible to secure the area of the component fixing portion while securing the capacity of the ground (GND) pattern.

The gaming machine of the means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 3.
At least the specific electronic component is mounted by surface mounting on the substrate on which the fixing pad portion to be the component fixing portion is formed on the surface (for example, the connector 650 is formed on the component mounting surface with the fixing pad P formed on the component mounting surface). The part mounted on the surface mount type LED board 275)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the component fixing portion can be formed on the surface of the substrate, and the wiring pattern can be formed inside the substrate corresponding to the component fixing portion, so that the wiring pattern can be provided satisfactorily. Can be done.

The gaming machine of the means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 4.
The substrate, said it has a thru-hole in the anchor pad portion, said thru via holes, are wiring patterns and electrical connection other than the substrate surface (e.g., in paragraph 0250, thru hole in the fixed pad P Is provided and it is described that it may be connected to the solder surface or the GND pattern in the substrate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to form a thru-hole in the anchor pad portion forming a wiring pattern, as compared to the case of forming the individually thru holes, it is possible to suppress the area occupied by the thru-hole.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the following means 6 to 13. Conventionally, in some gaming machines, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-101428, a title is displayed to notify the type of reach effect at the start of reach effect. In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, it is desired to enhance the effect of the effect, and in view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of the effect.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of means 6 according to the present invention is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the control is performed in the advantageous state, and
A title notification means (for example, a production control CPU 120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect is provided.
The title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 55 (D) and 55 (F)).
According to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of the means 7 is the gaming machine according to the means 6.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of the suggestion effect, and
In the plurality of types of the suggestion effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be feasible in a common manner (for example, FIG. 55 (C)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which suggestive effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of the means 8 is the gaming machine according to the means 6 or the means 7.
At a plurality of execution timings during the execution of the suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a notice effect) that suggests that the effect is controlled to the advantageous state.
The execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the title is notified.

The gaming machine of the means 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 6 to the means 8.
The suggestion effect execution means executes at least a first suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestion effect. It is possible
In the second suggestion effect, the title notification means may notify the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.
According to such a configuration, the notification of the title according to the suggestion effect can be executed, so that the effect of the effect is improved.

The gaming machine of the means 10 is the gaming machine according to the means 9.
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state may be higher when the first suggestion effect is executed than when the second suggestion effect is executed.
According to such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

The gaming machine of the means 11 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 6 to the means 10.
The suggestion effect execution means may enable the suggestion effect to be executed in an effect mode related to the title notified in the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

The gaming machine of the means 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 6 to the means 11.
Detection means (for example, stick controller 31A or push button 31B) capable of detecting the movement of the player, and
A specific display execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) for performing a specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection means is further provided.
The specific display execution means is
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) that are more advantageous to the player than the first specific display are displayed. It is possible and
During the non-valid period of detection by the detection means, after displaying the first specific display, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIGS. 63 (E) and 64 (I)).
During the valid period of detection by the detection means, the operation effect using the second specific display after the change may be executed (for example, FIGS. 64 (J) and 64 (K)).
According to such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

The gaming machine of the means 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 6 to the means 12.
As a suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, the first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (display by the first size shutter image 31AK061 displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. 65A). Etc.) and a second suggestion display whose display size is the second size (second size reach title image 31AK062 or the like displayed at the time of the reach title production shown in FIG. 65 (d)) (for example, an image). A display device 5 and a CPU 120 for effect control) are further provided.
The display means
Multiple types of elements having different aspects (element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry), etc. shown in FIGS. 65 (a) and 65 (d)) It is possible to display a specific image (such as the fruit pattern shown in FIGS. 65A and 65D) composed of the above.
When either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display is displayed in the pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. (Display so that elements E1 to E5 are included in any of the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 65A and 65D).
According to such a configuration, a specific image can be preferably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. This makes it possible to accurately convey that a specific image has been displayed.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. The front view of the effect device ((A) is a view of the initial state, and (B) is a view of the state in which the movable body is advanced). It is an exploded perspective view of the production device seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the production device seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a movable body seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a movable body seen from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of a movable body seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a movable body seen from the front. (A) is a front view (initial state) of the movable body. (B) is a front view (initial state) of the inside of the movable body with the decorative body removed. (A) is a front view of the movable body (state when the first to fourth character members move). (B) is a front view of the inside of the movable body from which the decorative body and the like are removed (state when the first to fourth character members are moved). It is a figure explaining the relationship between the deformation of a decorative body and the brightness. It is a figure which shows the LED substrate, (A) is a perspective view seen from the front, (B) is a plan view seen from the arrow B in (A). It is a figure which shows the LED substrate, (A) is the sectional view of the cutting line XIVA-XIVA in FIG. 13 (B), (B) is the sectional view of the cutting line XIVB-XIVB in FIG. It is a figure which shows the LED substrate, (A) is an enlarged view of "XVA part" in FIG. ) Cross-sectional view seen from the arrow C inside. It is a figure which shows the execution example of an effect. It is a figure which shows the other example of the LED substrate, (A) is a plan view, (B) is a sectional view of the cutting line BB in (A). It is a figure which shows the other example of the LED substrate, (A) is the sectional view of the cutting line XVIIIA-XVIIIA in FIG. 17 (A), (B) is the enlarged view of the "B part" in (A). It is a figure for demonstrating another example of an LED board, (A) is a figure which arranged electronic components without considering the curvature of a substrate body, (B) is a figure which arranged electronic components from the arrangement of (A), etc. The modified figure. It is a front view which shows the state which removed the cover body from a movable body. It is a detailed view which shows the LED substrate provided inside the movable body. It is a figure which shows the improved signal allocation form used in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the signal allocation form before improvement. (A) and (b) are perspective views showing a connector and a mounting electrode mounted on the component mounting surface of FIG. 21 (A). (A) and (b) are perspective views showing other shapes of the connector mounted on the component mounting surface of FIG. 21 (A). It is a figure which shows the circuit structure as the modification 12 of this invention. (A) is a front view showing the first effect body, and (B) is a rear view. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the state which the 1st effect body was seen diagonally from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the state which the 1st effect body was seen obliquely from the back. FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 27 (A). FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 27 (A). FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 27 (B). FIG. 27 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD. (A) is a rear view showing the light emitting mode of the first effect body, (B) is a front view showing the positional relationship between the first effect body and the second effect body, and (C) is a first effect body and the second effect. It is a schematic plan view which shows the positional relationship with a body. (A) is a front view of a main part showing a state in which the first effect body is viewed through a game board, and (B) is a view showing a main part of a substrate. FIG. 33 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE of FIG. 33 (B). (A) is a diagram showing a wiring connection state between the LED board and the effect control board, and (B) is a diagram showing a wiring connection state between the LED board and the effect control board as a modification 13 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd initialization process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example of the operation control at the time of non-detection, the operation control at the time of detection, and the operation control for confirmation of actual operation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation speed example of the operation control at the time of non-detection, the operation control at the time of detection, and the operation control for actual operation confirmation. It is a figure for demonstrating the circuit structure of the shielding unit control board. It is a figure for demonstrating the circuit structure of the shielding unit control board in the modification 15. It is a figure for demonstrating the circuit structure of the shielding unit control board in the modification 16. It is a figure for demonstrating the circuit structure of the shielding unit control board in the modification 17. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in another embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern and the type of reach. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advance notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the decision ratio in the advance notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in the state where the frame for the gaming machine is opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each big hit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), (C). Is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for loss. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting change process. It is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the display content of a display monitor. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows the opening and closing of the frame for a game machine in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 2. It is a figure which shows the opening and closing of the frame for a game machine in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pachinko game machine in the modification 3. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display monitor in modification 4 and the display content of the display monitor. FIG. 5 is a time chart showing a display time of an item displayed on the display monitor in the modified example 4, and an explanatory diagram for explaining a change in the display content of the display monitor. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in the state where the frame for the gaming machine is opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the loss variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table. (A) is a simplified front view of the main board, and (B) is an explanatory view for explaining the display contents of the display monitor. (A) is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the display monitor, and (B-1) to (B-6) are explanatory diagrams for explaining changes in the display contents of the display monitor. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation processing and setting change processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process which is executed at the time of power-on. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the setting change processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows a part of an effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the initial roll determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start waiting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect decision table before a game. It is a flowchart which shows an example of suggestion effect determination processing during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect decision table during a game. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing during a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect determination table, the accessory effect effect determination table, and the light guide plate effect determination table during a big hit. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows the opening and closing of the frame for a game machine in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 2. It is a figure which shows the opening and closing of the frame for a game machine in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pachinko game machine in the modification 3.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area 10 is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area 10. Further, the game machine frame 3 is provided with a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the game area 10 can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area 10 can be seen through the glass window 50a.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, and a methacrylic resin, and is formed in a substantially square shape in front view. It is composed of a board surface plate 2A provided with (not shown), a guide rail 2b, and the like, and a spacer member 2B integrally attached to the back surface side of the board surface plate 2A. The game board 2 is formed of a non-translucent member such as a veneer board in a substantially square shape in front view, and is provided on a board surface board provided with obstacle nails (not shown), guide rails 2b, etc. on the front game board surface. May be configured.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B for performing the above are provided. These are composed of 7-segment LEDs (light emitting diodes) or the like, and the special symbol may be a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to change (display the variable display) a plurality of types of special symbols by an update display or the like (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a derived display) as a display result (variable display result) (the same applies to other variable displays described later). It should be noted that scroll display, deformation, enlargement / reduction, and the like may be performed as fluctuations in the design (particularly, the decorative design described later).

In the following, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as the "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is referred to as the "second special symbol". Also called. Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game".

An effect display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The effect display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. The effect display device 5 is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 and can be visually recognized through the opening 2c formed in the game board 2. A frame-shaped center decorative frame 51 is provided in the opening 2c of the game board 2.

On the screen of the effect display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) that are different from the special symbols as a plurality of types of decorative identification information can be changed. The display is done. As an example, on the screen of the effect display device 5, each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. (For example, scroll display in the vertical direction or update display) is performed in.

A display area 5H is also arranged on the screen of the effect display device 5. In the display area 5H, the first reserved display image (here, the circle image) corresponding to the first special figure game (variable display of the decorative symbol) whose execution is suspended is displayed right-justified, and the execution is suspended. The second hold display image (here, the circle image) corresponding to the second special figure game (variable display of the decorative pattern) is displayed left-justified.

The number of reserved special figures games is also referred to as the number of reserved special figures. In particular, the number of holdings of the first special figure game is referred to as the number of holdings of the first special figure. The number of holdings of the second special figure game is called the number of holdings of the second special figure. The number of the first reserved display images indicates the number of the first special figure reserved storage, and the number of the second reserved display images indicates the number of the second special figure reserved storage. The first hold display image and the second hold display image may be collectively referred to as a hold display image.

In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided to display the number of special figure hold storages in a identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B is configured to include a plurality of LEDs, and displays the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. do.

Below the effect display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The ordinary winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening, the first start opening switch 22A (see FIG. 2) is turned on, whereby the entry of the game ball is detected (at this time, a predetermined number (for example, three). ) The prize ball is paid out, and the first special figure game can be started.)

The ordinary variable winning ball device 6B includes an ordinary electric accessory having a movable plate that is changed to a closed state as a protruding position and an open state as an retracted position by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2) for the ordinary electric accessory. Form the second starting winning opening. In the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, for example, when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable plate is in the protruding position, so that the movable plate protrudes to the game area 10 side and the game ball enters the second starting winning opening. It will be in a closed state (also called the second start winning opening will be in a closed state). On the other hand, the normally variable winning ball device 6B is opened so that the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening by being in the retracted position where the movable plate retracts to the game board 2 side when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state. It becomes a state (it is also called that the second start winning opening becomes an open state). When the game ball enters the second start winning opening, the second start opening switch 22B (see FIG. 2) is turned on, whereby the entry of the game ball is detected (at this time, a predetermined number (for example, three). ) The prize ball is paid out, and the second special figure game can be started.)

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2) for the large winning opening door, and is specified to change between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form a large winning opening as an area.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is in the off state, the large winning opening door is in the closed state and the game ball enters the large winning opening (for example, Can't pass). On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When the game ball enters the large winning opening, the count switch 23 (see FIG. 2) is turned on, whereby the entry of the game ball is detected. At this time, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, for example.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and can display a variable display of an ordinary symbol (also referred to as "ordinary diagram" or "ordinary diagram") as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. conduct. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also referred to as a normal figure game (also referred to as a "normal figure game").

The normal drawing game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the gate switch 21 of FIG. 2 is turned on, whereby the passing of the game ball is detected.

On the right side of the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is suspended, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and further, a directing LED 9 for a game effect is provided around the game area. There is.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like is provided to launch a game ball as a game medium toward a game area by a hitting ball launching device. There is.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) An upper plate (ball hitting plate) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, a lower plate is provided for holding (storing) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper plate so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

An effect device 200 is arranged below the effect display device 5. The effect device 200 can perform the effect by operating in accordance with or independently of various effect images such as variable display of identification information. Further, a first effect body 800 and a second effect body 900 arranged on the back side of the first effect body 800 are provided on the left side of the effect device 200.

For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game or a normal figure game, management of various start prizes and various reserved memories, a big hit lottery or a normal figure hit lottery). It has a function of controlling execution, control of a jackpot game state, transmission of an effect control command to the effect control board 12, and a function of transmitting an effect control command to the effect control board 12. The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

As an example, the CPU 103 realizes the function of the main board 11 (control of the progress of the game) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data (data such as fluctuation patterns, effect control commands, and various tables) stored in the ROM 101 are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals are input and an output port for transmitting various signals.

The CPU 103 passes through the I / O 105 to the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20, the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, and the normal figure hold display. It outputs signals that control (drive) the device 25C and the like, and controls them.

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game medium passes through or a game medium passes through) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and variously based on the received effect control commands. It has a function to execute the effect (including variable display of decorative patterns and effect device).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

As an example, the effect control board 12 functions (executes the effect) by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 by the effect control CPU 120. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 121 (data used for the effect control pattern, data of various tables, etc.) are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The display control unit 123 outputs a video signal of the effect image to be displayed on the effect display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120, and displays the effect image on the effect display device 5. As an example, the display control unit 123 may be equipped with VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), and the like.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used when controlling the effect operation. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes, for example, an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals.

The voice control board 13 has a function of outputting sound (sound designated by the sound effect signal) from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound effect signal from the effect control board 12.

The LED control board 14 has a function of turning on / off the effect LED 9 (turning on / off according to the driving content indicated by the illumination signal) based on the illumination signal from the effect control board 12.

The effect display device 5 includes a display panel including a liquid crystal panel, an EL panel, and the like, and a driver circuit for driving the display panel. The video signal supplied from the display control unit 123 to the effect display device 5 via the I / O 125 is input to the driver circuit. The driver circuit displays the image represented by the video signal on the display panel. As a result, various effects images and the like are displayed on the effect display device 5.

The effect device 200 includes a drive mechanism 210 and a movable body 250, and these include an effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) by exchanging signals (control signals, detection signals, etc., which will be described later) with the effect control board 12. Is controlled by.

(Progress of games, progress of production, etc.)
A game medium (game ball) is launched toward the game area by a player's rotation operation on the ball striking operation handle included in the pachinko game machine 1.

(Progress of the game controlled by the main board 11)
When the game ball that has flowed down the game area passes through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game (variable display of the normal symbol) is started. In addition, when the normal figure game cannot be started (when the start condition is not satisfied), such as when another normal figure game is already executed or during the following open control, the normal figure game is limited to four or the like. Execution is suspended. The held Fuzu game is executed when the start condition for starting the Fuzu game is satisfied (other Fuzu games are not executed, the release control is not in progress, etc.). When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 when the number of reserved memory of the normal figure has reached the upper limit, the number of stored memory of the normal figure does not increase and the passage is invalidated.

The variable display result that is stopped and displayed in the normal figure game includes a normal figure per symbol (for example, a normal figure such as "7") and a normal figure lost symbol (for example, a normal figure such as "-"). .. When the symbol per normal figure is stopped and displayed (derived), it is when the variable display result is "per normal figure". When the normal figure lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived), it is when the variable display result is "normal figure lost".

At the time of "normal drawing hit", the opening control (the second starting winning opening is opened) is performed so that the movable wing piece of the normally variable winning ball device 6B is set to the tilting position for a predetermined period. In the case of "normal figure loss", the opening control is not performed.

When the game ball that has flowed down the game area enters the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game is started. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the second special figure game is started. When the special figure game cannot be started (when the start condition is not satisfied), such as when another special figure game is already running or when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described later, four of each are used. The execution of the special figure game is suspended up to the upper limit. The reserved special figure game is executed when the start condition for starting the special figure game is satisfied (other special figure games are not executed, the jackpot game is not in progress, etc.).

When the game ball enters the first start winning opening when the first special figure reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value, the first special figure reserved memory number does not increase and the entry is invalidated (the entry is invalidated (). There may be a prize ball). When the game ball enters the second start winning opening when the second special figure reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value, the second special figure reserved memory number does not increase and the entry is invalidated (the entry is invalidated). There may be a prize ball).

1st special figure The entry (winning) of a game ball that increases the number of reserved memories into the 1st start winning opening is also called the 1st starting winning. 2nd special figure The entry (winning) of a game ball that increases the number of reserved memories into the 2nd start winning opening is also called the 2nd starting winning. These prizes are collectively referred to as the start prize.

The variable display result that is stopped and displayed in the special figure game includes a jackpot symbol (for example, a special symbol such as "3" and "7") and a lost symbol (for example, a special symbol such as "-"). .. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed (derived), it is when the variable display result is "big hit". When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived), it is when the variable display result is "missed".

When the variable display result of the first special figure game or the second special figure game is "big hit" (specific display result), it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. When the variable display result is "missing", it is not controlled to the jackpot game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened. The open state is until the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9), whichever is earlier. Will be continued. Such an open state is called a round game (also simply called a "round"). In the jackpot game state, the round game is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, "15 times") is reached (the jackpot is closed during a period other than the round game).

For "big hit", big hit types such as "non-probable change" and "probable change" are set. When the jackpot type is "non-probability change", the jackpot symbol of "3" is stopped and displayed. When the jackpot type is "probability change", the jackpot symbol of "7" is stopped and displayed.

The "big hit" when the jackpot type is "probability variation" may be referred to as "probability variation jackpot", and the "big hit" when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation" may be referred to as "non-probability variation jackpot". In addition, the jackpot game state based on the "probability change jackpot" may be referred to as the "probability variation jackpot game state". In addition, the jackpot game state based on the "non-probability change jackpot" may be referred to as the "non-probability variation jackpot game state".

After the probability variation big hit game state is completed, the probability that the variable display result becomes "big hit" (big hit probability) is controlled to be higher than the normal state. The probabilistic state continues until the next jackpot game state is started.

After the probabilistic jackpot gaming state or the non-probabilistic jackpot gaming state ends, the average variable display time (variable display period) is controlled to be shorter than the normal state. In the time saving state, the end condition of either one of the predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment) of the special figure game being executed and the next big hit game state being started is satisfied first. Continue until you do.

In the time saving state, the normally variable winning ball device 6B is opened and closed in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second starting winning opening than in the non-time saving state such as the normal state. It may be changed to. For example, control to make the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the normal figure game (the period of variable display of the normal figure, also called the normal figure fluctuation time) shorter than in the normal state, or variable display in each normal figure game. The normal variable winning ball device 6B may be changed between the open state and the closed state in an advantageous change mode by controlling to improve the probability that the result will be "per normal figure" as compared with the normal state. Such control is referred to as high open control (also referred to as "time saving control" or "high base control"). By being controlled to such a time saving state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes a "big hit" is shortened, and the gaming state becomes a state more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

The normal state is a gaming state other than an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probabilistic variation state, and the variable display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability of becoming a "hit" and the probability that the variable display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" is in the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the predetermined return processing is not executed after the closing).

The time saving state is also called "high base", and the gaming state that is not the time saving state is also called "low base" or "non-time saving state". The probabilistic state is also called "high probability", and the gaming state that is not the probabilistic state is also called "low probability" or "non-probability change".

(Progress of the game controlled by the effect control board 12)
In the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the effect display device 5, the first special figure game or the second special figure game is started. Then, the variable display of the decorative pattern (this is also a kind of production) is started. At the timing when the variable display result (also referred to as the fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (variable display result) becomes the variable display display result of the decorative symbol (variable display result). The combination of the three decorative symbols) is also displayed as a stop (derivative display).

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the effect display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later (“reach variation”). (Also referred to as "design") is a display mode in which fluctuations are continuing.

Further, in this embodiment, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display. As the reach effect, normal reach, super reach A, and super reach B, which have different production modes, are prepared. In this embodiment, the jackpot expectation is higher in the order of Super Reach B> Super Reach A> Normal Reach.

The jackpot expectation is, for example, the ratio at which the variable display result of the special figure game is "big hit", and here, the ratio at which the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "big hit".

When the variable display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the effect display device 5. (The display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbol on a predetermined effective line in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" (for example, "7" at the time of probability variation jackpot, non-probability variation jackpot" At the time of, "6" etc.) are all displayed as a stop.

When the variable display result is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not become the reach mode, and the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. There is. If the variable display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss combination"). ”) May be stopped and displayed.

When the super reach is executed, the effect using the effect device 200 is executed (details will be described later).

(Direction device 200)
Next, the details of the effect device 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 to 15. In the following description, the direction in which the player is located is the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the opposite direction is the rear (see FIG. 4 and the like). Further, the up / down / left / right directions as viewed from the player located in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be defined as the up / down / left / right directions of the effect device 200 as they are (see FIGS. 3 and 4 and the like). Further, unless otherwise specified, each member constituting the effect device 200 is made of synthetic resin or metal. Further, unless otherwise specified, the mounting of each member may be performed by an appropriate method such as mounting using screws, screws or the like, or mounting such as fitting.

As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the effect device 200 includes a drive mechanism 210 and a movable body 250. The drive mechanism 210 moves the movable body 250 in the vertical direction. The movable body 250 is decorated with a decoration peculiar to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and such decoration can enhance the effect of the effect. The movable body 250 can move upward from the initial position (FIG. 3 (A)) and advance to the advance position (FIG. 3 (B)) by the drive mechanism 210 (returning from the advance position to the initial position). You can also). In the initial position of the movable body 250, most of the movable body 250 is located behind a transparent resin cover (attached to the game board 2 or the like) (not shown), and the movable body 250 is the resin cover. It is visually recognized through. On the other hand, the movable body 250 advances to the front of the effect display device 5 by moving to the advance position, and is visually recognized without the resin cover. The game board 2 may be transparent, and the movable body 250 may be located behind the game board 2 at least in the initial position and visually recognized through the game board 2.

(Structure of drive mechanism 210, etc.)
First, the drive mechanism 210 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 to 5. The drive mechanism 210 includes a base body 211, a drive motor mounting member 213, a drive motor 215, first gears to sixth gears 217 to 222, a detection sensor 223, a rotary arm 225, a slide member 227, an elastic body 229, and the like (particularly). , See FIG. 5).

The base body 211 is the base of the drive mechanism 210 and supports various parts. The base body 211 is fixed to the game board 2 or the like of the pachinko game machine 1. A cover body CV (shown only in FIG. 3) that covers the drive motor 215 and the like from the front and hides it from the player is attached to the base body 211. The base body 211 includes supports 211A to 211F, concave rails 211J, guide holes 211K, and hooking portions 211L.

The supports 211A to 211F are formed of a cylindrical boss (which may be cylindrical; the same shall apply hereinafter for the columnar shape) protruding forward. Each of the supports 211A to 211E rotatably supports the second to seventh gears 218 to 222. Each gear has a through hole in the center thereof, and is rotatably supported by inserting a support into the through hole. Each gear can rotate about the central axis of each support as a rotation axis. The support 211F rotatably supports the rotary arm 225 (detailed later).

The concave rail 211J is a rail having a U-shaped cross section (the vertical line is the bottom surface), and extends in the vertical direction. A rack 251 included in the movable body 250 is slidably fitted to the concave rail 211J. The concave rail 211J guides the direction of movement of the rack 251 (that is, movement of the movable body 250) in the vertical direction.

The guide hole 211K is a through hole extending in the vertical direction, and is provided at a portion where the slide member 227 is attached. The slide member 227 is provided with a protrusion (not shown) extending rearward, and the protrusion is inserted into the guide hole 211K. Further, a retaining member (not shown) larger than the width (length in the left-right direction) of the guide hole 211K is attached to the rear end of the protrusion. As a result, the slide member 227 is attached to the base body 211 so as not to move in the forward direction (do not come off from the base body 211) and to be movable in the vertical direction (guided by the guide hole 211K).

The hook portion 211L is a protrusion having a notch, and one end of the elastic body 229 is hooked on the notch.

The drive motor 215 is attached to the base body 211 via the drive motor attachment member 213. The drive motor 215 has a rotating shaft 215A. The drive motor 215 is a stepping motor here, and its operation is controlled by the effect control board 12 (FIG. 2). The drive motor 215 rotates the rotation shaft 215A (FIG. 5) by a predetermined angle in synchronization with the control signal (here, the drive pulse) from the effect control board 12. A first gear 217 is fitted to the rotating shaft 215A. Therefore, the first gear 217 rotates together with the rotating shaft 215A. The first gear 217 meshes with the second gear 218.

The third gear 219 has a columnar columnar portion 219A in which a part of the inside is hollowed out, and an external gear 219B arranged behind the columnar portion 219A. The external gear 219B meshes with the second gear 218. Further, the third gear 221 includes a detection piece 219C having an arcuate outer edge protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 219A, and a columnar protrusion protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 219A and further protruding rearward. It has 219D and.

The detection piece 219C rotates together with the third gear 219 and is detected by the detection sensor 223 attached to the base body 211. The detection sensor 223 is, for example, a photo sensor (such as a sensor that detects that the space between the light receiving unit and the light emitting unit is shielded by a detection target), and when the detection piece 219C is detected, the detection indicates that the detection is detected. Output a signal. As will be described later, in this embodiment, the movable body 250 moves to the advanced position in conjunction with the rotation of the third gear 219. The detection piece 219C is arranged at a position detected by the detection sensor 223 when the rotating gear rotates until the movable body 250 is positioned at the advanced position.

The fourth gear 220 has a shape in which two small-diameter first gears (not shown) and a large-diameter second gear have a common rotation axis and are stacked. The first gear is located behind the second gear and meshes with the fifth gear 221. The second gear meshes with the teeth of the rack 251 included in the movable body 250. The fifth gear 221 and the sixth gear 222 mesh with the linear teeth 227A included in the slide member 227.

The rotary arm 225 has a fan shape. The rotary arm 225 has a long hole 225A into which the columnar protrusion 252A included in the movable body 250 is inserted, a long hole 225B into which the protrusion 219D is inserted, and a through hole 225C into which the support 211F is inserted. Be prepared. The through hole 225C is located at the center of a circle forming a fan in the shape of the rotary arm 225. The rotary arm 225 is rotatably attached to the base body 211 with the central axis of the support body 211C as the rotation axis. The elongated hole 225A is arranged on the first hypotenuse of the fan (the side formed by the radius of the circle), and is elongated in the direction in which the first hypotenuse extends. The elongated hole 225B is arranged on the second hypotenuse of the fan, and is elongated in the direction in which the second hypotenuse extends. The width of the elongated hole 225A (length in the short direction) is substantially the same as the diameter of the columnar protrusion 252A (the diameter is slightly shorter). The width of the elongated hole 225B is substantially the same as the diameter of the columnar protrusion 219D (the diameter is slightly shorter).

The slide member 227 includes linear teeth 227A (extending in the vertical direction) that mesh with the fifth gear 221 and the sixth gear 222, and functions as a rack having the fifth gear 221 and the sixth gear 222 as pinions. Further, the slide member 227 is provided with a hook portion 227B having a notch at the lower portion (below the hook portion 227B of the slide member 227), and the other end of the elastic body 229 is hooked. As described above, the slide member 227 can move (slide) in the vertical direction with respect to the base body 211. As described above, the fifth gear 221 meshes with the fourth gear 220 and the teeth 227A of the slide member 227, and the fourth gear 220 (pinion) meshes with the teeth of the rack 251 included in the movable body 250. ing. Therefore, the slide member 227 is interlocked with the movable body 250. Specifically, when the slide member 227 moves upward, the movable body 250 also moves upward (see FIG. 3 and the like). The sixth gear 222 guides the slide member 227 so that the slide member 227 does not tilt.

The elastic body 229 includes a coil spring, rubber, and the like. One end of the elastic body 229 is hooked on the hooking portion 211L of the base body 211, and the other end of the elastic body 229 is hooked on the hooking portion 227B of the slide member 227. Then, the elastic body 229 is in an extended state when the slide member 227 is located at the lowest position (when the slide member 227 is in the lowermost position (in the state of FIGS. 3A and 5 to 4)). That is, the slide member 227 is urged upward (received an upward force) by the elastic force of the elastic body 229. Since the slide member 227 and the movable body 250 are interlocked as described above, the movable body 250 is also urged upward by the elastic force of the elastic body 229. That is, the elastic body 229 assists the movable body 250 to move upward.

(Action of drive mechanism 210, etc.)
When the drive motor 215 rotates the rotating shaft 215A in the forward direction (rotates counterclockwise), the first gear 217 also rotates in the forward direction. Since the second gear 218 meshes with the first gear 217 and the second gear 218 meshes with the third gear 219, the second gear 218 rotates in the reverse direction (clockwise rotation) due to the forward rotation of the rotating shaft 215A. ), And the third gear 219 rotates forward. Due to the forward rotation of the third gear 219, the protrusion 219D also moves while drawing an arc. The protrusion 219D pushes the inner wall of the elongated hole 225B as it moves. As a result, the rotary arm 225 rotates upward (counterclockwise) about the support 211F. The rotation of the rotary arm 225 causes the protrusion 252A included in the movable body 250 inserted in the elongated hole 225A to move upward. As a result, the movable body 250 moves upward (advanced position). When the drive motor 215 reversely rotates the rotating shaft 215A, the movable body 250 moves downward (initial position) (the rotation direction of each gear may be reversed). In this way, the drive mechanism 210 converts the rotational force of the drive motor 215 into a drive force that moves the movable body 250 in the vertical direction. As described above, the upward movement of the movable body 250 is assisted by the elastic body 229. Further, the elastic body 229 acts as a resistance against the downward movement of the movable body 250. As a result, the load on the drive motor 215 due to the weight of the movable body 250 can be reduced, and the movable body 250 can be smoothly moved in the vertical direction.

When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off, the movable body 250 may be stopped at the advanced position. As a result, the period of the stretched state of the elastic body 229 can be shortened, and it is possible to reduce the elastic force of the elastic body from becoming weaker with the lapse of time.

The movable body 250 is moved in the vertical direction under the control of the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). Specifically, when the movable body 250 is moved from the initial position to the advanced position, the effect control board 12 controls the drive motor 215 to rotate the rotating shaft 215A, and detects the detection piece 219C by the detection sensor 223. When (when the detection signal is received from the detection sensor 223 or when the detection signal is received for a certain period of time), that is, when the movable body 250 moves to the advanced position, the rotation of the rotation shaft 215A is stopped. As a result, the movable body 250 can be stopped at the advanced position. When the movable body 250 is returned from the advance position to the initial position, the drive motor 215 is driven by the same amount as the rotation angle when the movable body 250 is moved from the initial position to the advance position (for example, the information is held in the RAM 122). The rotation shaft 215A is rotated in the reverse direction. For example, the number of supplied drive pulses is counted, and the same number of drive pulses are supplied at the time of reverse rotation to reverse-rotate the rotation shaft 215A. A detection sensor (same sensor as the detection sensor 223, for example, a photo sensor) is provided corresponding to the position of the detection piece 219C when the movable body 250 is in the initial position, and the detection sensor 219C is used. When detected, the reverse rotation of the rotation shaft 215A may be stopped.

(Structure of movable body 250, etc.)
Next, the structural details of the movable body 250 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 15. The movable body 250 has a heart-shaped decorative body 269 and a member representing the LOVE character provided in front of the heart-shaped decorative body 250, and the decorative body 269 is deformed or each character of the LOVE is moved to produce an effect. Perform highly effective production.

The movable body 250 includes a rack 251, a plate-shaped member 252, a substrate 253, a base body 255, an LED substrate 256, a drive motor 257, a detection sensor 259, and first to third gears 261 to 263. The first and second slide members 265 to 266, the first and second mounting members 267 to 268, the decorative body 269, the predetermined mechanism X (the member forming the "LOVE" and the mechanism for moving each character of the "LOVE"". ) And.

(Structure other than the predetermined mechanism X in the movable body 250)
First, configurations other than the predetermined mechanism X will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 7.

The rack 251 has vertically extending teeth that mesh with a fourth gear 220 (such as FIG. 5). As can be seen from the above, the rack 251 is urged upward by the elastic body 229 (FIG. 5 and the like) via the fourth gear 220 and the like.

The plate-shaped member 252 is integrally formed with the rack 251. The plate-shaped member 252 has a columnar protrusion 252A projecting rearward from the plate-shaped main body.

The board 253 is a circuit board having a predetermined circuit and electrically connected to the effect control board 12. The board 253 relays control signals supplied from the effect control board 12 to the drive motor 257, the drive motor 273 described later, the LED board 275 described later, and the like, and also performs effect control from the detection sensor 259 described later and the detection sensor S described later. The detection signal supplied to the substrate 12 is relayed. The substrate 253 is attached to the rear surface of the base body 255. The substrate 253 has through holes and notches, and the plate-shaped member 252 is attached to the rear surface of the base body 255 with screws, screws, etc. via the through holes and notches. As a result, the rack 251 is also attached to the base body 255.

The base body 255 serves as the base of the movable body 250 and supports various parts on the front surface and the rear surface. The base body 255 includes rack portions 255A and 255B extending in the left-right direction on the front surface (these are used in the predetermined mechanism X). Further, the base body 255 includes protrusions 255C to 255H made of a columnar boss or the like protruding rearward from the periphery (rear surface or the like). The base body 255 includes protrusions 255I to 255L composed of columnar bosses or the like protruding forward from the periphery (front surface or the like) (these are used in the predetermined mechanism X). The base body 255 also includes a fixing portion 255J to which a detection sensor (referred to as a detection sensor S for the sake of explanation) (not shown) is fixed. The detection sensor S detects the detection piece 266D of the second slide member 266, which will be described later, and may be a photo sensor or the like like the detection sensor 223. Further, the LED substrate 256 is inserted into the upper portion of the base body 255, and a plurality of insertion portions 255M for fixing the LED substrate 256 are formed.

The LED substrate 256 is held on the curved upper surface of the base body 255 by the insertion portion 255M and the insertion portion 271C (see FIG. 8). The substrate body 256B of the LED substrate 256 has a curved shape that matches the shape of the base body 255. The LED board 256 is electrically connected to the board 253, and various circuits, an LED 256A that emits light, and a connector 256C are mounted on the board body 256B. A light source other than the LED 256A may be used as the light source. The LED substrate 256 causes the LED 256A to emit light based on the control signal from the effect control substrate 12 relayed by the substrate 253. The light emission of the LED 256A illuminates the upper part of the decorative body 269. Since the decorative body 269 can transmit light, the upper part of the decorative body 269 appears to be emitted by the light from the LED 256A. The details of the LED substrate 256 will be described later.

The drive motor 257 is attached to the front surface of the base body 255. The rotation shaft 257A of the drive motor 257 passes through a through hole provided in the base body 255 and extends to the rear of the base body 255. The drive motor 257 operates by a control signal (drive pulse or the like) from the effect control board 12.

The detection sensor 259 is attached to the front surface of the base body 255. The detection target of the detection sensor 259 and the like will be described later (used in the predetermined mechanism X). The detection sensor 259 may be a photo sensor or the like like the detection sensor 223.

The first gear 261 is fitted to the rotating shaft 257A of the drive motor 257 and rotates together with the rotating shaft 257A. The first gear 261 meshes with the second gear 262 and the third gear 263 arranged on the left and right sides of the first gear 261. The second gear 262 is rotatably supported by the base body 255 by inserting the protrusion 255C into the through hole formed in the center thereof. The third gear 263 is rotatably supported by the base body 255 by inserting the protrusion 255D into the through hole formed in the center thereof. Each gear can rotate about the central axis of each protrusion as a rotation axis. The second gear 262 includes a columnar protrusion 262A projecting rearward. The third gear 263 includes a columnar protrusion 263A projecting rearward.

The first slide member 265 is provided with an elongated hole 265A elongated in the vertical direction at the right end portion and an elongated hole 265B elongated in the horizontal direction at the center. A protrusion 262A is inserted into the elongated hole 265A. The width (length in the left-right direction) of the elongated hole 265A is substantially the same as the diameter of the protrusion 262A (the diameter is slightly shorter). The protrusion 262A can move in the elongated hole 265A. In the elongated hole 265B, protrusions 255E and 255F arranged in the left-right direction as an example are inserted. The width (length in the vertical direction) of the elongated hole 265B is substantially the same as the diameter of the protrusions 255E and 255F (the diameter is slightly shorter). The protrusions 255E and 255F can move in the elongated hole 265B. The protrusions 255E and 255F regulate that the first slide member 265 moves in a direction other than the left-right direction. The first slide member 265 has two small holes 265C at the left end.

The second slide member 266 includes an elongated hole 266A elongated in the vertical direction at the left end portion and an elongated hole 266B elongated in the horizontal direction at the center. A protrusion 263A is inserted into the elongated hole 266A. The width (length in the left-right direction) of the elongated hole 266A is substantially the same as the diameter of the protrusion 263A (the diameter is slightly shorter). The protrusion 263A can move in the elongated hole 266A. In the elongated hole 266B, protrusions 255G and 255H arranged in the left-right direction as an example are inserted. The width (length in the vertical direction) of the elongated hole 266B is substantially the same as the diameter of the protrusions 255G and 255H (the diameter is slightly shorter). The protrusions 255G and 255H can move in the elongated hole 266B. The protrusions 255G and 255H regulate the second slide member 266 from moving in a direction other than the left-right direction. The second slide member 266 has two small holes 266C at the right end.

Further, the second slide member 266 includes a detection piece 266D detected by the detection sensor S. The detection piece 266D is arranged at a position detected by the detection sensor S when the second slide member 266 is in the initial position (when the decorative body described later is not deformed. The state shown in FIG. 12A). .. When the detection sensor S detects the detection piece 266D, the detection sensor S supplies a detection signal to that effect to the effect control board 12.

The first mounting member 267 is arranged inside the decorative body 269 (details will be described later). The first mounting member 267 has two small diameter rods 267A protruding rearward. The two small diameter rods 267A pass through each of the two small holes 269F provided in the overhanging portion 269E of the decorative body 269, and are fitted into the two small holes 265C of the first slide member 265, respectively. Therefore, the first attachment member 267 is attached to the left end portion of the first slide member 265 by sandwiching the overhanging portion 269E of the decorative body 269. The first mounting member 267 has a through hole 267B extending in the left-right direction. The portion of the first mounting member 267 that forms the through hole 267B has a shape that enters the through hole 269A of the decorative body 269 (see also FIG. 8 and the like. The first mounting member 267 is a part of the decorative body 269. Visible from the outside). Therefore, the through hole 267B is arranged inside the through hole 269A.

The second mounting member 268 is arranged inside the decorative body 269 (details will be described later). The second mounting member 268 has two small diameter rods 268A protruding rearward. The two small diameter rods 268A pass through each of the two small holes 269G provided in the overhanging portion 269E of the decorative body 269, and are fitted into the two small holes 266C of the second slide member 266, respectively. Therefore, the second attachment member 268 is attached to the right end portion of the second slide member 266 by sandwiching the overhanging portion 269E of the decorative body 269. The second mounting member 268 has a through hole 268B extending in the left-right direction. The portion of the second mounting member 268 that forms the through hole 268B has a shape that enters the through hole 269D of the decorative body 269 (see also FIG. 8 and the like. The second mounting member 268 is partly of the decorative body 269. Visible from the outside). Therefore, the through hole 268B is arranged inside the through hole 269D.

The decorative body 269 has a heart shape bulging forward and is a member capable of transmitting light. The decorative body 269 is provided with a predetermined decoration. The decorative body 269 is made of, for example, natural rubber or various synthetic rubbers including silicone rubber, and is elastically deformable. The decorative body 269 is provided with through holes 269A and 269D on the side thereof and through holes 269B and 269C on the front portion thereof. The ends of the first mounting member 267 and the second mounting member 268 are inserted into the through holes 269A and 269D, respectively. The decorative body 269 has an overhanging portion 269E overhanging inward from the rear end of its side portion. The overhanging portion 269E of the decorative body 269 is provided with two small holes 269F and two small holes 269G, and these are provided with a small diameter rod 267A of the first mounting member 267 (two small holes 265C of the first slide member 265). The small diameter rod 268A of the second mounting member 268 (fitted into the two small holes 266C of the second slide member 266) passes through. Therefore, the decorative body 269 is connected to the first mounting member 267 and the first slide member 265 at the left end portion provided with the small hole 269F, and the second mounting member 268 at the right end portion provided with the small hole 269G. And is connected to the second slide member 266. Further, a substantially triangular notch 269H and a notch 269I are formed in the upper part of the overhanging portion 269E of the decorative body 269. When a compressing force acts on the decorative body 269 from the left-right direction, the notch 269H and the notch 269I close the notched portion. As a result, the decorative body 269 is easily deformed by the compressive force from the left-right direction. The decorative body 269 houses the base body 255 and the like inside. Therefore, the size of the configuration for operating the movable body 250 is made compact.

(Operation for deformation of decorative body 269)
When the drive motor 257 rotates the rotary shaft 257A in the forward direction (rotation to the right), the first gear 261 also rotates in the forward direction. The second gear 262 and the third gear 263 are engaged with the first gear 261, and the rotation shaft 257A rotates in the forward direction, so that the second gear 262 and the third gear 263 rotate in the reverse direction (rotation to the left). Here, the protrusion 262A of the second gear 262 is provided on the upper portion of the second gear 262, while the protrusion 263A of the second gear 263 is provided on the lower portion of the second gear 263. ing. Therefore, when the second gear 262 and the third gear 263 rotate in the reverse direction, the protrusion 262A moves to the left side and the protrusion 263A moves to the right side. That is, the protrusions 262A and the protrusions 263A move in directions away from each other by being at the target positions with respect to the rotation axis of each gear. The protrusion 262A that moves to the left pushes the inner wall of the elongated hole 265A of the first slide member 265 and slides the first slide member 265 to the left (the first mounting member 267 also moves together). The protrusion 263A that moves to the right pushes the inner wall of the elongated hole 266A of the second slide member 266 and slides the second slide member 266 to the right (the second mounting member 268 also moves together). In this way, the first slide member 265 (and the first mounting member 267) and the second slide member 266 (and the second mounting member 268) move in a direction away from each other along the left-right direction.

When the drive motor 257 reversely rotates the rotating shaft 257A, the operation in the opposite direction to the above is performed, and the first slide member 265 and the first mounting member 267 and the second slide member 266 and the second mounting member 268 are separated from each other. It moves in the direction of approaching each other along the left-right direction.

Since the first slide member 265 and the first mounting member 267 are connected with the left end portion of the decorative body 269 sandwiched between them, the left end portion also moves left and right as they move left and right. Since the second slide member 266 and the second mounting member 268 are connected with the right end portion of the decorative body 269 sandwiched between them, the right end portion also moves left and right as they move left and right. Therefore, when the drive motor 257 rotates the rotary shaft 257A in the forward direction, the decorative body 269 elastically deforms so as to be pulled from both the left and right sides (see the figure on the left side in FIG. 12B), and the rotary shaft 257A rotates in the reverse direction. Then, the decorative body 269 elastically deforms as if pressed from both the left and right sides (see the figure on the left side in FIG. 12C). As described above, a substantially triangular notch 269H and a notch 269I are formed in the upper portion of the overhanging portion 269E of the decorative body 269. As a result, when the decorative body 269 is pushed and compressed from both the left and right sides, the notch formed in a substantially triangular shape is closed, and the decorative body 269 is easily deformed.

As described above, the drive motor 257 is controlled by the effect control board 12. By supplying the control signal to the drive motor 257, the effect control board 12 repeats rotating the rotating shaft 257A in the forward direction and rotating it in the reverse direction. Then, the decorative body 269 is elastically deformed so as to be pulled to the left and right, and elastically deformed to be pushed from the left and right. As a result, the heart-shaped ornament 269 appears to beat like a heart (see FIGS. 12 and 16). The effect control board 12 detects that the second slide member 266 is in the initial position (that is, the decorative body 269 is in the initial state (state in FIG. 12A)) by the detection sensor S. When the effect control board 12 receives the detection signal from the detection sensor S (or receives it over a predetermined period of time), the effect control board 12 detects that the second slide member 266 is in the initial position. A detection sensor is provided at the position of the detection piece 266D when the second slide member 266 is at the position of FIGS. 12 (B) and 12 (C), and the movable body 250 is in the state of FIGS. 12 (B) and (C). The presence may be detected, and the rotation direction of the rotation shaft 257A of the drive motor 257 may be controlled based on this detection.

(Structure of predetermined mechanism X, etc.)
Next, the detailed structure of the predetermined mechanism X will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 11 and the like. The predetermined mechanism X includes a cover body 271, a drive motor 273, an LED substrate 275, a cover body 277, first to fourth character members 281 to 284, and a driving force transmission mechanism X1 (see FIG. 8). ).

The cover body 271 covers the base body 255 from the front by being attached to the base body 255 to which the driving force transmission mechanism X1 or the like is attached from the front. The cover body 271 has through holes 271A to 271B (these uses and the like will be described later). Further, the LED substrate 256 is inserted into the upper portion of the cover body 271, and a plurality of insertion portions 271C for fixing the LED substrate 256 are formed.

The drive motor 273 is attached to the front surface of the cover body 271. The rotation shaft of the drive motor 273 passes through a through hole provided in the cover body 271 and extends to the rear of the cover body 271. The drive motor 273 operates by a control signal (drive pulse or the like) from the effect control board 12.

The LED substrate 275 is electrically connected to the substrate 253. The LED board 275 mounts various circuits and the LED 275A that emits light in front (decorative body 269). A light source other than the LED 275A may be used. The LED substrate 275 causes the LED 275A to emit light based on the control signal from the effect control substrate 12 relayed by the substrate 253. The decorative body 269 is illuminated by the light emission of the LED 275A (irradiation of light from the LED 275A). Since the decorative body 269 can transmit light, it appears to emit light by such illumination. The LED substrate 275 has a large notch 275B extending from above to the center. The way of emitting light appears to change due to the elastic deformation of the decorative body 269. This point will be described later.

The cover body 277 has through holes 277A and 277B (these uses and the like will be described later). The cover body 277 covers the front of the LED substrate 275, the drive motor 257 (FIG. 6), and the drive motor 273, and is interposed between these and the decorative body 269. Further, the cover body 277 covers the upper part of the LED substrate 256. Since the cover body 277 is made of a translucent synthetic resin, the light from the LED 275A mounted on the LED substrate 275 passes through the cover body 277 and illuminates the front surface of the decorative body 269. Further, the light from the LED 256A mounted on the LED substrate 256 passes through the cover body 277 and illuminates the upper part of the decorative body 269. The cover body 277 prevents the decorative body 269 from coming into contact with the LED substrate 256, the LED substrate 275, the drive motor 257 (FIG. 6), and the drive motor 273. As a result, it is possible to prevent the heat generated from these electronic components from being transmitted to the decorative body 269 and causing damage to the decorative body 269. Further, the contact between the electronic component and the decorative body 269 is prevented, and the electronic component is prevented from being damaged. The cover body 277 is attached to the cover body 271 via the LED substrate 275. For example, as shown in FIG. 8, a through hole is provided in the cover body 277 and the LED substrate 275 to communicate with each other when both are overlapped, and a screw, a screw, or the like is passed through the through hole and screwed into the cover body 271. The cover body 277 and the LED substrate 275 are attached to the cover body 271. At the time of this installation, the drive motor 257 (FIG. 6) and the drive motor 273 pass through the notch 275B of the LED substrate 275.

The first character member 281 is a member representing the letter "L", the second letter member 282 is a member representing the letter "O", and the third letter member 283 is the letter "V". The fourth character member 284 is a member expressing the character "E". Each of these members includes fitting rods 281A to 284A extending rearward (these uses and the like will be described later).

The third character member 283 has an LED substrate 283B, a diffusion plate 283C, and a cover body 283D in addition to the fitting rod 283A (see FIG. 8). The LED substrate 283B is electrically connected to the LED substrate 275 or the substrate 253. The LED board 283B mounts various circuits and an LED (which may be another light source) that emits light forward. The LED board 283B causes the LED to emit light based on the control signal from the effect control board 12 relayed by the board 253 or the LED board 275. The diffuser plate 283C diffuses the light from the LED (light emitted from the LED) of the LED substrate 283B. The cover body 283D is a transparent or translucent member, and the diffuser plate 283C transmits the diffused light. With such a configuration, the third character member 283 can emit light in order to enhance the effect of effect. The first character member 281, the second character member 282, and the fourth character member 284 have the same configuration. Therefore, the first to fourth character members 281 to 284 can emit light individually or simultaneously.

The driving force transmission mechanism X1 includes rack portions 255A and 255B, as well as first to third pinion gears 291 to 293 and first to fourth rack members 295 to 298.

The first pinion gear 291 is fitted to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 273 and rotates together with the rotation shaft. The second pinion gear 292 is rotatably supported by the first rack member 295. The third pinion gear 293 is rotatably supported by the third rack member 297. The second pinion gear 292 and the third pinion gear 293 have a shape in which two small-diameter first gears (located in the front) and a large-diameter second gear (located in the rear) are overlapped with a common rotation axis. The first gear of the second pinion gear 292 meshes with the teeth of the rack portion 255A extending in the left-right direction (see also FIGS. 10 and 11). The first gear of the third pinion gear 293 meshes with the teeth of the rack portion 255B extending in the left-right direction (see also FIGS. 10 and 11). The meshing destination of the second gear of each gear will be described later.

The first rack member 295 has a long shape in the left-right direction, and functions as a rack that moves in the left-right direction with the rotation of the first pinion gear 291. The first rack member 295 includes protrusions 295A to 295C, a mounting portion 295D, a detection piece 295E, teeth 295F, and elongated holes 295I and 295J.

The protrusions 295A to 295C are formed of a columnar boss or the like that protrudes rearward. The protrusion 295A rotatably supports the second pinion gear 292. Specifically, the protrusion 295A is supported by inserting the protrusion 295A into the through hole at the center of the second pinion gear 292. The second pinion gear 292 can rotate with the central axis of the protrusion 295A as the rotation axis. The protrusions 295B to 295C are arranged in the left-right direction and are inserted into the elongated holes 296B described later in the second rack member 296.

The mounting portion 295D is composed of a cylindrical boss or the like having a fitting hole. The fitting rod 282A of the second character member 282 is fitted into the fitting hole of the mounting portion 295D. The fitting rod 282A passes through the through hole 269B of the decorative body 269, the through hole 271A of the cover body 271, the through hole 277A of the cover body 277, and the notch 275B of the LED substrate 275, and is fitted with the mounting portion 295D. As will be described later, the second character member 282 moves in the left-right direction as the first rack member 295 moves. Therefore, the shape of the notch 275B is a shape that does not hinder the movement of the second character member 282, and the through hole 269B, the through hole 271A, and the through hole 277A cause the movement of the second character member 282. It is long in the left-right direction to allow it.

The detection piece 295E is a portion protruding upward and is a detection target by the detection sensor 259. The detection sensor 259 may be, for example, the same as the detection sensor 223. The presence (that is, the initial position) of the detection piece 295E is detected when the first rack member 295 is in the initial position (initial state of the movable body 250) (see FIG. 10). That is, the detection sensor 259 detects the initial position of the first rack member 295 (the initial state of the movable body 250).

The teeth 295F extend in the left-right direction and mesh with the first pinion gear 291 from above.

The elongated holes 295I and 295J are elongated in the left-right direction, and the protrusion 255I is inserted into the elongated hole 295I, and the protrusion 255J is inserted into the elongated hole 295J. The width (length in the vertical direction) of the elongated holes 295I and 295J is substantially the same as the diameter of the columnar protrusions 255I and 255J (the diameter is slightly shorter). Therefore, the first rack member 295 can slide in the left-right direction, but does not move in any other direction.

The second rack member 296 has a long shape in the left-right direction and is arranged in front of the first rack member 295. The second rack member 296 functions as a rack that moves in the left-right direction as the second pinion gear 292 rotates, as will be described later. The second rack member 296 includes teeth 296A, elongated holes 296B, and mounting portion 296C.

The tooth 296A extends in the left-right direction and meshes with the large-diameter second gear of the second pinion gear 292 from below.

In the elongated hole 296B, protrusions 295B and 295C arranged side by side in the left-right direction are inserted. The width (length in the vertical direction) of the elongated hole 296B is substantially the same as the diameter of the columnar protrusions 295B and 295C (the diameter is slightly shorter). Therefore, the second rack member 296 can slide in the left-right direction, but does not move in any other direction.

The protrusions 295B and 295C are provided on the left side of the first rack member 295, and the elongated holes 296B are provided on the right side of the second rack member 296. Therefore, the left end of the second rack member 296 is located on the left side of the left end of the first rack member 295. The left side portion of the second rack member 296 passes through the through hole 267B of the first mounting member 267 (through hole 269A of the decorative body 269) (see FIGS. 10 and 11).

The mounting portion 296C is composed of a cylindrical boss or the like having a fitting hole. The fitting rod 281A of the first character member 281 is fitted into the fitting hole. The mounting portion 296C is provided at the left end of the second rack member 296 and is always exposed from the decorative body 269 or the like (see FIGS. 10 and 11). Therefore, unlike the second character member 282, the first character member 281 is fitted and attached to the attachment portion 296C without passing through a through hole or the like.

The third rack member 297 has a substantially L-shape, and functions as a rack that moves in the left-right direction with the rotation of the first pinion gear 291. The third rack member 297 includes protrusions 297A to 297C, a mounting portion 297D, teeth 297F, and elongated holes 297K and 297L.

The protrusions 297A to 297C are formed of a columnar boss or the like that protrudes rearward. The protrusion 297A rotatably supports the third pinion gear 293. Specifically, the protrusion 297A is supported by inserting the protrusion 297A into the through hole at the center of the third pinion gear 293. The third pinion gear 293 can rotate with the central axis of the protrusion 297A as the rotation axis. The protrusions 297B to 297C are arranged in the left-right direction and are inserted into the elongated holes 298B described later in the fourth rack member 298.

The mounting portion 297D is composed of a cylindrical boss or the like having a fitting hole. The fitting rod 283A of the third character member 283 is fitted into the fitting hole of the mounting portion 297D. The fitting rod 283A passes through the through hole 269C of the decorative body 269, the through hole 271B of the cover body 271, the through hole 277B of the cover body 277, and the notch 275B of the LED substrate 275, and is fitted with the mounting portion 297D. As will be described later, the third character member 283 moves in the left-right direction as the third rack member 297 moves. Therefore, the shape of the notch 275B is a shape that does not hinder the movement of the third character member 283, and the through hole 269C, the through hole 271B, and the through hole 277B cause the movement of the third character member 283. It is long in the left-right direction to allow it.

The tooth 297F extends in the left-right direction and meshes with the first pinion gear 291 from below.

The elongated holes 297K and 297L are elongated in the left-right direction, and the protrusion 255K is inserted into the elongated hole 297K, and the protrusion 255L is inserted into the elongated hole 295L. The width (length in the vertical direction) of the elongated holes 297K and 297L is substantially the same as the diameter of the columnar protrusions 255K and 255L (the diameter is slightly shorter). Therefore, the third rack member 297 can slide in the left-right direction, but does not move in any other direction.

The fourth rack member 298 has a long shape in the left-right direction and is arranged in front of the third rack member 297. The fourth rack member 298 functions as a rack that moves in the left-right direction as the third pinion gear 293 rotates, as will be described later. The fourth rack member 298 includes teeth 298A, elongated holes 298B, and a mounting portion 298C.

The teeth 298A extend in the left-right direction and mesh with the large-diameter second gear of the third pinion gear 293 from below.

In the elongated hole 298B, protrusions 297B and 297C arranged side by side in the left-right direction are inserted. The width (length in the vertical direction) of the elongated hole 298B is substantially the same as the diameter of the columnar protrusions 297B and 297C (the diameter is slightly shorter). Therefore, the fourth rack member 298 can slide in the left-right direction, but does not move in any other direction.

The protrusions 297B and 297C are provided on the right side of the third rack member 297, and the elongated holes 298B are provided on the left side of the fourth rack member 298. Therefore, the right end of the fourth rack member 298 is located on the right side of the right end of the third rack member 297. The left side portion of the fourth rack member 298 passes through the through hole 268B of the second mounting member 268 (through hole 269D of the decorative body 269) (see FIGS. 10 and 11).

The mounting portion 298C is composed of a cylindrical boss or the like having a fitting hole. The fitting rod 284A of the fourth character member 284 is fitted into the fitting hole. The mounting portion 298C is provided at the right end of the fourth rack member 298 and is always exposed from the decorative body 269 or the like (see FIGS. 10 and 11). Therefore, unlike the third character member 283, the fourth character member 284 is fitted and attached to the attachment portion 298C without passing through a through hole or the like.

(Operation of predetermined mechanism X, etc.)
The operation and the like of the predetermined mechanism X will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. The state shown in FIG. 10 (the state in which the first rack member 295 and the second rack member 296 are in the rightmost position and the third rack member 297 and the fourth rack member 298 are in the leftmost position) is defined as the initial state. do.

When the drive motor 273 rotates its rotating shaft in the forward direction (leftward rotation) from the initial state shown in FIG. 10, the first pinion gear 291 fitted to the rotating shaft also rotates in the forward direction. Due to this forward rotation, the first rack member 295 having teeth 295F meshing with the first pinion gear 291 from above slides to the left, and the third rack member 297 having teeth 297F meshing with the first pinion gear 291 from below slides to the right. ..

When the first rack member 295 moves to the left, the second pinion gear 292 supported by the protrusion 295A of the first rack member 295 also moves to the left. Since the small-diameter first gear of the second pinion gear 292 meshes with the immovable rack portion 255A from below, the second pinion gear 292 moves to the left while rotating in the reverse direction (rotating clockwise). Since the large-diameter second gear of the second pinion gear 292 meshes with the teeth 296A of the second rack member 296 from above, the second rack member 296 also moves to the left due to the movement and reverse rotation of the second pinion gear 292. do. Due to the use of the second pinion gear 292, the amount of movement of the second rack member 296 is larger than that of the first rack member 295.

When the third rack member 297 moves to the right, the third pinion gear 293 supported by the protrusion 297A of the third rack member 297 also moves to the right. Since the small-diameter first gear of the third pinion gear 293 meshes with the immovable rack portion 255B from below, the third pinion gear 293 moves to the right while rotating forward. Since the large-diameter second gear of the third pinion gear 293 meshes with the teeth 298A of the fourth rack member 298 from above, the fourth rack member 298 also moves to the right due to the movement and reverse rotation of the third pinion gear 293. do. Due to the use of the third pinion gear 293, the amount of movement of the fourth rack member 298 is larger than that of the third rack member 297.

The first character member 281 is attached to the leftmost second rack member 296 (mounting portion 296C), and the second character member 282 is attached to the second rack member 295 (attachment portion 295D) second from the left. The third character member 283 is attached to the third rack member 297 (mounting portion 297D), which is the third from the left, and the fourth character member 284 is attached to the rightmost fourth rack member 298 (attachment portion 298C). Is attached, so that each character member moves as each rack member moves.

FIG. 11 shows a state after the first to fourth rack members 295 to 298 and the first to fourth character members 281 to 284 have moved. The amount of movement of the second rack member 296 (first character member 281) is larger than that of the first rack member 295 (second character member 282). The amount of movement of the fourth rack member 298 (fourth character member 284) is larger than that of the third rack member 297 (third character member 283). Due to such a relationship, in this embodiment, the distance between each member when the first character member 281 to the fourth character member 284 moves increases with the same degree of change (at any timing during movement). Each member is lined up at approximately equal intervals).

The through holes 269B and through holes 269C of the decorative body 269 allow the second character member 282 and the third character member 283 to move without interfering with the decorative body 269 and the like. Further, since the mounting portion 296C to which the first character member 281 is attached and the mounting portion 298C to which the fourth character member 284 is attached are always outside the decorative body 269, they also do not interfere with the decorative body 269 or the like. It is possible to move to. That is, the first character member 281 to the fourth character member 284 can move independently of the deformation of the decorative body 269.

In the state of FIG. 11, when the drive motor 273 reversely rotates its rotation axis, an operation opposite to the operation described above is performed, and the process returns to the initial state of FIG.

The drive motor 273 is controlled by the effect control board 12. By supplying the control signal to the drive motor 273, the effect control board 12 rotates the rotation axis of the drive motor 273 in the forward direction by a predetermined rotation angle, and changes from the state of FIG. 10 to the state of FIG. 11 in "LOVE". Change the spacing between letters (increase the spacing). Further, the effect control board 12 supplies a control signal to the drive motor 273 to reversely rotate the rotation axis of the drive motor 273, and changes the spacing between the letters of LOVE from the state of FIG. 11 to the state of FIG. Reduce the interval). The effect control board 12 detects the detection piece 295E by the detection sensor 259 (when the detection signal is received from the detection sensor 259 or when the detection signal is received for a certain period of time), that is, each rack such as the first rack member 295. The drive of the drive motor 273 is terminated when the member or the like reaches the initial position (when the state shown in FIG. 10 is reached).

The effect control board 12 repeatedly rotates the rotation shaft of the drive motor 273 in the forward direction and in the reverse direction, and the space between the characters of "LOVE" (the distance between the first to fourth character members 281 to 284). ) May be continuously changed a plurality of times.

A detection sensor is provided at the position of the detection piece 295E in the state of FIG. 11, and the effect control board 12 detects that the current state is the state of FIG. 11 by detecting the detection piece 295E by the detection sensor. You may. The effect control board 12 may control the drive motor 273 based on the detection.

(Relationship between deformation of movable body 250 and light emission)
The relationship between the deformation of the movable body 250 and the light emitting mode of the movable body 250 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12A shows the initial state of the movable body 250. The movable body 250 (decorative body 269) at this time is not deformed. The effect control board 12 controls the drive motor 257 (FIG. 6 and the like), and changes the movable body 250 in the order of FIG. 12 (A) → (B) → (C) → (A) → (B) → ... (Thus, the decorative body appears to be beating with excitement) (Strictly speaking, the state of (A) is also inserted between (B) and (C) in FIG. This is because it is a state between the state of B) and the state of (C).) Further, when the movable body 250 is deformed, the effect control board 12 supplies a control signal to the LED board 275 via the board 253 to cause the LED 275A to emit light (that is, the decorative body 269 is illuminated from behind). .. In the following description, it is assumed that the brightness of the LED 275A is constant.

The effect control board 12 supplies a control signal to the LED board 283B or the like via the board 253 and / or the LED board 275 in accordance with the light emission of the LED 275A or regardless of the light emission, and the first to first steps are made. The four-character members 281 to 284 may be made to emit light individually or simultaneously to enhance the effect.

When the rotating shaft 257A of the drive motor 257 (FIG. 6 etc.) is rotated forward (clockwise) from the initial state, the first gear 261 also rotates forward as described above, via the second gear 262 and the third gear 263. The first slide member 265 and the first mounting member 267 move in a direction away from the second slide member 266 and the second mounting member 268 (see FIG. 12B). As a result, the decorative body 269 extends in the left-right direction (elastically deforms in such a manner that it is pulled from both the left and right directions). Then, the thickness of the decorative body 269 is reduced, the light transmittance is improved, and more light of the LED 275A is transmitted, so that the movable body 250 (decorative body 269) at this time looks brighter than in the initial state.

After that, when the rotating shaft 257A of the drive motor 257 (FIG. 6 etc.) is rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise rotation), the first gear 261 also rotates in the reverse direction via the second gear 262 and the third gear 263 as described above. The first slide member 265 and the first mounting member 267 and the second slide member 266 and the second mounting member 268 move in the approaching direction (see FIG. 12C). As a result, the decorative body 269 contracts in the left-right direction (elastically deforms in such a manner that it is pushed from both the left and right directions). Then, the thickness of the decorative body 269 becomes thicker, the light transmittance decreases, and the light of the LED 275A is transmitted less, so that the movable body 250 (decorative body 269) at this time is in the state of FIG. 12 (B). It looks darker than the initial state.

As described above, in this embodiment, the decorative body 269 of the movable body 250 expands and contracts in the left-right direction as shown in FIGS. 12 (A) to 12 (C), thereby changing the light transmittance and the decorative body. Since the brightness of the 269 changes according to its own beating movement, the effect of the effect is increased. The brightness of the LED 275A may be changed depending on the degree of deformation of the decorative body 269. For example, even if the brightness is increased when the light transmittance is high (FIG. 12 (B)) and the brightness is decreased when the light transmittance is low (FIG. 12 (C)). good. As a result, the brightness of the decorative body 269 changes more greatly according to the heartbeat of the decorative body 269, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. The light from the LED 256A mounted on the LED substrate 256 illuminates the upper part of the decorative body 269. Therefore, in FIG. 12, which shows the state of the front surface of the decorative body 269, the state of being illuminated by the LED 256A is not shown. On the other hand, the player can visually recognize the upper part of the decorative body 269 illuminated by the light from the LED 256A. In the upper part of the decorative body 269, the light transmittance changes as the decorative body 269 expands and contracts in the left-right direction. Therefore, the brightness of the light from the LED 256A also changes according to the beating movement of the decorative body 269.

(Structure of LED board 256, etc.)
13A and 13B are views showing an LED substrate, (A) is a perspective view seen from the front, and (B) is a plan view seen from the arrow B in (A). 14A and 14B are views showing an LED substrate, FIG. 14A is a cross-sectional view of the cutting line XIVA-XIVA in FIG. 13B, and FIG. 14B is a cutting line XIVB-XIVB in FIG. 13B. It is a cross-sectional view of.

The LED board 256 has a board body 256B, a plurality of LEDs 256A soldered to the board body 256B, and a connector 256C. Hereinafter, the plurality of LEDs 256A and the connector 256C may be collectively referred to as electronic components 256D.

The substrate body 256B has a shape that matches the shape of the curved upper surface of the base body 255 on which it is installed. The substrate body 256B has a curved portion 285 and a curved portion 287, and a non-curved portion 286 that is not curved. The curved portion 285 has a substantially bow-shaped curved shape in the cross section shown in FIG. 14 (A) cut by the cutting line XIVA-XIVA parallel to the left-right direction. The curved portion 287 has a shape substantially line-symmetrical with the curved portion 285 with respect to the center of the substrate main body 256B, and has a substantially bow-shaped curved shape in the cross section cut by the cutting line XIVA-XIVA. There is. The non-curved portion 286 connects both of the curved portion 285 and the curved portion 287. The non-curved portion 286 is not curved and is shown as a flat plate in the cross section cut by the cutting line XIVA-XIVA.

As shown in FIG. 14B, the curved portion 285 is not curved in a cross section cut by a cutting line XIVB-XIVB (cutting line orthogonal to the cutting line XIVA-XIVA) parallel to the front-rear direction and is a flat plate. It is illustrated in a shape. Similarly, the non-curved portion 286 and the curved portion 287 are not curved in the cross section cut by the cutting lines parallel to the front-rear direction.

In the LED substrate 256 of the present embodiment, five LEDs 256A are soldered to the curved portion 285, and five LEDs 256A and one connector 256C are soldered to the curved portion 287. On the other hand, the non-curved portion 286 is not provided with any electronic component 256D.

Next, a mounting mode of the electronic component 256D provided on the substrate main body 256B will be described. 15A and 15B are views showing an LED substrate, FIG. 15A is an enlarged view of the “XVA portion” in FIG. 13A, and FIG. 15B is a cross-sectional view seen from arrow B in FIG. ) Is a cross-sectional view seen from the arrow C in (A).

FIG. 15 Each figure focuses on one LED 256A provided on the substrate main body 256B. As shown in FIG. 15A, the LED 256A has a rectangular parallelepiped shape and is soldered to the mounting position Z0 on the substrate body 256B. The rectangular parallelepiped LED 256A can define a short direction having a short dimension and a longitudinal direction having a long dimension. In FIG. 15, Cartesian coordinates are defined with the mounting position Z0 as the origin, the lateral direction of the LED 256A being the X-axis direction, and the longitudinal direction being the Y-axis direction. The LED 256A is soldered onto the substrate body 256B so that the X-axis direction, which is the lateral direction, coincides with the left-right direction, and the Y-axis direction, which is the longitudinal direction, coincides with the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 15B, in the cross-sectional view cut along the cross-sectional lines parallel to the left-right direction, the substrate main body 256B is curved. The LED 256A is mounted on the board body 256B so that the X-axis in the lateral direction coincides with the tangent line on the board body 256B passing through the mounting position Z0. Two tangents are shown in FIG. 15B, the first being a tangent 288 passing through point Z1 on the substrate body 256B corresponding to point X1 advancing from point X0 in the −X axis direction. .. The second is a tangent line 289 passing through the point Z2 on the substrate body 256B corresponding to the point X2 advanced from the point X0 in the + X axis direction. Looking at the tangent line 288, the X axis, and the tangent line 289 on the substrate body 256B in order, the direction of the straight line gradually changes. From this, it can be seen that the substrate main body 256B in the curved portion 285 has a curvature along the X-axis direction (the lateral direction of the LED 256A). The magnitude of the curvature of the substrate body 256B in the X-axis direction can be determined by the degree of change in the direction of the tangent line. If the change in the direction of the tangent line is large, the degree of curvature of the substrate body 256B is large, and the curvature in the X-axis direction is large. On the other hand, if the change in the angle of the tangent line is small, the degree of curvature of the substrate body 256B is small, and the curvature in the X-axis direction is small.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15C, the substrate main body 256B is not curved in the cross-sectional view cut along the cross-sectional lines parallel to the front-rear direction. The LED 256A is provided on the substrate body 256B so that the Y-axis in the longitudinal direction coincides with the tangent line on the substrate body 256B passing through the mounting position Z0. Further, in FIG. 15C, it corresponds to a tangent line passing through the point Z3 on the substrate body 256B corresponding to the point Y1 advanced in the −Y axis direction from the point Y0, and the point Y2 extending in the + Y axis direction from the point Y0. The tangent line passing through the point Z4 on the substrate body 256B coincides with the Y axis. As described above, the direction of the tangent line on the substrate body 256B in FIG. 15C does not change even if the position on the Y axis is changed. From this, the substrate main body 256B has a curvature of 0 in the Y-axis direction (longitudinal direction of the LED 256A).

In this way, the LED 256A is soldered at the mounting position Z0 on the substrate body 256B in the lateral direction (X-axis direction) toward a large curvature and in the longitudinal direction (Y-axis direction) toward a small curvature. ing. In particular, in the present embodiment, the lateral direction (X-axis direction) of the LED 256A is the direction in which the curvature is maximized at the mounting position Z0, the longitudinal direction of the LED 256A (Y-axis direction) is defined as the minimum curvature at the mounting position Z0. (The direction in which the curvature is 0). In addition, also in the electronic component 256D other than the LED 256A shown by the “XVA portion” in FIG. 13 (A), at the mounting position on the substrate main body 256B, the lateral direction has a large curvature and the longitudinal direction has a small curvature. It is soldered so that it faces toward (the longitudinal direction faces the front-back direction).

(Overall operation of the effect device 200)
The effect using the effect device 200 is executed, for example, at the time of super reach. For example, as shown in FIG. 16, the effect control board 12 operates the movable body 250 at a predetermined timing of super reach. Specifically, by controlling the drive motor 257 and the drive motor 273 at the same time, the decorative body 269 can be expanded and contracted in the left-right direction (see above for detailed operations), and the first character member 281 to the fourth character. The distance between the members of the member 284 is increased or decreased (see above for detailed operations). As a result, the operations (deformation of the movable body 250) as shown in FIGS. 16B and 16C are repeated. At this time, the effect control board 12 displays the effect images EG1 and EG2 emphasizing that the movable body 250 is beating on the effect display device 5 according to the deformation of the movable body 250.

After that, the effect control board 12 sets the movable body 250 in the initial state before deformation, and then controls the drive mechanism 210 (drive motor 215) to advance the movable body 250 to the advance position (detailed operation is described above. reference). At this time, the effect control board 12 displays the effect image EG3 that makes the drive motor 273 stand out on the effect display device 5 (FIG. 16 (D)). At this time, the mode of the movable body 250 may be changed (illumination of the decorative body 269, deformation of the decorative body 269, change in the character spacing of LOVE, etc.).

(Effects of this embodiment, etc.)
As in the above embodiment, the decorative body 269 is deformed by moving the left and right ends of the decorative body 269. Therefore, the decorative body 269 can be changed in an unprecedented form, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this way, by applying forces in a plurality of directions to the decorative body to change the decorative body, the decorative body is changed into a form (for example, complicatedly) that the player is interested in. It is possible to improve the effect of production.

Further, in this embodiment, the light transmittance of the decorative body 269 is changed by deforming the decorative body 269 (changing the thickness by the deformation). As a result, the brightness of the decorative body 269 that is illuminated later can be changed according to its shape. In particular, since the transmittance can be changed according to the degree of deformation of the decorative body 269, the brightness of the decorative body 269 can be continuously changed by continuously changing the shape of the decorative body 269. (No complicated control is required). Therefore, the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, by changing the brightness of the LED 257A according to the deformation of the decorative body 269, the effect of the deformation of the decorative body 269 and the effect of the light can be simultaneously related and executed, so that the effect of the effect can be improved. The effect can be improved.

Further, in this embodiment, since the effect image EG1 or the like corresponding to the change of the decorative body 269 is displayed on the effect display device 5, the display image of the effect display device 5 can be linked with the deformation of the decorative body 269. , The effect can be improved.

Further, the upward movement of the movable body 250 is assisted by the elastic body 229. Further, the elastic body 229 acts as a resistance against the downward movement of the movable body 250. As a result, the load on the drive motor 215 due to the weight of the movable body 250 can be reduced, and the movable body 250 can be smoothly moved in the vertical direction.

Further, the electronic component 256D on the curved substrate body 256B is soldered at the mounting position in the lateral direction toward the direction in which the curvature of the LED substrate 256 is large and in the longitudinal direction toward the direction in which the curvature of the LED substrate 256 is small. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent cracks from occurring in the solder that fixes the electronic component 256D. Such an effect is not limited to the manufacturing process of the LED substrate, and even in an LED substrate formed by soldering electronic components to a curved substrate body, electronic components such as LEDs are soldered to a flat plate-shaped substrate body, and then. The same effect can be obtained with an LED substrate formed by bending the substrate body.

It is difficult to bend an electronic component such as an LED according to the shape of a curved substrate body from the viewpoint of cost and manufacturing. Therefore, the non-curved electronic component is soldered to the substrate main body, but an unavoidable gap is generated between the non-curved electronic component and the curved substrate main body. Due to this unavoidable gap, when an electronic component is soldered to a curved substrate body, the fixing by the solder is insufficient, and unexpected thermal stress or stress concentration occurs in the solder. As a result, cracks are likely to occur in the solder that fixes the electronic components. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the longitudinal direction of the electronic component is directed to the direction in which the curvature of the substrate body is small, so that the gap generated between the electronic component and the substrate body is made small. On the other hand, by directing the lateral side of the electronic component to the direction in which the curvature of the substrate body is large, the electronic component is arranged so that the gap is as small as possible even in the direction in which a large gap is generated. As a result, the soldering of electronic components can be ensured, unexpected thermal stress and stress concentration can be reduced, and cracks generated in the solder can be suppressed.

Next, a case where a flat plate-shaped substrate body to which electronic components are soldered is bent to form a curved LED substrate will be described. When soldering an electronic component to a substrate body on a flat plate, there is no gap between the electronic component and the board body, and defects in soldering are unlikely to occur. However, when the substrate body to which the electronic components are soldered is bent, a tension region and a compression region are formed on the substrate body with the neutral axis as a boundary. At this time, the surface of the substrate body on the tension region side expands, and the surface on the compression region side shrinks. However, electronic components and solder on the surface of the substrate body try to resist expansion and contraction of the surface of the substrate body. Therefore, cracks are likely to occur in the solder by bending the substrate body. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the electronic component is arranged so that the lateral direction coincides with the direction in which the surface expands and contracts greatly due to the bending process of the substrate body (the direction in which the tensile force and the compressive force act and the direction in which the curvature is large). Is placed. As a result, the range in which the surface of the substrate body restrains expansion and contraction can be reduced, the stress acting on the solder can be reduced, and cracks generated in the solder can be suppressed.

Further, a substantially triangular notch 269H and a notch 269I are formed in the upper part of the overhanging portion 269E of the decorative body 269. When a compressing force acts on the decorative body 269 from the left-right direction, the notch 269H and the notch 269I close the notched portion. As a result, the decorative body 269 can be easily deformed by the compressive force from the left-right direction, and the operation of the decorative body 269 can be made natural.

Further, the first slide member 265 and the first mounting member 267 are connected so as to sandwich the left end portion of the decorative body 269, and the second slide member 266 and the second mounting member 268 are connected to the right end portion of the decorative body 269. Are connected with the. By connecting the decorative body 269 in a sandwiched state in this way, it is possible to suppress a problem that stress is concentrated on a specific place and the decorative body 269 is torn when the decorative body 269 is deformed. ..

(Modification example)
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment and the like, and various modifications and applications can be made to the above-mentioned embodiment and the like. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-described embodiment, and is a part described in the above-described embodiment so as to be able to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have the structure of. Examples of modifications of the above-described embodiment will be illustrated below, but at least a part of each modification can be combined as long as there is no contradiction.

(Modification example 1)
In the above, the driving of the first character member 281 to the fourth character member 284 and the deformation of the decorative body 269 are performed by independent and separate mechanisms, but both may be interlocked. For example, the second rack portion 296 and the fourth rack member 298 are directly fixed to the through holes 269A and 269D of the decorative body 269, or are fixed to the first mounting member 267 and the second mounting member 268 to form the second rack. The slide of the part 296 and the fourth rack member 298 and the deformation of the decorative body 269 may be interlocked with each other. In such a case, the drive motor 257 and various members for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 257 become unnecessary. With such a configuration, a plurality of types of members used for the effect can be easily interlocked, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

(Modification 2)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 may perform a so-called initial operation at the time of initial setting when the power is turned on. The initial operation is as follows: (1) Whether the movable body 250 or the like is in the initial state (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is normally turned off, it can be said that the movable body 250 is in the initial state), various sensors are used. It is judged by using it, and if it is not in the initial state, the process of returning the movable body 250 etc. to the initial state is executed, and (2) whether or not the movable body 250 etc. moves normally is determined by the clerk of the amusement park or at the time of shipment from the factory. A process of actually operating the movable body 250 or the like to return it to the initial state (for example, the same operation as when performing an effect using the movable body 250 or the like during a game) so that the workers or the like can visually check it. Is performed by the movable body 250 or the like), and at least one of the above is included. The initial state is, for example, (1) a state when no external force is applied to the decorative body 269 or the like, (2) a normal state where there is no abnormality (for example, a state when the power is turned on normally without any abnormality). , The state in which the effect is not executed), as long as it is in the state before the decorative body 269 or the like operates. Then, when the initial operation at the time of turning on the power (movement of the movable body 250, deformation of the decorative body 269, movement of the first character member 281 to the fourth character member 284, etc.) is performed, the effect control board 12 is used for the effect display device 5. In addition, the image to be displayed when the effect normally performed by the movable body 250 such as the effect image is not displayed (for example, the image is not displayed on the effect display device 5 or only a predetermined initial screen is displayed). Or to display the recovery screen when the power is restored). Thereby, the visibility of the operation of the movable body 250 at the time of turning on the power can be improved (in particular, the above (2)).
During initial operation including).

(Modification example 3)
Even if an external force required for the deformation does not act during the deformation of the decorative body 269 (for example, even if the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like), the decorative body 269 is being deformed due to its elastic force (restoring force). It may be closer to the initial state (initial shape) than the state. For example, a stepping motor having a weak detent torque may be used as the drive motor 257 to increase the elastic force of the decorative body 269 (restoring force required to rotate the rotating shaft 257A of the drive motor 257 that is not turned on). It is good that the decorative body 269 has). The decorative body 269 and the first character member 281 to the fourth character member 284 may approach the initial state when the power is turned off by the force of an elastic body such as a spring provided in the mechanism for driving them. .. The approaching to the initial state includes both the return of the decorative body 269 to the initial state and the return to the state (shape) close to the initial state. If the decorative body 269 approaches the initial state to some extent, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience caused by the deformed decorative body 269 being left as it is (for example, the decorative body 269 is difficult to return to the initial state due to an unintended habit).

(Modification example 4)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 may include means for monitoring the voltage of the power supply. In this case, when the voltage value of the power supply falls below a predetermined value, it is determined that the power supply is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the movable body 250 and the drive mechanism 210 are controlled to bring the effect device 200 closer to the initial state. May be done. The predetermined value may be a value that secures the voltage required to operate the movable body 250 and the drive mechanism 210 (various drive motors) (a value larger than the threshold value when determining the power failure at the end). It is good to say). For example, the effect control board 12 controls the drive motor 273 to bring the first slide member 265 and the first mounting member 267 and the second slide member 266 and the second mounting member 268 closer to their original positions (move to the initial position). (Including moving to the vicinity of the initial position, etc.). As a result, a force in the direction of returning the decorative body 269 to the initial state can be applied to the decorative body 269, and the decorative body 269 can be brought closer to the initial state (at this time, the first character member 281 to the fourth character). The member 284 should also be brought closer to the initial state). The explanation of "initial state" and "approaching the initial state" and the effect of the modified example 4 are based on the modified example 3. A backup power supply or the like is provided, and after the power supply is actually cut off and power is no longer supplied from the outside, the effect control board 12 controls the drive motor 273 by the backup power supply to control the first slide member. The 265 and the first mounting member 267 and the second slide member 266 and the second mounting member 268 may be brought closer to their original positions. The decorative body 269 does not have to be an elastic body. In this case, it is preferable to perform the above process for bringing the effect device 200 closer to the initial state.

(Modification 5)
The decorative body 269 may have a force acting in the vertical direction or an oblique direction, or may have a force acting in three or more directions. The decorative body 269 may be one in which a force acts in one direction. When applying forces in a plurality of directions to the decorative body 269, the forces in the plurality of directions may be applied at the same time, or may be applied at different timings. For example, a force may be applied to the right end portion of the decorative body 269 and then a force may be applied to the left end portion. The magnitude of the force in multiple directions may be the same, or at least one may be different from the others. The direction and number of the acting forces, the timing of action, etc. may be adjusted to the shape of the decorative body 269 (in the above embodiment, since the shape of the decorative body 269 is a heart shape, the decorative body 269 beats. To make it look like it is doing, the force is applied at the same time on the left and right).

The decorative body 269 may, for example, set the initial state in FIG. 12 (A) and shift only to the state in FIG. 12 (B). As described above, the decorative body 269 does not expand and contract from the initial state, but may only extend from the initial state (it may be specified by the rotation angle of the drive motor or the like). Further, the decorative body 269 may, for example, set the initial state in FIG. 12 (A) and shift only to the state in FIG. 12 (C). As described above, the decorative body 269 may only perform the operation of contracting from the initial state (it may be specified by the rotation angle of the drive motor or the like).

(Modification 6)
For example, when the light transmittance of the decoration body 269 is the first transmittance due to the extension of the decoration body 269, the brightness of the LED 257A (illumination from the rear) is set as the first brightness, and the decoration body 269 shrinks. When the light transmittance of the decorative body 269 is a second transmittance lower than the first transmittance, the brightness of the LED 257A may be set to a second brightness higher than the first brightness. For example, the brightness may be low in FIG. 12 (B) and high in the case of FIG. 12 (C). By doing so, for example, even if the decorative body 269 is deformed, the apparent brightness of the decorative body 269 may not change. As a result, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, the speed of movement of the decorative body 269 (such as the speed of beating) may be changed, and the change in the brightness of the LED 257A may be adjusted to match the speed of the movement. For example, when the brightness (brightness) is changed according to the movement (beat) of the decorative body 269, the faster the movement, the faster the change in brightness (faster the cycle of light and dark), and the slower the movement, the faster the change. The change in brightness may be slowed down (the cycle of light and dark may be slowed down). For example, by making the relationship between the state of the decorative body 269 and the brightness at that time always the same, the deformation period of the decorative body 269 and the period of change in the brightness of the LED 257A can be matched. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced. The emission color of the LED 257A may be changed in addition to or in addition to the change in brightness (the faster the color, the darker the color, etc.). Various modes (shape, color, blinking cycle, size, number of images, etc.) of the effect images EG1 and EG2 displayed on the effect display device 5 may be changed according to the speed of movement of the decorative body 269. (The effect image may be changed to another image according to the speed of movement of the decoration body 269). The brightness and emission color (illumination color) of the LED 257A, the mode of the effect image, etc. are changed according to the mode of movement of the decorative body 269 (direction of movement (direction of expansion and contraction, etc.), amount of movement, speed of movement, etc.). May be good.

(Modification 7)
The effect using the effect device 200 may be executed not only when the effect of the super reach is executed, but also in the advance notice effect, the look-ahead advance notice, the effect in the big hit game state, and the like. An appropriate shape or the like of the movable body 250 can be adopted. The present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines such as slot machines and enclosed gaming machines.

(Modification 8)
The above-mentioned LED substrate 256 has a curvature in the left-right direction, but does not have a curvature in the front-rear direction orthogonal to the left-right direction. The electronic components on the substrate body are arranged in the longitudinal direction toward the front-rear direction where the curvature is zero. The present invention can be applied not only to a substrate having such a shape, but also to a case where an electronic component is soldered to a substrate having a curvature in any direction. 17A and 17B are views showing another example of the LED substrate, where FIG. 17A is a plan view and FIG. 17B is a cross-sectional view taken along the cutting line BB in (A). 18A and 18B are views showing another example of the LED substrate, FIG. 18A is a cross-sectional view of the cutting line XVIIIA-XVIIIA in FIG. 17A, and FIG. It is an enlarged view of.

The LED substrate 300 includes a substrate main body 301, a plurality of LEDs 302 soldered to the substrate main body 301, and a connector 303 (hereinafter, these may be simply referred to as electronic components 304). ..

The substrate body 301 is different from the above-mentioned LED substrate 256 in that the substrate main body 301 has a rectangular shape in a plan view and its surface is curved in any direction. In the cross section shown in FIG. 17B cut along the cutting line BB parallel to the left-right direction, the substrate main body 301 has a highly curved high-curved section 311 and a low-curved section having a smaller curvature than the high-curved section 311. It has 310 and a low curvature section 312. The low-curvature section 310 and the low-curve section 312 have a line-symmetrical relationship with respect to the center of the LED substrate 300. On the other hand, the substrate main body 301 is also curved in the cross section shown in FIG. 18A cut by the cutting lines XVIIIA-XVIIIA parallel to the front-rear direction. However, the degree of curvature is smaller than the degree of curvature in any section of the cross section shown in FIG. 17 (B). That is, the substrate main body 301 of the LED substrate 300 has a curved surface having a large curvature of the cross section cut by the cutting line parallel to the left-right direction and a small curvature of the cross section cut by the cutting line parallel to the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 17A, the LED 302 is defined with a lateral direction X1 and a longitudinal direction X2. In the LED 302, the lateral direction X1 coincides with the direction in which the curvature of the substrate body 301 is large (FIG. 17B), and the longitudinal direction Y1 coincides with the direction in which the curvature of the substrate body 301 is small (FIG. 18 (FIG. 18)). A)) Arranged. By arranging the LED 302 in this way, it is possible to suppress cracks that occur in the solder that fixes the LED 302, as in the above embodiment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 17A, the connector 303 is defined with the lateral direction X2 and the longitudinal direction Y2. The dimensions of the connector 303 in the lateral direction and the dimensions in the longitudinal direction are both larger than the respective dimensions of the LED 302. In the connector 303, the lateral direction X2 coincides with the direction in which the curvature of the substrate body 301 is large (FIG. 17B), and the longitudinal direction Y2 coincides with the direction in which the curvature of the substrate body 301 is small (FIG. 17). (A)) Arranged. As a result, cracks that occur in the solder that fixes the connector 303 can be suppressed. Further, as shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 17B, the connector 303 is soldered to the low curvature section 312 having a small curvature, and is not soldered to the high curvature section 311. As described above, the various dimensions of the connector 303 are larger than the dimensions of the LED 302. Therefore, in order to make the gap between the connector 303 and the substrate main body 301 smaller, it is soldered to a portion having a small curvature. This does not preclude that the LED 302 is soldered to the low curvature section 312. That is, the smaller the size of the electronic component, the more the soldering to the portion having the larger curvature is allowed. On the other hand, the larger the size of the electronic component, the more the soldered portion is limited to the portion having the smaller curvature.

Although LEDs and connectors have been described as examples of electronic components to be soldered to a substrate, the present invention is also applied to other electronic components such as transistors, resistors, diodes, and capacitors. be able to.

(Modification 9)
Further, in the above-mentioned LED substrate, since the direction having a large curvature and the direction having a small curvature coincide with each other between the mounting locations of a plurality of electronic components, the longitudinal direction of each electronic component is also regularly aligned in the front-rear direction. Was soldered. However, the present invention can also be applied to a substrate in which the substrate body is twisted and curved in various directions. In this case as well, the electronic components may be soldered so that the longitudinal direction coincides with the direction in which the curvature is large and the lateral direction coincides with the direction in which the curvature is small at the mounting position of the electronic component.

(Modification example 10)
As shown in FIG. 18B, in the curved LED substrate 300, the mode is different between the wiring 330 on the surface on the bending portion 301a side and the wiring 340 on the surface on the bending portion 301b side. You may. Here, the bending portion 301a means a portion on which a tensile force acts on the neutral axis when the substrate main body 301 is bent, and the bending portion 301b means a portion on which a compressive force acts on the neutral axis as a boundary. Refers to the part. The wiring 330 on the surface of the bent portion 301a receives a tensile force when bending the LED substrate 300 and a thermal stress when soldering an electronic component. In order to prevent the wiring 330 from being broken or otherwise malfunctioning due to these external forces, the cross sections of the wiring 330 arranged on the bending portion 301a side are arranged on the bending portion 301b side. It is made larger than the cross section of the wiring 340. As a result, it is possible to prevent the solder 320 from being cracked due to the disconnection of the wiring 330. On the other hand, although a compressive force mainly acts on the wiring 340 on the surface of the curved portion 301b side, defects such as breakage of the wiring 340 are unlikely to occur due to the compressive force. Therefore, each cross section of the wiring 340 arranged on the bending portion 301b side can be made smaller than the cross section of the wiring 330 on the extending portion 301a side.

The difference between the cross section of the wiring 330 and the cross section of the wiring 340 is not limited to the case where the substrate is different in a curved state as shown in FIG. 18 (B). For example, in a flat substrate before bending, the cross section is different by the amount of expansion and contraction of the wiring, and when the substrate is curved after that, the wiring of the extension portion and the wiring of the contraction portion have almost the same cross section. It may be configured as such. Further, as a difference in wiring between the bent portion and the contracted portion, not only the size of the cross section of one wiring but also the number of wirings, the material of the wirings, and the like may be different. For example, the cross section of each wiring may be made the same size in the bent portion and the contracted portion, and the number of wires in the extended portion may be larger than the number of wires in the curved portion. Further, the wiring of the bending portion may be formed by using a material that is easier to stretch than the wiring of the bending portion. When soldering an electronic component to each of the bending portion and the bending portion, the amount of soldering of the electronic component arranged in the bending portion is calculated from the amount of soldering of the electronic component arranged in the bending portion. May be more. As a result, cracks generated in the solder can be suppressed.

(Modification 11)
Further, in the LED substrate provided in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to realize an appropriate arrangement of electronic components capable of suppressing solder cracks by considering the functions and performance of the electronic components to be mounted. 19A and 19B are views for explaining another example of the LED substrate, FIG. 19A is a diagram in which electronic components are arranged without considering the curvature of the substrate body, and FIG. 19B is a diagram in which electronic components are arranged from the arrangement of (A). It is the figure which changed the arrangement of parts. The substrate main body 401a shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B has the same shape as the substrate main body 301 shown in FIG. That is, the LED substrate 400a has a highly curved high-curvature section 411 with a large curvature, and a low-curvature section 410 and a low-curvature section 412 having a smaller curvature than the high-curvature section 411. The substrate body 401a is also curved in the front-rear direction, but the degree of curvature is smaller than that of the low-curved section 410 and the low-curved section 412.

As shown in FIG. 19A, LEDs 420a to 420g, resistors 430a to 430b, and LEDs 421a to 421c are mounted on the substrate body 401a of the LED substrate 400a. The LEDs 421a to LED421c have higher brightness of emitted light and larger dimensions than the LEDs 420a to 420g. Further, the resistor 430a and the resistor 430b each have the same resistance value and the same dimensions. Here, for example, it is judged that the solder for fixing the electronic components in the low-curvature section 410 and the low-curvature section 412 is unlikely to crack because the degree of curvature of the substrate main body 401a is small, and the high-curvature section 411 is set. It is assumed that the solder for fixing the LEDs 420c to 420e is less likely to crack because the size of the electronic component itself is small. On the other hand, it is assumed that there is a high possibility that cracks will occur in the solder that fixes the LED 421b in the highly curved section 411 and the resistors 430a and 430b. In this case, it is necessary to change the type and arrangement of the electronic components shown in FIG. 19A to suppress solder cracks.

In the solder fixing the LEDs 420a to 420g, since the possibility of cracking is low, it is not necessary to change the position or type of the electronic component. However, as shown in FIG. 19B, the LED 422a may be provided at an intermediate position instead of the LED 420a and the LED 420b. The LED 422a to be arranged in this way is selected from those that emit light having the same brightness as the combined brightness of the lights emitted from the LED 420a and the LED 420b. Although the LED 422a has a larger dimension than the LED 420a and the LED 420b, it is judged that cracks are unlikely to occur in the solder in the low curvature section 410. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 19B, the LED 422b may be provided at an intermediate position instead of the LED 420f and the LED 420g.

As shown in FIG. 19B, four LEDs 422a can be provided in place of the LEDs 421b provided in the highly curved section 411, where cracks are likely to occur in the solder to be fixed. These LEDs 422a are selected from among the LEDs whose combined brightness of the four lights is comparable to the brightness of the light emitted from the LED 421b alone. The dimensions of the four LEDs 422a are smaller than the dimensions of the LED 421b, and the possibility of cracks in the fixing solder is low. In this way, by substituting a plurality of small-sized LEDs (electronic parts) for the large-sized LEDs (electronic parts) without reducing the brightness of the light as a whole (without reducing the function), soldering is performed. It is possible to suppress cracks that occur in the solder. Further, the LED 422a having a small size is mounted around the mounting position of the substitute LED 421b. Therefore, the mode of the light emitted from the four LEDs 422a and the mode of the light emitted from the LED 421b alone can be made the same.

Further, when it is judged that there is a high possibility that cracks are generated in the solder fixing the resistor 430a provided in the highly curved section 411, cracks are generated by changing the wiring or the like formed in the substrate main body 401a. The resistor 430a can be moved to a position where it is difficult to move. That is, as shown in FIG. 19B, the mounting position of the resistor 430a is changed from the high-curved section 411 to the low-curved section 410. This makes it possible to suppress cracks that occur in the solder that fixes the resistor 430a.

Further, unlike the resistor 430a, when it is difficult to change the mounting position, a plurality of small resistors can be substituted without changing the mounting position. As shown in FIG. 19B, two small resistors 431a can be provided in place of the resistor 430b provided in the highly curved section 411 where the solder is likely to crack. The two resistors 431a provided instead are selected from those in which the combined resistance value is about the same as the resistance value of the substitute resistor 430b. The size of the resistor 431a is smaller than the size of the resistor 430b, and the possibility of cracking in the solder is low. In this way, by substituting a plurality of small-sized resistors (electronic parts) for a large-sized resistor (electronic component) without changing the resistance value as a whole (without changing the function), Cracks that occur in the solder can be suppressed.

In this way, changing a large-sized electronic component to a plurality of small-sized electronic components to suppress cracks may result in the formation of a new curved portion in the substrate body, especially at the design stage of the LED substrate. In the case where a change is made to increase the degree of curvature or an unexpected crack occurs after manufacturing, the solder crack can be dealt with without making a major design change. As described above, as electronic components capable of dealing with solder cracks, not only the above-mentioned LEDs and resistors but also capacitors and connectors, for example, can be used.

(A configuration in which at least a part of the above embodiment is taken as an example)
Next, a configuration in which at least a part of the above-described embodiment or modification is used as an example, a further modification, or the like will be described. However, the following configuration may be partially omitted or only a part may be adopted. The gaming machine may be configured. Further, at least a part of each configuration may be combined.

(1) In a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1), a curved portion (for example, a curved portion 285 and a curved portion 287) having a curved surface is provided, and an electronic component (for example, a curved portion 287) is provided in the curved portion. For example, the electronic component is provided with a substrate (for example, LED substrate 256, LED substrate 300) in which a mounting location (for example, mounting position Z0) of the LED 256A and the connector 256C) is set, and the electronic component is located at the mounting location in the lateral direction. It is mounted at the mounting location so that the curvature is large (for example, as shown in FIG. 15B, the LED 256A is mounted so that the lateral direction X is the direction in which the curvature of the substrate body 256B is large). , A gaming machine characterized by that.

(2) Wiring is provided on the front surface (for example, the front surface of the LED substrate 300 on the bending portion 301a side) and the back surface (for example, the front surface of the LED substrate 300 on the bending portion 301b side), and the curvature is described. In the section, the wiring patterns of the front surface and the back surface may be different (for example, as shown in FIG. 18B, the cross-sectional sizes of the wiring 330 and the wiring 340 are different).

(3) A plurality of types of electronic component mounting locations are set on the board (for example, as shown in FIG. 17, electronic components such as an LED 302 and a connector 303 are mounted on the LED board 300. ), Among the plurality of types of the electronic components, the electronic component having a short lateral direction is attached to the mounting location having a larger maximum value of curvature (for example, the LED 302 having a short lateral direction is attached. The connector 303 is attached to the high-curved section 311 having a large curvature, but the connector 303 having a long lateral direction is not attached to the high-curved section 311 but is attached to the low-curved section 312).

(4) A specific decorative body (for example, decorative body 269) that performs a directing operation by being deformed by receiving a force, and
The first acting means (for example, the first slide member 265 and the first mounting member 267) that exerts a force on the specific decorative body in a first direction (for example, a left direction) and the specific decorative body. A second acting means (for example, a second slide member 266 and a second mounting member 268) for applying a force in a second direction (for example, the right direction) different from the first direction is provided.
The first acting means and the second acting means can both exert a force on the specific decorative body in a predetermined period (for example, the first slide member 265 and the first mounting member 267, and the second slide. The member 266 and the second mounting member 268 slide at the same time to deform the decorative body 269),
A gaming machine characterized by that.

(5) A specific decorative body (for example, decorative body 269) that performs a directing operation by being deformed by receiving a force, and
An action means for exerting a force on the specific decorative body (for example, the first slide member 265 and the first mounting member 267) and
The specific decorative body is provided with a light emitting means (for example, a first slide member 265 and a first mounting member 267) that irradiates the specific decorative body with light from the back side thereof.
Due to the action of the means of action, the amount of light transmitted through the specific decorative body changes (for example, the decorative body 269 is elastically deformed so as to be pulled to the left or right, so that its thickness changes and the light transmittance changes. Etc.),
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Each of the means of action in (4) and (5) may be anything that presses, pulls, or otherwise acts on the decorative body. The direction of action may be any of the left-right direction, the front-back direction, the up-down direction, or a combination thereof (diagonal direction).

The above-mentioned (5) "change in the amount of transmitted light" includes that the specific decorative body is physically deformed by the action of the means of action and changes by changing its thickness and the like.

(6) The light emitting means may be made to emit light (for example, the brightness of the LED 275A may be changed according to the change of the decorative body 269) according to the light emitting pattern according to the effect operation of the specific decorative body. ..

(7) A special decorative body (for example, first character member 281 to fourth character member 284) provided on the front side of the specific decorative body is provided.
At least one of the first acting means and the second acting means exerts a force on the specific decorative body by driving the special decorative body to perform an effect operation, or the acting means. May exert a force on the specific decorative body (for example, modification 1) by driving the special decorative body to execute an effect operation.

The special decorative body does not have to represent characters or the like, and may be one such as the decorative body 269 that is deformed without including characters or the like to produce an effect. The special decoration may consist of a plurality of members. The first acting means and the second acting means may each exert a force on each of a plurality of members constituting the special decoration.

(8) A display device (for example, an effect display device 5) for displaying an effect is provided.
The display device may perform a corresponding display corresponding to the effect operation of the specific decorative body (see, for example, FIG. 16).

The "corresponding display corresponding to the effect operation of the specific decorative body" may be any one that constitutes one effect by the effect operation of the specific decorative body and the image or the like displayed by the corresponding display.

(9) When operating the specific decorative body when the power is turned on, the corresponding display may not be executed (for example, modification 2). The power is turned on by resetting or the like.

(10) The specific decorative body may have elasticity, and when the external force does not act in the deformed state, the specific decorative body approaches the initial shape by the restoring force (for example, deformation example 3).

(11) When the power supply is stopped in the deformed state of the specific decorative body, the first acting means and the second acting means apply a force in a direction of returning the specific decorative body to the initial shape (for example, deformation). Example 4 etc.) or
When the power supply is stopped in the deformed state of the specific decorative body, the acting means may apply a force in a direction of returning the specific decorative body to the initial shape (for example, deformation example 4).

When the power supply is stopped, both when a drop in the power supply voltage before the power supply is stopped is detected and when the power supply is actually stopped are included.

(Circuit configuration of LED board 275 of movable body 250)
Next, the circuit configuration of the LED substrate 275 of the movable body 250 will be described. FIG. 20 is a front view showing a state in which the cover body is removed from the movable body. FIG. 21 is a detailed view showing the LED substrate 275 provided inside the movable body 250. 21 (A) is a component mounting surface (front surface) on which various surface mount components such as a plurality of LED elements and protective resistors are mounted, and FIG. 21 (B) is a back surface (also referred to as a solder surface) thereof. Is.

First, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the shape of the LED substrate 275 will be described. The LED substrate 275 has a substantially heart-shaped shape according to the shape of the movable body 250, and as described above, the cover. It can be fixed to the front of the body 271 without protruding from the cover body 271.

In the central portion of the LED substrate 275, as described above, in order to change the spacing between the drive motor 257 for deforming the synthetic rubber decorative body 269 covering the front surface of the movable body 250 and the character member of "LOVE". A large notch 275B for arranging the drive motor 273 of the LED substrate 275 is formed so as to substantially traverse the central portion of the LED substrate 275 in the vertical direction, and is located slightly below the center corresponding to the first rack member 295. Has a horizontally long shape so as not to hinder the movement of the second character member 282.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 21, the LED substrate 275 is separated from the first region on the right side of the LED substrate 275 and the second region on the left side of the LED substrate 275 by the notch 275B, and these first regions are separated from each other. The first region and the second region are significantly narrower than the first region and the second region, and have a special shape that is electrically and mechanically connected by the connection region 275C formed below the notch 275B.

The 275D is an insertion hole for preventing a member projecting forward from the back surface side of the LED substrate 275 from coming into contact with the LED substrate 275.

A large number of LEDs 275A are evenly mounted on the component mounting surface (surface) of the LED substrate 275 over almost the entire surface so that the player can see that the entire decorative body 269 is emitting light. The lighting / extinguishing of the LED 275A is controlled by the LED driving IC 602 mounted in the second region. The LED 275A is also mounted in the connection area 275C so that the lower end portion of the decorative body 269 is not darker than the other portions.

Further, on the component mounting surface (surface) of the LED substrate 275, not only a large number of LEDs 275A but also a protective resistor for limiting the current supplied to the LED 275A, a diode, a capacitor, and the like are mounted.

The LED drive IC 602 emits not only a large number of LEDs 275A mounted on the component mounting surface (surface) but also each character member of "LOVE" like the LED board 283B of the third character member 283 of "V". It is also connected to each LED board provided inside the first character member 281 to the fourth character member 284 via the connector 650, and the lighting / extinguishing of the LEDs mounted on each of these LED boards is also controlled. do. Therefore, on the component mounting surface (surface), the connector 650 for connecting to each LED substrate provided inside the first character member 281 to the fourth character member 284 is also cut into the first region and the second region, respectively. The notches 275B are mounted one by one so as to face the horizontally elongated portion.

(Characteristic configuration of connector mounting pattern)
Here, the connectors 650 mounted in the first region and the second region and the electrodes (mounting patterns) on which these connectors 650 are mounted will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 24.

In FIG. 21, the electrode (mounting pattern) on which the connector 650 is mounted is enlarged and displayed, and in FIG. 24, these electrodes (mounting pattern) and the connector 650 mounted on the electrode (mounting pattern) are shown. It is shown in an enlarged view in a perspective view.

In the present embodiment, as an electrode (mounting pattern) for mounting the connector 650 on the LED substrate 275, as shown in the black portion in the enlarged view of FIG. 21, each terminal (No. 1 to 7) of the connector 650 is used. 7 terminal patterns to which the above 7) are soldered, and as shown in FIG. 24, the metal fixing portions 651 formed at the lower ends of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the connector 650 are fixed to the LED substrate 275 by soldering. Two fixing pads P for the purpose are formed so as to correspond to each terminal and the metal fixing portion 651.

In this embodiment, out of the seven terminals of the connector 650, only the four terminals 1 to 4 are used, and the three terminals 5 to 7 are not used. Therefore, these three unused terminals are connected to the GND pattern so that the potential becomes indefinite and noise or the like does not enter. Further, the alternate long and short dash line in the enlarged view of FIG. 21 indicates the area occupied by the mounted connector.

Between the anchor pad P and terminal patterns, GND pattern is formed so as to surround a wiring pattern connecting the thru-hole being covered with the connector mounted to each of the terminal pattern. In this way, in order to surround the wiring pattern, the GND pattern between the terminal pattern of the first terminal and the fixed pad P is set as a narrowed portion N which is extremely thin.

Therefore, the electrical connection between the GND pattern located directly under the connector CN connected by the narrowed portion N and the GND pattern not located directly under the connector CN is reduced, and the potential of the GND pattern located directly under the connector CN is reduced. Is likely to change, and the noise reduction ability of these GND patterns may decrease.

In particular, since three unused terminal patterns are connected to the GND pattern located directly under the connector CN as described above, the reduction in the noise reduction ability of the GND pattern located directly under the connector CN is reduced. There is a fear that the noise reduction ability of the three unused terminal patterns will be reduced, and the adverse effect of noise on the circuits connected to the four used terminals will increase.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the fixed pad P is made into GND by connecting the GND pattern surrounding the fixed pad P and the fixed pad P with three bridge patterns BR. By doing so, the GND pattern located directly under the connector CN connected by the narrowed portion N and the GND pattern not located directly under the connector CN are electrically connected via the fixed pad P and the bridge pattern BR. The noise reduction ability of the GND pattern located directly under the connector CN is improved.

In the present embodiment, the other fixed pad P not surrounded by the GND pattern is connected to the GND pattern with only one bridge pattern BR, but the number and shape of these bridge pattern BRs are different. , The shape of the GND pattern may be appropriately determined, and depending on the condition of the wiring pattern, the other fixed pad P may not be connected to the GND pattern. That is, in the present embodiment, the embodiment in which all of the plurality (two) of the fixing pads P are electrically connected to the GND pattern is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the plurality (two) of the fixed pads P are not limited to this. ), Some of the fixed pads P may not be electrically connected to the GND pattern.

Further, in the present embodiment that although the surface-mounted connector 650 and the LED substrate 275, the present invention is not limited thereto and may be a thru-hole type connector and the substrate ..

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24, a connector 650 of a type in which the mounter is inserted and removed in the vertical direction with respect to the board surface to be mounted is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited thereto. However, as shown in FIG. 25, as long as it has a metal fixing portion 651', it may be a connector 650'of a type in which the mounter is inserted and removed along the substrate surface, and it may have a metal fixing portion. For example, any type may be used.

Further, in the present embodiment, the connector 650 is illustrated as a specific electronic component having a metal fixing portion, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these specific electronic components have a metal fixing portion. For example, a socket for mounting an electric double layer capacitor or battery for backup, a memory card, or the like, an electronic component such as a SAW filter or a dielectric coil, a TSOP package, or the like in the center. It may be a package IC having a metal fixing portion.

In the present embodiment, the anchor pad P is not provided with the thru-hole, provided with a thru-hole to these anchor pad P, via the thru hole, the other GND pattern other than the substrate surface , for example, and the solder side, if the substrate is a multilayer substrate, by connecting to the GND pattern of the substrate inside the layer, as compared with the case of forming the individually thru holes, reduce the area occupied by the thru-hole You may do so.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pattern in which the fixed pad P is electrically connected is illustrated as a GND pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a pattern adjacent to the fixed pad P may be used. If the power supply pattern is a power supply pattern such as VCS, VDC, VSL, which will be described later, the effect of reducing noise or the like can be obtained by connecting to the power supply pattern such as VCS, VDC, VSL, etc., as in the GND pattern. , VDL, VSL, etc. may be connected to the power supply pattern.

Further, at the upper center position of the first region, a motor drive IC601 for driving the drive motors 257 and 273 arranged inside the notch 275B, the drive motors 257, 273, and the LED substrate 275 are connected. Two connector CNs for this are mounted. As for these connector CNs, similarly to the connector 650 described above, a fixing pad on which the metal fixing portion of the connector CN is mounted is connected to the GND pattern.

The motor drive IC 601 mounted in the first region and the LED drive IC 602 mounted in the second region receive the LED 275A by receiving the serial control signal including the operation instruction output from the effect control board 12. Etc. are turned on / off, and the rotation / stop of the drive motors 257 and 273 is controlled.

Further, on the back surface (solder surface) of the connection region 275C, a connector 603 having 13 connection terminals for connecting the LED substrate 275 and the substrate 253 is mounted. In this way, the connector 603 is mounted on the back surface by mounting it on the surface facing the substrate 253 arranged on the rear side of the movable body 250, thereby reducing the wiring length and as described above. This is because the LED 275A is mounted on the component mounting surface (surface) of the connection region 275C, so that the connector 603 cannot be mounted.

The connector 603 can be inserted and removed from the lower side of the LED substrate 275 with a fitting attached to the end of the connecting electric wire in order to facilitate the assembly of the movable body 250 and prevent the movable body 250 from coming off during assembly. It is supposed to be.

By being connected to the board 253 by the connector 603 in this way, the serial control signal output from the effect control board 12 is transmitted to the motor drive IC 601 and the LED drive IC 602 via the board 253 and the connector 603, and the LED board. It is transmitted through the wiring on the 275.

Here, a signal allocation form for each connection terminal in the connector 603 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. Note that FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the improved signal allocation form used in this embodiment, and FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the signal allocation form before the improvement.

In FIGS. 22 and 23, the left side of the figure is the mounting part of the connector No. 1 terminal, and the right side of the figure is the mounting part of the connector No. 13 (No. 12 in FIG. 23) terminal. The numbers correspond to the connectors "1" to "13" ("12" in FIG. 23) in the circuit diagrams of FIGS. 22 (B) and 23 (B).

As for the allocation of signals to the terminals of these connectors, as shown in FIG. 23 (B), in the circuit diagram, usually, a control circuit such as an LED having a large number is given priority over a control circuit such as a drive motor. By assigning the signals transmitted to the control circuits such as LEDs to the upper (low number) terminals, the circuit diagram is made so that the signal lines from the connector to each control circuit do not intersect, and there are multiple control signals. In some cases, it is common to group the other power signals at the top without interposing other signals between each control signal and assign the other power terminals to the low-numbered terminals. When implemented, it seems that there is no problem on the wiring diagram.

However, when the substrate is actually manufactured, as shown in FIG. 23A, since the connector 603 is mounted on the back surface of the connection region 275C, it is transmitted to the LED drive IC 602 mounted in the second region. The terminals of the LED drive serial signal pattern wiring L2 and L3 (ASIBADT, ASIBACLK) are assigned to the "2" and "3" terminals located on the opposite side of the second area, and further. , The terminals of the motor drive serial signal pattern wirings L5 and L6 (S1TXD, S1SCK) transmitted to the motor drive IC601 mounted in the first region are also assigned to the LED drive serial signal pattern wirings L2 and L3. Since it is assigned to the "5" and "6" terminals that are farther than the "2" and "3" terminals, the length of the wiring pattern on the LED board 275 becomes longer. In addition to being easily affected by noise, the pattern withdrawal direction is set to each serial in order to prevent interference between the LED drive serial signal pattern wiring L2 and L3 and the motor drive serial signal pattern wiring L5 and L6. The pattern becomes complicated, for example, each signal has a different direction. That is, the number of redundant signal pattern wirings increases, and there is a fear that a malfunction may occur due to noise or the like generated by these redundant signal pattern wirings.

Therefore, as a feature of the improved signal allocation form, as shown in FIG. 22 (A), the pattern wiring L2 of the motor drive serial signal transmitted to the motor drive IC 601 mounted in the first region , L3 (S1TXD, S1SKK) are assigned to the "2" and "3" terminals near the first area, and are transmitted to the LED drive IC 602 mounted in the second area. The two terminals of the LED drive serial signal pattern wiring L11 and L12 (ASIBADT, ASIBACLK) are assigned to the "11" and "12" terminals near the second region.

The "1" number closest to the first area and the "13" number closest to the second area are used as the "4" terminal and the "11" terminal adjacent to the "3" terminal. The reason why it is set to "GND" together with the adjacent "10" terminal is to reduce the adverse effect of noise on the pattern wiring L2 and L3 of the motor drive serial signal and the pattern wiring L11 and L12 of the LED drive serial signal. However, when the adverse effect of noise is low, for example, the two terminals of the pattern wiring L2 and L3 of the motor drive serial signal are assigned to the "1" and "2" terminals, and the LED drive serial signal is used. The two terminals may be assigned to the "12" and "13" terminals.

That is, in order to prevent malfunction due to noise or the like caused by redundant signal pattern wiring, the game is possible, and the first region and the second region where electronic components such as the motor drive IC 601 and the LED drive IC 602 are mounted, and the second region. In the pachinko game machine 1 including the LED substrate 275 having a region located between the first region and the second region and having a connection region 275C narrower than the first region and the second region, the connection region. The 275C includes a first signal pattern wiring (pattern wiring L2, L3) for transmitting a first electric signal to the motor drive IC601 mounted in the first region, and an LED drive mounted in the second region. A connector 603 (specific electronic component) having a plurality of connection terminals connected to each of the second signal pattern wirings (pattern wirings L11 and L12) for transmitting the second electric signal is mounted on the IC 602, and the connection area is described. The first signal pattern wiring is connected to the terminal on the first region side of the connector 603 (specific electronic component) mounted on the 275C, and the second signal pattern wiring is connected to the terminal on the second region side. You can do it like this.

Further, in this embodiment, the terminal between the motor drive serial signal terminal and the LED drive serial signal terminal is assigned to various electric power terminals, whereby the motor drive serial signal and the LED drive serial signal are assigned. The signals are separated by various power terminals, and it is possible to prevent the motor drive serial signal and the LED drive serial signal from interfering with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22 (B), the VCS (DC5V generated by the power supply IC) for operating the motor drive IC601 and the LED drive IC602 at the terminals "5" and "9" ) Is assigned, LEDs (DC12V generated by the power supply IC) are provided in the terminals "6" and "7", and the terminals "8" are provided inside the first character member 281 to the fourth character member 284. VSL (DC power obtained by rectifying and smoothing AC24V) supplied to the LEDs mounted on each of the LED boards is assigned.

The "5" terminal near the first region of the connector 603, that is, the "5" terminal on the first region side of the connector 603 is the operating power of the motor drive IC 601 mounted in the first region. The power supply pattern wiring for supplying the VCS is connected, and the terminal "9" near the second area of the connector 603 provides the operating power VCS to the LED drive IC 602 mounted in the second area. It is connected to the power supply pattern wiring for supply, and by doing so, redundant pattern wiring is also reduced for the power supply pattern wiring.

In this embodiment, although the LED board 275 is a multi-layer board, the wiring pattern for the signal for transmitting the motor drive serial signal and the LED drive serial signal, the "5" terminal, and the "9" The present invention is not limited to this, although the multi-layer substrate is formed in the same layer as the wiring pattern for power supply to which the terminal number and the like are connected and the power such as VCS is supplied. By using a multilayer board in which the wiring pattern for signals and the wiring pattern for power supply are formed in different layers, it is possible to reduce the adverse effects of noise and the like from the wiring pattern for power supply on the wiring pattern for signals. You may try to do it.

Further, the surface-mounted connector 603 also has two metal fixing portions (not shown) for fixing the connector 603 to the LED substrate 275 by soldering at both lower ends in the longitudinal direction, similarly to the connector 650 described above. On the solder surface of the LED substrate 275, a fixing pad P for soldering the metal fixing portion is formed at a position corresponding to the metal fixing portion.

These fixing pads P are formed in a wider area than the terminals 1 to 13 in order to firmly fix the connector 603 to the LED substrate 275, and the fixing pads P formed in these wide areas are formed. Unlike before the improvement shown in FIG. 23, the LED substrate 275 is formed on the outer peripheral side, that is, on the side opposite to the first region and the second region so as not to interfere with the wiring pattern.

Further, these fixed pads P are electrically connected to the GND terminals which are the terminals of "1", "4", "10", and "13", and are "5" to "9". GND surrounds each power supply pattern of VCS, VDC, and VSL supplied at the terminal number, and by doing so, the motor is driven by noise from each power supply pattern of VCS, VDC, and VSL. Terminals "2" and "3" to which the pattern wiring L2 and L3 to the IC601 are connected, and "11" and "12" to which the pattern wirings L11 and L12 to the LED drive IC602 are connected. Since the adverse effect on the terminals of the above can be further reduced and the electrical capacitance of the GND can be improved, the GNDs of "1", "4", "10", and "13" can be improved. The noise reduction capability of the terminals can be further enhanced.

In the present embodiment, the fixed pad P is connected to the GND, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as described above, these fixed pads P are connected to the VCS, VDC, and so on. It may be connected to any power pattern of VSL.

Further, in this embodiment, a form in which a specific electronic component mounted in the connection area 275C is used as a connector is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these specific electronic components are a plurality of specific electronic components. Any one having terminals may be used, and for example, an integrated circuit (IC) having a plurality of terminals at different positions, for example, a motor drive serial signal (S1TXD, S1SCK) or an LED drive serial signal (ASIBADT, ASIBACLK) is transmitted. It may be an IC device for serial signals that can be (output).

Further, in this embodiment, the "2" and "3" terminals to which the motor drive serial signals (S1TXD, S1SCK) are assigned and the LED drive serial signals (ASIBADT, ASIBACLK) are assigned. By assigning the "4" and "10" terminals located between the "11" and "12" terminals to the LED, the influence of noise etc. is further reduced. The invention is not limited to this, and GND may not be assigned to the terminal between the terminal to which the serial signal for driving the motor is assigned and the terminal to which the serial signal for driving the LED is assigned. ..

Further, in this embodiment, the terminal between the terminal to which the serial signal for driving the motor is assigned and the terminal to which the serial signal for driving the LED is assigned is used as a power supply terminal for a VCS or the like to drive the motor. Although the embodiment in which the influence of noise and the like is further reduced by isolating the serial signal for driving and the serial signal for driving the LED is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and these serial signals for driving the motor are assigned. The terminal between the terminal and the terminal to which the LED drive serial signal is assigned may not be a power terminal.

(Modification 12)
Here, a modification 12 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a circuit configuration as a modification 12 of the present invention.

(Board noise countermeasure 1)

For example, in the above-mentioned effect device 200 or the like, electronic components (for example, motor drive IC601, drive motor 257, 273, LED drive IC602, LED275A) in which noise, static electricity, etc. are mounted or connected to the LED substrate 275 of the movable body 250. ) Is adversely affected, there is a problem that the electronic components may malfunction.

Therefore, as a noise countermeasure, for example, the boss 844C in the first effect body 800 described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 36 near the substrate 801 is not subjected to plating treatment (or metal vapor deposition) so that the boss 844C is not subjected to plating treatment (or metal vapor deposition). The LED drive IC connected to the front LED 810 and the front LED 810 is prevented from being destroyed by the discharge due to the discharge from the boss 844C to the front LED 810. For example, FIG. 26 shows. When an electronic component such as a front LED 810 (angle LED) is mounted at a position close to the boss 844C as in the present modification 12 shown, an outer peripheral ground X is formed along the outer periphery of the substrate and the periphery of the electronic component is formed. Betagland electrodes Y having a relatively large area are provided so as to surround them, electronic components are mounted inside these Betagland electrodes Y, and these outer peripheral grounds X and Betagland electrodes Y are connected to one connection point on the substrate 801. For example, by making an electrical connection at one terminal of the substrate side connector KCN, even if a discharge from the boss 844C occurs, the mounted parts such as the front LED 810 and the LED drive IC are destroyed or malfunction. You may try to prevent it from happening.

In the above-described modification 12, the outer peripheral ground X and the betagland electrode Y are electrically connected at the terminal 1 of the substrate side connector KCN to electrically connect the outer peripheral ground X and the betagland electrode Y. Although the wiring on the mounting board can be reduced, these outer peripheral grounds X and the betaland electrode Y may be electrically connected at one connection point on the board different from the board side connector KCN. The outer peripheral ground X and the betaland electrode Y may be electrically connected to another substrate to which the outer peripheral ground X and the betaland electrode Y are connected via the substrate side connector KCN, or the outer peripheral ground X and the betaland electrode Y may have a sufficient area or the like. When the influence of the noise signal is low, the outer peripheral ground X and the betagland electrode Y are electrically connected by not electrically connecting the outer peripheral ground X and the betagland electrode Y. Wiring on the substrate may be reduced.

Further, as described above, the above-described modification 12 may be performed together with measures for not performing plating treatment (or metal vapor deposition) on the boss 844C. That is, both the above-mentioned countermeasures by the outer peripheral ground X and the betaland electrode Y and the countermeasures in which the boss 844C is not plated (or metal vapor deposition) may be implemented, or only one of the countermeasures may be taken. May be good.

When the shape of the substrate 801 can be changed, for example, the boss 844C and the substrate 801 are separated by a sufficient distance (specific distance) that makes it difficult for electric discharge to occur. And may be separated by a specific distance.

When the boss 844C is plated (or metal-deposited), a member having electrical insulation is interposed between the plated (or metal-deposited) boss 844C and the substrate 801. Therefore, the discharge from the boss 844C to the substrate 801 may be prevented.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the modification 12 of the present invention, the bosses 844A to 844E of the decorative members 803 as conductive members having at least a part of conductivity and the electronic components (for example, the front LED 810). ~ 812, 813, etc.) are provided as a mounting board 801 and the bosses 844A to 844E are arranged so as to be adjacent to the outer periphery of the board 801. The board 801 is close to the electronic component to be mounted. It has a beta land electrode Y as a first ground region formed at a position, and an outer peripheral ground X as a second ground region formed between the beta land electrode Y and an end portion of the substrate 801. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the malfunction of the electronic components mounted on the substrate 801.

Further, the outer peripheral ground X and the beta land electrode Y are electrically connected only at one connection point on the substrate 801 (for example, one terminal of the substrate side connector KCN on the substrate 801). By doing so, the outer peripheral ground X and the betta land electrode Y are electrically connected, so that malfunctions of electronic components can be further reduced, and a substrate for electrically connecting the outer peripheral ground X and the betta land electrode Y can be obtained. Wiring in 801 can also be reduced.

Further, a substrate-side connector KCN for electrically connecting the substrate 801 to another substrate (for example, an effect control substrate 12) is mounted on the substrate 801. It is electrically connected on the other substrate. By electrically connecting the outer peripheral ground X and the betta land electrode Y in this way, malfunctions of electronic components can be further reduced, and wiring on the substrate 801 for electrically connecting the outer peripheral ground X and the betta land electrode Y can be provided. It can be eliminated.

Further, a substrate-side connector KCN for electrically connecting the substrate 801 to another substrate (for example, an effect control substrate 12) is mounted on the substrate 801. It is electrically connected at the board side connector. By electrically connecting the outer peripheral ground X and the betta land electrode Y in this way, malfunctions of electronic components can be further reduced, and wiring on the substrate 801 for electrically connecting the outer peripheral ground X and the betta land electrode Y can be provided. It can be eliminated.

Further, by mounting the front side LED 810 (angle LED) inside the beta land electrode Y, the malfunction of the front side LED 810 (angle LED) can be further reduced.

Further, by providing an insulating member between the substrate 801 and the bosses 844A to 844E, the malfunction of the electronic component can be further reduced.

Further, by providing the substrate 801 and the bosses 844A to 844E at a distance by a specific distance, the malfunction of the electronic component can be further reduced.

In addition, in this modification 12, an example of the noise countermeasure of the substrate 801 in the first effect body 800 was described, but the conductive member (for example, the surface) so as adjacent to the outer periphery of the LED substrate 275 of the movable body 250 of the said embodiment. When a plated base body 255 or the like is arranged on the LED substrate 275, the LED substrate 275 has a first ground region formed at a position close to the electronic component to be mounted, and the first ground region and the mounting substrate. It may have a second ground region formed between the ends of the LED.

In particular, the conductive member is adjacent to the outer periphery of the LED substrate 275 of the movable body 250 on which the connector 603, which is an example of an electronic component to which the wiring from the control means such as the motor drive IC 601 and the LED drive IC 602 is connected, is mounted. When (for example, the base body 255 whose surface is plated) is arranged, the LED substrate 275 has a first ground region formed at a position close to the connector 603, the first ground region, and the LED. By having a second ground region formed between the end portion of the substrate 275, the control by control means such as the motor drive IC 601 and the LED drive IC 602 connected to the connector 603 by noise is affected. Can be suppressed.

(Structure of the first directing body 800, etc.)
Next, the detailed structure of the first effect body 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 36. 27A is a front view showing the first effect body, and FIG. 27B is a rear view. FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the first effect body is viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the first effect body is viewed from diagonally behind. FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 27 (A). FIG. 31 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 27 (A).

As shown in FIGS. 27 to 29, the first effector 800 has a substrate 801 having a plurality of electronic components and wiring patterns formed on its front and rear surfaces, and a translucent substrate 801 arranged so as to cover the front surface of the substrate 801. A front lens member 802 made of a member, a decorative member 803 made of a non-translucent member arranged so as to cover the front surface of the front lens member 802, and a translucent member arranged so as to cover the back surface of the substrate 801. It has a rear lens member 804 made of the member, and is formed in a band shape along the lower left edge of the opening formed in the board surface plate when viewed from the front.

A plurality of electronic components including a plurality of front side LEDs 810 to 812 and 813 which are light emitting diodes (light emitting elements) are mounted on the front surface 801F of the substrate 801. The front side LEDs 810 to 812 are angle LEDs capable of irradiating light along the front surface 801F in a predetermined direction, and the front side LEDs 813 are LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the front side. In addition to the light emitting diode (light emitting element), the front 801F receives a serial control signal including an operation instruction output from the effect control board 12 to control lighting / extinguishing of each LED or the like. It includes a control means such as an LED drive IC to be performed.

A plurality of electronic components including a plurality of rear side LEDs 820 to 822, which are light emitting diodes (light emitting elements), are mounted on the back surface 801B of the substrate 801. The rear side LEDs 820 and 821 are angle LEDs capable of irradiating light along the back surface 801B toward the right side of the substrate 801 and the rear side LEDs 822 are along the back surface 801B toward the left side side of the substrate 801. It is an angle LED that can irradiate light. Further, on the upper part of the back surface 801B, a board side connector KCN for connecting a plurality of electronic components including the front side LEDs 810 to 812 and the rear side LEDs 820 to 822 mounted on the front side 801F and the back side 801B to the effect control board 12 is provided. Has been done.

Further, notches 824A to 824E for avoiding interference with bosses 844A to 844E and fitting portions 870A to 870E, which will be described later, are formed at predetermined positions on the edge of the substrate 801. Further, various electronic components mounted on the front surface 801F and the back surface 801B of the substrate 801 are mainly connected to the effect control board 12 and are electronic components controlled by the effect control CPU 120.

The front lens member 802 is made of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having a size capable of covering the front surface 801F of the substrate 801. On the front surface of the front lens member 802, a first light emitting unit 830 to 832 formed at a position corresponding to each of the plurality of front LEDs 810 to 812 and a substantially circular front view formed at a position corresponding to each of the plurality of front LEDs 813. The second light emitting unit 833 of the above is formed so as to project forward. The first light emitting unit 830 to 832 and the second light emitting unit 833 are formed so as to project forward so that a recess is formed on the back surface. Further, in the vicinity of the edge portion, a plurality of insertion holes 834A to 834E through which the bosses 844A to 844E described later are inserted are formed.

The decorative member 803 is formed of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having a size capable of covering the front surface of the front lens member 802. An opening 840 to 843 into which each of the first light emitting unit 830 to 832 and the second light emitting unit 833 can be inserted is formed at a position corresponding to each of the first light emitting unit 830 to 832 and the second light emitting unit 833. The first light emitting unit 830 to 832 and the second light emitting unit 833 can each face forward through the openings 840 to 843.

Cylindrical bosses 844A to 844E as protrusions through which the insertion holes 834A to 834E of the front lens member 802 can be inserted are formed at a plurality of locations on the back surface of the decorative member 803 in the vicinity of the edge so as to project rearward. Has been done.

The decorative member 803 is made of a non-conductive synthetic resin material. As shown in FIGS. 30 to 32 and 34, the front and back surfaces of the region excluding the front surface of the bosses 844A to 844E are plated (metallized surface treatment) so that the conductive portion 850 (for example, FIG. While the portion indicated by the thick line 34 is formed, the non-conductive portion 851 (for example, the thick line shown in FIG. 34) is not plated (metallized surface treated) in the surface region of the bosses 844A to 844E. The part not shown) is formed.

The rear lens member 804 is made of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having a size capable of covering the back surface B of the substrate 801. An LED opening 860 that opens the rear LED 820 to the back side is formed at a position corresponding to the rear LED 820 in the rear lens member 804, and a rear LED 821 is placed on the back side at a position corresponding to the rear LED 821. An LED opening 861 to be opened is formed, and an LED opening 862 to open the rear LED 822 to the back side is formed at a position corresponding to the rear LED 822.

The opening 860A is an opening in which one LED opening 860 and the LED opening 862 are integrated. Further, a molding opening 865 is formed on the right side of each LED opening 860.

A plurality of uneven portions are formed along the left and right sides of the rear lens member 804, and the light induced inside the rear lens member 804 is diffused and can be emitted to the outside. Diffuse parts 867L and 867R are formed. Further, the bosses 844A to 844E can be fitted at positions corresponding to the bosses 844A to 844E on the front surface of the rear lens member 804, and the fitting portions 870A to 870A to which the mounting holes 871 for the screws N1 are formed, respectively. 870E is formed. A mounting portion 866 for the vibration detection sensor MG is formed below the rear lens member 804.

As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, in the first effect body 800 configured in this way, the front side lens member 802 and the decorative member 803 are arranged on the front side of the substrate 801 and the rear side lens is arranged on the back side of the substrate 801. With the member 804 arranged, the bosses 844A to 844E of the decorative member 803 are inserted into the insertion holes 834A to 834E, and the inserted bosses 844A to 844E are fitted into the fitting portions 870A to 870E of the rear lens member 804, respectively. After fitting, the screw N1 attached to the mounting hole 871 from the back side of the rear lens member 804 is screwed into the screw hole formed at the tip of the bosses 844A to 844E to decorate the substrate 801 and the front lens member 802. The member 803 and the rear lens member 804 are integrated to form the first effect body 800.

As shown in FIGS. 30 to 32, in a state where the substrate 801 and the front lens member 802, the decorative member 803, and the rear lens member 804 are integrated, the front lens member 802 is a distance from the front surface 801F of the substrate 801. The rear lens member 804 is arranged at a distance of L1 and is separated from the back surface 801B of the substrate 801 by a distance L2 shorter than the distance L1 (L1> L2).

Specifically, the front LED 813 capable of emitting light toward the front is mounted on the front surface 801F of the substrate 801. Therefore, when the front lens member 802 is too close to the front LED 813, the light from the front LED 813 spreads to the surroundings. It is locally emitted through the front lens member 802 in the front. In order to avoid this, it is preferable that the front LED 813 and the front lens member 802 are arranged at a distance longer than at least the protrusion length from the front surface 801F of the front LED 813.

On the other hand, the back surface 801B of the substrate 801 is not mounted with an LED capable of emitting light toward the rear. Further, by forming LED openings 860 to 862 at positions corresponding to the rear LEDs 820 to 822 in the rear lens member 804, the rear lens member 804 interferes with the rear LEDs 820 to 822. It can be brought closer to the substrate 801 side (see FIG. 31).

Further, by arranging the decorative member 803 on the front surface of the front lens member 802, the region other than the first light emitting unit 830 to 832 and the second light emitting unit 833 in the front lens member 802 is covered, so that the first light emission is performed. Only the units 830 to 832 and the second light emitting unit 833 are conspicuous.

(Light emitting structure on the front side of the first effector)
Next, the light emitting structure on the front side of the first effect body 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 27 (A). FIG. 31 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 27 (B).

Since the structures of the first light emitting unit 830 to 832 and the second light emitting unit 833 are almost the same in the light emitting principle except for the shape of the member and the like, only the first light emitting unit 831 is shown in FIG. The description of the first light emitting units 830 and 832 will be omitted. Further, in FIG. 31, only the second light emitting unit 833 of the plurality of second light emitting units 833 will be described, and the description of the other second light emitting unit 833 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 30, the front LED 811 is arranged slightly to the left of the rear of the first light emitting unit 831. The front LED 811 mainly irradiates light from the left side to the right side along the front surface 801F of the substrate 801 on the back side of the first light emitting unit 831, but with respect to the back surface of the first light emitting unit 831 of the front lens member 802. Since they are arranged at a distance L3 apart, that is, close to each other, some light is incident on the front lens member 802. Then, the light incident on the front lens member 802 is guided while being totally reflected inside the front lens member 802, and is projected from the front surface of the first light emitting unit 831 so as to face forward through the opening 841. It is emitted forward. As a result, the first light emitting unit 831 emits light. Since the front surface of the first light emitting portion 831 of the front lens member 802 is formed in an uneven shape, the light inside the front lens member 802 is diffused and emitted forward.

Further, the first light emitting portion 831 of the front lens member 802 is formed so as to project forward from the plate-shaped portion, and is inserted into the tubular opening 841 of the decorative member 803. Since the inner peripheral surface of the opening 841 is a conductive portion 850 that has been plated, the light guided from the plate-shaped portion to the first light emitting portion 831 side is totally reflected by the conductive portion 850. Since it is difficult to emit light from the front side, the light inside the front lens member 802 is likely to be emitted forward.

As shown in FIG. 31, the front LED 813 is a top-type LED that is arranged so as to be able to irradiate light from the rear position of the second light emitting unit 833 toward the front (direction orthogonal to the front surface 801F of the substrate 801). Since the front lens member 802 is separated from the back surface of the second light emitting unit 833 by the maximum distance L4, most of the light is incident on the back surface of the second light emitting unit 833. Then, the light incident on the front lens member 802 is emitted forward from the front surface of the second light emitting unit 833 that protrudes forward through the opening 843. As a result, the second light emitting unit 833 emits light. Since the front surface of the second light emitting portion 833 of the front lens member 802 is formed in a dome shape, the light inside the front lens member 802 is emitted forward so as to spread to the surroundings.

As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, when the first light emitting unit 831 and the second light emitting unit 833 are compared, the distance L3 (see FIG. 30) from the front LED 811 to the back surface of the first light emitting unit 831 is from the front LED 813. The distance to the back surface of the second light emitting unit 833 is shorter than the distance L4 (see FIG. 31) (L3 <L4).

Then, in the first light emitting unit 831 in which the distance L3 from the light emitting body to the light emitting portion is short, the front LED 811 is arranged as an angle LED at a position not corresponding to the first light emitting unit 831, and is different from the first light emitting unit 831. In the second light emitting unit 833, where the distance L4 from the light emitter to the light emitting part is longer than the distance L3, the front LED 813 is used as an angle LED. Instead, it is arranged at a position corresponding to the second light emitting unit 833, and light is directly incident on the second light emitting unit 833 to cause the second light emitting unit 833 to emit light directly.

That is, the first light emitting unit 831 has a structure that emits light in a direction (forward) orthogonal to the light irradiation direction (left direction) from the front LED 811, whereas the second light emitting unit 833 has a front LED 813. Since the structure is such that the light is emitted in the same direction (forward) as the irradiation direction (forward) of the light from, the first light emitting unit 831 and the second light emitting unit 833 provided on the front surface of the decorative member 803 are different light emitting modes. Can be made to emit light at. Further, it is possible to provide the first light emitting unit 831 and the second light emitting unit 833 having different protrusion lengths from the front surface 801F of the substrate 801 on the front surface of the decorative member 803.

(Light emitting structure on the back side of the first effector)
Next, the light emitting structure on the back surface side of the first effect body 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 27 (B). FIG. 33 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD of FIG. 27 (B). 34A and 34B are a rear view showing a light emitting mode of the first effector, FIG. 34B is a front view showing the positional relationship between the first effector and the second effector, and FIG. 34C is a first effector. It is a schematic plan view which shows the positional relationship between and a 2nd effect body.

As shown in FIG. 32, each rear side LED 820 is housed one by one in each LED opening 860 formed in the rear side lens member 804, and is housed from the left side to the right side along the back surface 801B of the substrate 801 toward the right side. Is arranged to irradiate light. Further, on the LED opening 860 side of the peripheral surface of the molding opening 865, an inclined surface portion 825 that gradually inclines backward toward the right side is formed.

Therefore, the light emitted from the rear LED 820 is incident inside from the wall surface on the inner peripheral surface of the LED opening 860 on the molding opening 865 side, and the light incident inside is directed rearward by the inclined surface portion 825. Is reflected, and is emitted rearward from between the molding opening 865 and the LED opening 860 on the back surface of the rear lens member 804.

As shown in FIG. 33, each rear side LED 821 is housed one by one in each LED opening 861 formed in the rear side lens member 804, and is housed from the left side to the right side along the back surface 801B of the substrate 801 toward the right side. Is arranged to irradiate light. Therefore, the light emitted from the rear LED 821 is incident on the inside from the right wall surface on the inner peripheral surface of the LED opening 861, and the light incident on the inside is directed toward the right side inside the rear lens member 804. After being guided while being totally reflected, it is emitted from the light diffusing unit 867R.

Further, although not particularly shown, each rear LED 822 is housed one by one in each LED opening 862 formed in the rear lens member 804, and is housed one by one in each LED opening 862 formed in the rear lens member 804. Is arranged to irradiate light. Therefore, the light emitted from the rear LED 821 is incident on the inside from the left wall surface on the inner peripheral surface of the LED opening 862, and the light incident on the inside is directed toward the left side inside the rear lens member 804. After being guided while being totally reflected, it is emitted from the light diffusing unit 867L.

As shown in FIG. 34 (A), a plurality of rear LED 820s are arranged at substantially the center positions of the left and right side sides of the back surface 801B of the substrate 801 in the vertical direction, and a plurality of rear side LEDs 820 are arranged near the right side side of the back surface 801B. The rear LED 821 is arranged in the vertical direction, and a plurality of rear LEDs 822 are arranged in the vertical direction at a position near the left side on the back surface 801B.

Then, when the rear LED 820 emits light, the inclined surface portion 825 between each LED opening 860 and the molding opening 865 in the rear lens member 804 emits light, and when the rear LED 821 emits light, the light diffusing portion 867R emits light. When the rear LED 822 emits light, the light diffusing unit 867L emits light. Since the inclined surface portion 825 and the light diffusing portions 867L and 867R can emit light toward the front-rear surface side and the side along the substrate 801, they are moved not only to the front-rear surface side but also to the effect position side. 2 The effect body 900 can be suitably illuminated (see FIG. 34 (C)).

As shown in FIGS. 34 (B) and 34 (C), in the present embodiment, the second effect body 900 is provided on the back side of the first effect body 800. Specifically, the second effect body 900 has an origin position positioned so as to be superimposed on the back side of the first effect body 800 when viewed from the front by a drive source (not shown), and an effect position diagonally upward to the right from the origin position. It is provided so that it can be moved (operated) between. Further, as shown in FIG. 34 (C), the second effect body 900 is arranged at a position separated from the first effect body 800 by a predetermined distance at the origin position, and when moving to the effect position, the first effect body 900 is first. It is said that it can be moved in the direction along the substrate 801 of the effect body 800.

Therefore, when the second effect body 900 on the back side of the first effect body 800 is at the origin position, the rear side LEDs 820 to 822 provided on the back side of the first effect body 800 are made to emit light to produce the second effect. The front side of the body 900 can be suitably illuminated. Further, even when the second effect body 900 moves to the effect position diagonally upward to the right of the origin position, it can be suitably illuminated by the light from the light diffusing unit 867R.

Further, for example, when the rear side LEDs 820 to 822 are arranged so that light can be irradiated to the back side side in a direction orthogonal to the back surface 801B of the substrate 801, the rear side lens member 804 covers the back surface 801B of the substrate 801. In this case, it is necessary to arrange the rear lens member 804 at a position farther from the rear side LEDs 820 to 822, and the front-rear dimension of the second effect body 900 is increased by that amount, as in the present embodiment. The rear side LEDs 820 to 822 are arranged as angle LEDs so as to be irradiated in the direction along the back surface 801B, and the light is reflected rearward by the inclined surface portion 825 of the rear side lens member 804 arranged close to the substrate 801. , The second effect body 900 on the back side can be suitably illuminated while the front-rear dimension of the second effect body 900 is shortened.

(Board noise countermeasure 2)
Next, the antistatic structure of the first effect body 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37. 35A and 35B are a front view of a main part showing a state in which the first effect body is viewed through a game board, and FIG. 35B is a view showing a main part of a substrate. FIG. 36 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE of FIG. 35 (B). FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an antistatic structure as a modification 13 of the present invention.

As shown in FIGS. 35A and 36, a plurality of metal obstacle nails K are provided on the front surface of the board surface plate 2A constituting the game board 2. Each obstacle nail K is erected so as to project forward in a state of being inclined in a predetermined direction with respect to the game board surface by press-fitting into a through hole 2d formed so as to penetrate the board surface plate 2A in the front-rear direction. ..

As shown in FIGS. 1, 35 (A) and 36, the first effect body 800 is on the left side of the game area 10, specifically, the lower left of the opening 2c formed in the board surface plate 2A of the game board 2. At the position, it is provided so as to be close to the back surface of the board surface plate 2A. Therefore, the static electricity generated in the game ball due to some factor may be discharged to the first effect body 800 on the back surface side of the board surface plate 2A through the through hole 2d.

Note that the static electricity is provided on, for example, the gaming board surface of the board surface plate 2A in which the gaming ball flowing down the game area 10 is made of an obstacle nail K and an acrylic resin material, the acrylic resin plate provided in place of the glass window 50a, and the board surface plate 2A. Contact with an obstacle or accessory made of a synthetic resin material, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 flows down, the game ball is charged, or the game ball is outside the pachinko game machine 1, for example. It is conceivable that a charged gaming ball enters the pachinko gaming machine 1 while circulating in the gaming island or the like. Further, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, the effect device 200, the second effect body 900, and other movable objects other than the game ball are charged due to friction and the like generated by the operation. It is also possible.

Here, when the entire front and back surfaces including the peripheral surfaces of the bosses 844A to 844E in the decorative member 803 of the first effect body 800 are plated and the front and back surfaces are conductive portions, the discharged electricity is generated. It is conceivable that the decorative member 803 wraps around from the front surface side to the back surface side (back surface side), and further wraps around to the peripheral surfaces of the bosses 844A to 844E.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 35B and 36, the bosses 844A to 844E project to the back surface side of the substrate 801 and are located on the side of the notches 824A to 824E formed in the substrate 801. Electricity wrapping around from the front surface side to the back surface side of the decorative member 803 may be discharged to the substrate 801 side via the bosses 844A to 844E.

As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 36, the periphery of the bosses 844A to 844E is covered with the front lens member 802 and the posterior lens member 804, which are non-conductive members, but the back surface of the front lens member 802. If there is even a slight gap (not shown) between the periphery of the insertion holes 834A to 834E and the fitting portions 870A to 870E of the rear lens member 804, the electric discharge is discharged from the gap to the substrate 801 side.

When the electric discharge is performed on the substrate 801 side in this way, electricity flows through the wiring pattern formed on the surface 800F of the substrate 801 and emits light from the front LEDs 810 to 812 and 813 mounted on the surface 800F and the front LEDs 810 to 812 and 815. Problems (for example, inability to emit light, abnormal color development, abnormal light emission control, etc.) occur in the LED drive IC that controls and electronic components such as (control means), and in particular, as shown in FIG. 36, the surface 800F of the substrate 801 There is a possibility that the front LED 810 is discharged directly to the front LED 810 arranged in the vicinity of the boss 844C in the above, and a problem occurs in the front LED 810.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36, the bosses 844A to 844E projecting toward the substrate 801 have a non-conductive portion 851 whose surface is not plated, and thus the rear side lens. Since the electricity that wraps around the back surface side of the member 804 is less likely to be discharged to the substrate 801 side via the bosses 844A to 844E that project to the substrate 801 side, problems related to various electronic components mounted on the front surface 800F may occur. It can be suitably suppressed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the embodiment of the present invention, electronic components (for example, front side LEDs 810 to 812, 813, rear side LEDs 820 to 822, connector KCN, conversion IC, etc.) are mounted. The substrate 801 is provided with a decorative member 803, which is arranged so as to cover the front surface 801F which is the mounting surface of the electronic component on the substrate 801. The decorative member 803 has conductive portions 850 on the front and back surfaces. The bosses 844A to 844E are formed as protruding portions protruding toward the substrate 801 side, and the bosses 844A to 844E have a non-conductive portion 851 on the substrate 801 side.

By doing so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects in the electronic components due to the discharge from the conductive portion 850.

Specifically, the static electricity charged on the obstacle nail K is discharged to the conductive portion 850 of the decorative member 803, so that the static electricity charged on the game ball is discharged to the conductive portion 850 of the decorative member 803 via the conductive obstacle nail K. Since it can be released, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being charged with static electricity. Further, in the decorative member 803, the bosses 844A to 844E project toward the substrate 801 side as compared with other parts, that is, they are close to the substrate 801 but the surfaces of the bosses 844A to 844E are plated. Since the non-conductive portion 851 is formed without being applied, it is preferably suppressed that the electricity that wraps around to the back surface side of the decorative member 803 is discharged to the substrate 801 side via the bosses 844A to 844E.

Further, since the front lens member 802 made of a non-conductive member is arranged between the front surface 801F of the substrate 801 and the back surface of the decorative member 803, the electricity that wraps around to the back surface side of the decorative member 803 is bossed. It is possible to suppress the discharge to the front side of the substrate 801 without going through 844A to 844E.

Further, the bosses 844A to 844E are projected from the front lens member 802 toward the substrate 801 by inserting the insertion holes 834A to 834E of the front lens member 802 made of a non-conductive member at the tip end side thereof. Since the non-conductive portion 851 is formed on the surface of the tip portion, it is possible to prevent electricity from flowing to the portion protruding toward the substrate 801 from the front lens member 802.

Further, the electronic component is a light emitting diode (for example, front side LEDs 810 to 812, 813, etc.). By doing so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems in light emission. Further, in particular, angle LEDs such as the front side LEDs 810 to 812 can irradiate a member near the edge of the substrate with light, and therefore are often arranged closer to the peripheral edge of the substrate than the top type LED. Therefore, even in such a case, even when the front LED 810, which is an angle LED, is arranged in the vicinity of the bosses 844A to 844E, it is possible to suppress the discharge of static electricity to the substrate 801 via the bosses 844A to 844E.

Further, the electronic component is a connector (for example, a substrate-side connector KCN or the like). By doing so, it is possible to prevent a defect from occurring not only in the electronic component on the front surface 801F of the substrate 801 on which the connector is mounted but also in the electronic component to which the connector is connected via the connector. Further, in particular, the connector is often arranged near the peripheral edge of the substrate so that the wiring connected to the connector does not run along the mounting surface. Therefore, even in such a case, even when the front LED 810, which is an angle LED, is arranged in the vicinity of the bosses 844A to 844E, it is possible to suppress the discharge of static electricity to the substrate 801 via the bosses 844A to 844E.

Further, a control means (for example, a conversion IC) for controlling other electronic components including the electronic component is mounted on the substrate 801. By doing so, not only the electronic components mounted on the board 801 but also other electronic components such as, for example, a problem in controlling other electronic components mounted on the other board connected to the board 801 may occur. It is possible to prevent adverse effects on parts.

Further, a front lens member 802 as a non-conductive member is provided between the decorative member 803 and the substrate 801. The front lens member 802 can guide light from the front LEDs 810 to 812 and 815 provided on the substrate 801. It is a light guide member (translucent member).

By doing so, it is possible to suppress the discharge from the decorative member 803 to the substrate 801 by utilizing the front lens member 802, which is a light guide member capable of guiding the light from the front LEDs 810 to 812 and 813.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as an example of the electronic component, an embodiment in which the front side LEDs 810 to 812 and 815, the rear side LEDs 820 to 822, the substrate side connector KCN, the conversion IC and the like are applied has been exemplified, but the present invention is limited thereto. It includes detection means such as sensors, drive sources such as motors and solenoids, storage means such as ROM and RAM, protection resistors, and various electronic components other than the above such as diodes and capacitors.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which electronic components such as front side LEDs 810 to 812 and 813, rear side LEDs 820 to 822, and board side connector KCN are connected to the effect control board 12 has been illustrated. It is not limited, and may be connected to a board other than the effect control board 12 (for example, the main board 11) or a control means (for example, CPU 103).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the conductive portion 850 is formed by plating the surface (front and rear surfaces) of the decorative member 803 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the decorative member 803 may be formed of a synthetic resin material or the like having conductivity by mixing carbon fibers or the like so that a conductive portion is formed on the surface.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the bosses 844A to 844E into which the screw N1 for integrating the decorative member 803 and the rear lens member 804 covering the back surface 801B of the substrate 801 are screwed are applied as the protruding portion. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if it is a portion that protrudes from the decorative member 803 toward the substrate 801 side from other parts, the members are integrated as described above. A protruding portion other than the boss into which the screw is screwed (for example, a positioning boss for determining the mounting position of the substrate 801 or another member with respect to the decorative member 803) may be applied.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the bosses 844A to 844E as the protrusions have a protrusion length that passes through the side of the substrate 801 and reaches the back surface 801B side, but the present invention is limited thereto. The projecting portion may project so as to be closer to the substrate 801 than other parts of the decorative member. For example, the projecting portion is the front surface of the decorative member 803 from a position corresponding to the front surface 801F. It may be one that protrudes so as to be close to or in contact with 801F.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the non-conductive portion 851 is formed on the surface of the bosses 844A to 844E as the protruding portion, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the surface of the protruding portion is not limited to this. As long as the non-conductive portion 851 is formed at least in the portion corresponding to the substrate 801 in the above, the conductive portion 850 may be formed in the other region.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the decorative member 803 exemplifies a form in which the decorative member 803 is arranged close to the back surface side of the board surface plate 2A of the game board 2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative member is not limited to this. May be arranged at a position other than the above.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the decorative member 803 is arranged so as to cover the front surface 801F of the substrate 801. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative member 803 is the substrate 801. It may be arranged so as to cover the back surface 801B of the.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the embodiment of the present invention, the first effector 800 having the substrate 801 provided with the light emitting body (for example, the rear LED 820 to 822) on the back surface 801B and the substrate 801 The second effect body 900, which can operate on the back surface 801B side of the above, is provided, and the second effect body 900 can be irradiated by the light from the rear side LEDs 820 to 822.

By doing so, it is not necessary to mount the substrate 801 or the like on which the rear side LEDs 820 to 822 are mounted on the movable second effect body 900. It becomes possible to produce.

Further, the second effect body 900 can be moved in a direction along the back surface 801B of the substrate 801 (for example, in the left-right direction), and the rear LEDs 820 to 822 irradiate light in the moving direction of the second effect body 900. It is possible. Specifically, when the rear LED 821 emits light, the light diffusing unit 867R emits light, and when the rear LED 822 emits light, the light diffusing unit 867L emits light. Since the inclined surface portion 825 and the light diffusing portions 867L and 867R can emit light toward the back side and the side along the substrate 801, they move from the back side and the origin position to the effect position side diagonally upward to the right. It is possible to preferably illuminate the second effect body 900.

By doing so, even when the second effect body 900 moves to the side of the first effect body 800, the light can be suitably irradiated.

In the present embodiment, the rear LED 821 emits light from the light diffusing portion 867R on the right side, so that the second effect body 900 that has moved from the origin position to the effect position diagonally upward to the right can be suitably illuminated. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and although not particularly shown, the light from the rear LED 821 is moved to the right side effect position without guiding the rear lens member 804. 2 The effector 900 may be directly illuminated.

Further, a rear lens member 804 as a light guide member having an LED opening 860 to 862 capable of covering at least a part of the back surface 801B of the substrate 801 and accommodating the rear side LEDs 820 to 822 in the covered state is provided. The rear side LEDs 820 to 822 can emit light from the side surface (peripheral wall) of the LED openings 860 to 862 into the inside of the rear lens member 804 in a state of being housed in the LED openings 860 to 862 (FIG. 32). reference).

By doing so, the substrate 801 can be covered by using the rear lens member 804 that guides the light from the rear LED 820 to 822, and the rear lens member 804 is arranged close to the substrate 801. Therefore, the thickness dimension of the first effect body 800 in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

Therefore, for example, when the rear side LEDs 820 to 822 of the first effect body 800 can illuminate the second effect body 900 on the back side, the front-rear dimension between the game board 2 and the effect display device 5 is set. Even if there is a limit, by making the thickness dimension of the first effect body 800 in the front-rear direction as thin as possible, the first effect body 800 and the second effect body 900 can be moved back and forth between the game board 2 and the effect display device 5. Can be arranged so as to overlap with each other.

In the present embodiment, the LED openings 860 to 862 are formed at positions corresponding to the respective rear LEDs 820 to 822 in the rear lens member 804, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, the rear lens member 804 is brought closer to the substrate 801 by forming a recess in the rear lens member 804 that can accommodate the rear LEDs 820 to 822 at a position corresponding to each of the rear LEDs 820 to 822. May be good.

Further, in the vicinity of the LED openings 860 to 862 in the rear lens member 804, there is an inclined surface portion 825 as a reflecting portion that reflects the incident light toward the second effect body 900 side.

By doing so, the light emitted from the rear LED 820 to 822 in the direction along the back surface 801B of the substrate 801 can be reflected to the back surface side, so that the protruding dimension from the back surface 801B of the substrate 801 is a normal LED. It is possible to preferably illuminate the second effect body 900 on the back side while reducing the thickness dimension of the first effect body 800 in the front-rear direction by using a smaller angle LED.

Further, the rear lens member 804 has light diffusing portions 867L and 867R as light emitting portions that emit light from the rear side LEDs 820 to 822 incident on the inside from the LED openings 860 to 862.

By doing so, the light radiated from the rear LED 820 to 822 can be circulated in the surroundings to illuminate, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, on the front surface 801F opposite to the back surface 801B of the substrate 801, front side LEDs 810 to 812 and 815 different from the rear side LEDs 820 to 822 are provided.

By doing so, the front side of the first effect body 800 can also be suitably illuminated.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the second effect body 900 is operably arranged on the back side of the first effect body 800, and the second effect body 900 on the back side is operably arranged by the rear side LEDs 820 to 822 of the first effect body 800. Although a suitable illuminating form has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second effect body 900 is operably arranged on the front side of the first effect body 800, and the front LED 810 of the first effect body 800 is arranged. ~ 812 and 813 may be used to preferably illuminate the second effect body 900 on the front side.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the second effect body 900 can move in the direction along the substrate 801 between the origin position on the back surface side of the first effect body 800 and the effect position diagonally to the upper right of the origin position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation mode of the second effector 900 is arbitrary and can be moved not only in the left-right direction but also in the front-back direction and the up-down direction. It may be movable.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the light from the rear side LEDs 820 to 822 of the first effect body 800 is reflected rearward by the inclined surface portion 825 of the rear side lens member 804 to illuminate the second effect body 900 is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rear side LEDs 820 to 822 of the first effect body 800 may be not an angle LED but a light emitting body capable of irradiating light toward the back side.

Further, in the above embodiment, the embodiment in which the back surface 801B of the substrate 801 is covered with the rear side lens member 804 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the back surface 801B of the substrate 801 is the rear side lens. It does not have to be covered by the member 804. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first effect body 800 is fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface side of the game board 2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first effect is not limited to this. The body 800 may be operably provided.

Further, a first effect body 800 having a substrate 801 provided with a light emitting body (for example, rear side LEDs 820 to 822) on the back surface 801B and a second effect body 900 capable of operating on the back surface 801B side of the substrate 801 are provided. In the pachinko game machine 1 capable of irradiating the second effect body 900 with the light from the rear side LEDs 820 to 822, for example, the surface on the first effect body 800 side is subjected to a metallized surface treatment such as plating or metal deposition. The second effect body 900 is provided with a projecting portion that projects toward the substrate 801 of the first effect body 800 so that the projecting portion passes near the peripheral edge of the substrate 801 according to the operation of the second effect body 900. In this case, it is preferable to form a non-conductive portion on the surface of the protruding portion. By doing so, the electric discharge from the protruding portion of the second effect body 900 causes a problem in the electronic component (for example, the back surface 801B) mounted on the back surface 801B side of the substrate 801 of the first effect body 800. Can be suppressed.

Further, in the substrate 801, a first ground region formed at a position close to an electronic component to be mounted (for example, a back surface 801B) and a first ground region formed between the first ground region and a peripheral edge portion of the substrate 801. It may have two ground regions. By doing so, when the protruding portion of the second effect body 900 approaches the peripheral edge of the substrate 801 of the first effect body 800 according to the operation, the static electricity charged on the projecting portion of the second effect body 900 is generated. Even when the electric component is discharged to the substrate 801 of the first effect body 800, it is possible to prevent a defect from occurring in an electronic component (for example, the back surface 801B) mounted on the back surface 801B side of the substrate 801 of the first effect body 800.

(Modification 13)
Next, a modification 13 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a wiring connection state between the LED board and the effect control board, and FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a wiring connection state between the LED board and the effect control board as a modification 13 of the present invention. be.

As shown in FIG. 37 (A), for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present modification 13 includes an LED substrate 910 on which the LED 911 is mounted on one surface as a light emitting body for holding display and decoration. The LED board 910 and the effect control board 12 are connected by a connector via wiring 912. Further, as shown in FIG. 37 (B), a part of the wiring 912 extending from the back side of the LED board 910 and the LED board 910 is covered with a decorative member 913 that opens on the back side. The surface of the decorative member 913 is plated to form a conductive portion 914.

Then, when the periphery of a part of the wiring 912 is covered with the decorative member 913 provided with the conductive portion 914 on the surface, the static electricity charged in the conductive portion 914 is applied to the LED substrate 910 as described above. Since there is a possibility of discharging to the mounting surface 910F of the LED 911 and the LED 911, the front surface side of the LED substrate 910 is covered with a lens member 915 made of a non-conductive member.

Further, since a part of the wiring 912 extending from the back side of the LED board 910 is covered with the conductive portion 914, the static electricity charged in the conductive portion 914 is discharged to the wiring 912, thereby producing the effect control board. Since the LED drive control signal output from 12 is easily affected by noise, the position corresponding to the conductive portion 914 in the wiring 912 is an electrically insulating material such as a tube made of a rubber material made of a non-conductive stopper member or the like. By covering with 916, a non-conductive member is arranged between the wiring 912 and the conductive portion 914, so that the LED drive control signal output from the effect control board 12 is less likely to be affected by noise. can.

(Initialization process of movable body)
Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. First, when the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 starts executing the main process shown in FIG. 38. In the main process, first, the first initialization process (S50) for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing the timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 2 ms) of the effect control. , The second initialization process for returning the movable bodies 250 and 900 to the origin position and confirming the operation is performed (S51). After that, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S52). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets the timer interrupt flag by the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (on) in the main process, the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (S53) and executes the following process.

The effect control CPU 120 first performs a command analysis process (S54). In the command analysis process, which command (see FIG. 3) is the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the received command buffer is analyzed. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM. Then, a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command is performed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control process process (S55). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the effect display device 5 is executed.

Next, an effect random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating an effect random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number is executed (S56), and then the process proceeds to S52.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the second initialization process (S51) of the present embodiment. In the second initialization process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the movable body to be operated first based on the setting data (S101). The setting data includes the order data of the movable bodies, and in the present embodiment, the order of the movable body 250 → the second effect body 900 → the third movable body (not shown) is preset as the order. There is. Therefore, when S101 is executed for the first time, the movable body 250 is specified as the target movable body.

Next, it is determined whether or not the movable body specified in S101 is an origin detection target accessory for which it is necessary to perform origin detection (S102).

In the present embodiment, the movable body 250 having the origin detection sensor and the second effect body 900 having the origin detection sensor correspond to the origin detection target accessory for which it is necessary to perform the origin detection, and the origin detection sensor is used. The third movable body (not shown) that does not have is not applicable. Therefore, when the movable body specified in S101 is the movable body 250 or the second effect body 900, it is determined as "Y" in the determination, while the movable body specified in S101 is the third movable body (not shown). ), It will be determined as "N".

If it is determined to be "N" in S102, the process proceeds to S130. On the other hand, if it is determined to be "Y" in S102, the process proceeds to S103 to specify the detection state of the origin detection sensor corresponding to the operation target accessory (S103), and whether or not the origin detection sensor is in the detection state. That is, it is determined whether or not the target movable body is located at the origin position (initial position) (S104).

If it is not located at the origin position (initial position) (S104; N), the process proceeds to S105, and after setting 0 in the non-detection operation count counter for counting the number of executions of the non-detection operation control. (S105) As the control speed for operating the operation target accessory, the operation target is the same as the minimum speed (see FIGS. 41 and 42) in the actual operation confirmation operation control (long initialization operation control) described later. The minimum control speed for operating the accessory is set (S106), and the drive motor of the accessory to be operated, for example, if the accessory to be operated is the movable body 250, the drive motor is started to be driven in the direction of the origin position. (S107), the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer is started (S108). The timer count of the non-detection operation period timer may be performed, for example, by counting the number of signals output from the CTC initialized in the first initialization process at regular intervals. ..

Then, the origin detection sensor shifts to the detection state, and the non-detection operation period timer shifts to the monitoring state of monitoring whether or not the value corresponds to the upper limit time (S109, S110).

When the operation target accessory is positioned at the origin position (initial position) by driving the drive device (for example, the drive motor) of the operation target accessory toward the origin position, the origin detection sensor is in the detection state. The drive of the movable body drive motor is stopped and the process proceeds to S130. On the other hand, when the non-detection operation period timer reaches a value corresponding to the upper limit time, that is, when the operation target accessory is not located at the origin position (initial position) even after the upper limit time has elapsed, S112 Proceed to, 1 is added to the non-detection operation count counter (S112), and it is determined whether or not the value of the non-detection operation count counter after the addition reaches the operation error determination count (for example, 3). (S113).

When the value of the non-detection operation count counter reaches the operation error determination count in S113, the drive of the movable body drive motor is stopped, the origin return error of the operation target accessory is stored (S114), and S130. Proceed to. That is, when the operation target accessory is not located at the origin position (initial position) in the non-detection operation control, the operation control for actual operation confirmation described later is not executed for the operation target accessory (the relevant operation control). The origin return error is stored in order to put the operation target accessory in the dead end state), and the process proceeds to S130.

In the present embodiment, when the value of the operation count counter at the time of non-detection reaches the operation error determination number in S113, the mode in which the operation target accessory is in the dead end state is illustrated. The second initialization is not limited to this, and when the value of the non-detection operation count counter reaches the operation error determination count in S113, error processing is started and the error processing is executed to execute the error processing. When the processing is interrupted, the effect control main process may be interrupted without proceeding to S52, and the effect control board 12 (such as the effect control CPU 120) may not be started (dead end state).

Further, when the operation target accessory is in the dead end state, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120 or the like) is activated, but for example, the effect control CPU 120 is an input signal (for example, indicating that the movable body is operated). , It is preferable to execute a process such as invalidating the reception of the detection signal of the effect button or the like, or preventing the movable body from operating even if the input signal is input.

On the other hand, if the value of the non-detection operation count counter has not reached the operation error determination count, the operation is performed by stopping the driving of the movable body drive motor, returning to S106, and performing the processes of S106 to S108 again. The operation of moving the target accessory to the origin position at the lowest speed in the operation control for confirming the actual operation (long initialization operation control) (operation control at the time of non-detection) is started, and the above-mentioned monitoring states of S109 and S110 are set. Transition.

Therefore, even if it is determined in S110 that the error determination time has elapsed, the operation of repeatedly moving the operation target accessory to the origin position (initial position) (operation control at the time of non-detection) is executed until the number of operation error determinations is reached. If the moving object is detected at the origin position (initial position) during the operation, the process proceeds to S130 without proceeding to S114.

On the other hand, when the determination is "Y" in S104 described above and the process proceeds to S120, 0 is set in the detection operation count counter, the detection operation process data is set (S121a), and the detection operation process timer is set. (S121b). As the timer count of the detection operation process timer, the signal output from the CTC initialized in the first initialization process at regular intervals is the same as the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer described above. It may be done by counting the number or the like. Further, in the detection operation process data of the present embodiment, as the control speed for operating the operation target accessory, the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control (long initialization operation control) described later (FIG. 41, The minimum control speed for operating the operation target accessory at the same operation speed as (see FIG. 42) is described (set).

Next, the operation target accessory is operated based on the set minimum control speed set in the detected operation process data (S122), and it is determined whether or not the process data is completed (S123), and the process data If is not completed, the process returns to S122, and the operation target accessory is operated based on the minimum control speed set in the detection operation process data.

In this way, in the operation control at the time of detection, the minimum speed based on the minimum control speed set in the operation process data at the time of detection, that is, the operation control for confirming the actual operation (long initial stage) until the operation process data at the time of detection is completed. At the lowest speed in the conversion operation control), the operation of temporarily moving away from the origin position (initial position) and returning to the origin position (initial position) from a position away from the origin position (initial position) is performed (see FIG. 41). The position away from the origin position is a position near the origin position, that is, a position where each origin sensor cannot detect the detected portion of each movable body, and a predetermined position (detection) closer to the origin position than each effect position. When operating position) is set.

If it is determined in the determination of S123 that the set detection operation process data is completed, the drive of the movable body drive motor is stopped and the process proceeds to S124 to determine whether the origin detection sensor is in the detection state. That is, it is determined (confirmed) whether or not the operation target accessory is located at the origin position (initial position).

When the origin detection sensor is in the detection state, that is, when the operation target accessory is located at the origin position (initial position), the process proceeds to S130.

On the other hand, when the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state, that is, when the operation target accessory is not located at the origin position (initial position), 1 is added to the detection operation count counter (S126). , It is determined whether or not the value of the detection operation number counter after the addition reaches the operation error determination number (for example, 3) (S127). When the value of the operation count counter at the time of detection has reached the operation error determination count, the process proceeds to S128 to store the origin return error of the operation target accessory (S128), and proceeds to S130. That is, when the operation target accessory is not located at the origin position (initial position) in the detection operation control, the operation control for actual operation confirmation described later is not executed for the operation target accessory (the operation). The origin return error is memorized in order to put the target accessory in the dead end state), and the process proceeds to S130.

In the present embodiment, when the value of the operation count counter at the time of detection reaches the operation error determination number in S127, the embodiment in which the operation target accessory is in the dead end state is illustrated. When the value of the operation count counter at the time of detection reaches the operation error determination number in S113, the second initialization process is performed by starting the error process and executing the error process. By being interrupted, the effect control main process may be interrupted without proceeding to S52, and the effect control board 12 may not be activated (dead end state).

Further, when the operation target accessory is in the dead end state, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120 or the like) is activated, but for example, the effect control CPU 120 has an input signal (for example, an effect button) for operating the movable body. It is preferable to execute a process such as invalidating the reception of the detection signal) or preventing the movable body from operating even if the input signal is input.

In S130, which is executed when it is determined as "N" in S102, when it is determined as "Y" in S109, or when it is determined as "Y" in S124, it has not yet been targeted for operation among the movable bodies. It is determined whether or not the remaining movable body exists, and when the remaining movable body does not exist (specifically, when the moving target accessory is the third movable body (not shown)), FIG. 40 Move to the process of performing the operation control for checking the actual operation shown in. On the other hand, when the remaining movable body exists, the process proceeds to S131 to specify the movable body to be operated next, and then returns to S102 to perform the above-mentioned processing after S102 for the specified operation target accessory. Do the same.

When S131 is executed when the movement target accessory is the movable body 250, the second effect body 900 is specified as the operation target accessory based on the setting data, and the operation target accessory is the second effect. When S131 is executed in the case of the body 900, the third movable body (not shown) is specified as the operation target accessory based on the setting data.

Next, the process shown in FIG. 40 will be described. In S200 shown in FIG. 40, the effect control CPU 120 first, like the above-mentioned S101, is a movable body (confirmation target accessory) whose operation is first confirmed based on the setting data. (S200). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a memory of the origin return error of the target accessory (S201).

If there is a memory of the origin return error of the accessory to be confirmed, the process proceeds to S220 without executing the processes S202a to S213. By doing so, in the present embodiment, the operation control for confirming the actual operation is not performed for the movable body determined to have the origin return error in the operation control at the time of non-detection and the operation control at the time of detection. ..

On the other hand, if there is no memory of the origin return error of the accessory to be confirmed, the process proceeds to S202a and the process data for confirming the actual operation corresponding to the accessory to be confirmed is set. That is, if the confirmation target accessory is the movable body 250, the process data for confirming the actual operation of the movable body 250 is set, and if the confirmation target accessory is the second effect body 900, the actual operation of the second effect body 900 is set. The confirmation process data is set, and if the accessory to be confirmed is the third movable body (not shown), the actual operation confirmation process data of the third movable body (not shown) is set. In each of these actual operation confirmation process data, the control speed and the like are described (set) so that the movable body performs the same operation as the actual operation in the movable body effect in the effect.

Next, the timer count of the actual operation confirmation process timer is started (S202b). As the timer count of the process timer for checking the actual operation, a signal output from the CTC initialized in the first initialization process at regular intervals is the same as the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer described above. It may be done by counting the number of.

Then, in the set actual operation confirmation process data, the confirmation target accessory is operated at the control speed set corresponding to the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer (S203), and the process data is completed. It is determined whether or not the process data has been completed (S204), and if the process data has not been completed, the process returns to S203 and the accessory to be confirmed is set according to the timer count value of the process timer for confirming the actual operation at that time. Operate based on the controlled speed.

In this way, until the actual operation confirmation process data is completed, the confirmation target accessory is operated at the control speed set in the actual operation confirmation process data corresponding to the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer. By doing so, the control speed of the accessory to be confirmed can be sequentially changed in chronological order to accelerate or decelerate the same as the control speed set when the movable body is actually operated in the movable body effect. can.

Then, in the determination of S204, when it is determined that the set actual operation confirmation process data is completed, the driving of the movable body drive motor is stopped, and whether or not the target accessory is the origin target accessory. (S204a). If the target accessory is not the origin detection target accessory, that is, if it is a third movable body (not shown), the process proceeds to S220, and if the target accessory is a third movable body (not shown), the process proceeds to S222. move on. On the other hand, if the target accessory is the origin detection target accessory, that is, if the movable body 250 or the second effect body 900, whether or not the origin detection sensor is in the detection state, that is, the operation target accessory is It is determined (confirmed) whether or not it is located at the origin position (initial position) (S205).

When the origin detection sensor is in the detection state, that is, when the accessory to be confirmed is located at the origin position (initial position), the process proceeds to S220. On the other hand, when the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state, that is, when the accessory to be confirmed is not located at the origin position (initial position), the above-mentioned non-detection operation control (see FIG. 39) is performed. The process of S206 to S213 is performed in order to position the target accessory at the origin position (initial position).

Specifically, after setting 0 to the non-detection operation count counter for counting the number of executions of the non-detection operation control (S206), the actual operation confirmation operation control (long initialization operation control) is used as the control speed. Set the minimum control speed for operating the operation target accessory at the same operation speed as the minimum speed in (S207), and drive the drive device of the confirmation target accessory, for example, if the confirmation target accessory is the movable body 250. The motor is started to be driven in the direction of the origin position (initial position) (S208), and the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer is started (S209).

Then, the origin detection sensor shifts to the detection state, and the non-detection operation period timer shifts to the monitoring state of monitoring whether or not the value corresponds to the upper limit time (S210, S211).

When the target accessory is positioned at the origin position (initial position) by driving the drive device (for example, the drive motor) of the target accessory in the direction of the origin position (initial position) and the origin detection sensor is in the detection state. Is determined to be "Y" in S210 and proceeds to S220. On the other hand, when the non-detection operation period timer reaches a value corresponding to the upper limit time, that is, when the confirmation target accessory is not located at the origin position (initial position) even after the upper limit time has elapsed, S212 Proceed to, 1 is added to the non-detection operation count counter (S212), and it is determined whether or not the value of the non-detection operation count counter after the addition reaches the operation error determination count (for example, 3). (S213).

If the value of the non-detection operation count counter has reached the operation error determination count, the process proceeds to S220. In the present embodiment, when the value of the operation count counter at the time of non-detection reaches the operation error determination number in S213, the mode in which the operation target accessory is in the dead end state is illustrated, but the present invention has been illustrated. Not limited to this, when the value of the operation count counter at the time of non-detection reaches the operation error determination number in S213, the origin return error of the operation target accessory is stored, and the operation target accessory is After that, the actual operation may not be executed. Alternatively, by starting the error processing and executing the error processing, the second initialization process is interrupted, so that the effect control main process is interrupted without proceeding to S52, and the effect control board 12 does not start. (Dead end state) may be set.

Further, when the operation target accessory is in the dead end state, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120 or the like) is activated, but for example, the effect control CPU 120 has an input signal (for example, an effect button) for operating the movable body. It is preferable to execute a process such as invalidating the reception of the detection signal) or preventing the movable body from operating even if the input signal is input.

On the other hand, if the value of the non-detection operation count counter has not reached the operation error determination count, the operation is confirmed by returning to S207 and performing the processing of S207, S208, and S209 again. The operation of moving to the origin position (initial position) at the lowest speed in the operation control (long initialization operation control) (operation at the time of returning to the origin) is started, and the state shifts to the monitoring state of S210 and S211 described above.

Therefore, even if it is determined in S211 that the error determination time has elapsed, the operation of repeatedly moving the target accessory to the origin position (initial position) (operation control at the time of non-detection) is executed until the number of operation error determinations is reached. If the target accessory is detected at the origin position (initial position) during the process, the process proceeds to S220.

In S220 to be executed when it is determined as "Y" in S201, when it is determined as "N" in S204a, when it is determined as "Y" in S205, or when it is determined as "Y" in S210. , It is determined whether or not there is a remaining movable body among the movable bodies that has not yet been confirmed for operation confirmation, and if the remaining movable body does not exist (specifically, the target accessory for operation confirmation is the first. In the case of 3 movable bodies (not shown), the error record stored in S114 or S128 is cleared (S222), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the remaining movable bodies are present, S221 After identifying the movable body whose operation is to be confirmed next, the process returns to S201, and the above-described processing after S201 is similarly executed for the specified target accessory.

Here, the operation mode and the control content of the movable body by executing the second initialization process shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. FIG. 41 is a schematic explanatory view showing operation modes of non-detection operation control, detection operation control, and actual operation confirmation operation control performed by the effect control CPU 120. 42A and 42B are explanatory diagrams showing the control speed in the operation control for confirming the actual operation, FIG. 42B is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the operation control at the time of detection, and FIG. 42C is the control speed in the operation control at the time of non-detection. It is explanatory drawing which shows.

In addition, in FIGS. 41 and 42, the non-detection operation control (short initialization operation control) and the detection operation control (short initialization operation control) of the movable body 250 and the second effect body 900, which are the origin detection target objects, are shown. ) And the operation control for confirming the actual operation (long initialization operation control), and the description of the third movable body (not shown) that is not the origin detection target accessory will be omitted. Further, although the reciprocating operating distance (rotation range) of the first movable portion 302 of the movable body 250 and the reciprocating operating distance (moving range) of the second movable portions 401 and 402 of the second effect body 900 are not the same, For convenience of explanation, the same conceptual diagram will be used for explanation.

As shown in FIG. 41, the first movable portion 302 of the movable body 250 and the second movable portions 401 and 402 of the second effect body 900 reciprocate between the origin position (retracted position, initial position) and the effect position, respectively. It is provided so that it can be operated, and the forward operation from the origin position to the effect position and the return operation from the effect position to the origin position are considered to be actual operations actually performed in the above-mentioned movable body effect and the like.

In the effect control CPU 120, when the detected portion of the movable body is not detected by the origin detection sensor when the second initialization process is executed, that is, the origin of the movable body is some reason (for example, when the movable body is transported or installed on a game island). If it has moved from the position, or if the origin cannot be returned during the previous operation (for example, when the effect is executed, the origin return of the movable body cannot be confirmed or can be operated due to motor step-out, failure, catching, etc.) Corresponds to the operation control at the time of non-detection in FIG. When it is at a predetermined position between the origin position and the effect position, such as the position indicated by the black circle, the non-detection operation control for returning to the origin is executed. When this non-detection motion control is executed, since the movable body is located at a position away from the origin position, the motion is limited to the motion of moving the movable body in the direction of the origin position.

Further, in the effect control CPU 120, when the second initialization process is executed, the detected portions of the first movable portion 302 of the movable body 250 and the second movable portions 401 and 402 of the second effect body 900 are detected by the origin detection sensor. If it is detected, the operation control at the time of detection is executed.

For example, in order to ensure that the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensor, a predetermined period is determined between the time when the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensor and the time when the movement of the movable body in the origin position direction is restricted. When the operable range (for example, play) is set, the origin may be returned and the vehicle may stop at a position further backward from the position detected by the origin detection sensor. Therefore, even if the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensor, the operation control at the time of detection is performed to return the movable body to the more accurate origin position.

In this detection operation control, it is necessary to move the movable body to a position away from the origin position and then return it to the origin position in order to temporarily release the detection state of the detected portion by the origin detection sensor. Since it is not necessary to move the movable body, the movable body is moved from the origin position to the detection operating position near the origin position, and then returned to the origin position. That is, the reciprocating operation is performed at a shorter distance than the actual operation (see FIGS. 18A and 18B).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes the actual operation confirmation operation control after executing the non-detection time operation control or the detection time operation control in the second initialization process. The operation control for confirming the actual operation is the same as the actual operation actually performed by the movable body in various effects and the like.

Next, the control speeds set when the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control are compared. The speeds shown in FIGS. 42 (A), 42 (B), and 42 (C) are control speeds set by the effect control CPU 120 to operate each movable body, and are actual movements of the movable body. It is different from the operating speed of. That is, for example, when operating a predetermined movable body, even if the same control speed is set for one moving section and another moving section between the origin position and the effect position, one moving section and another The movable body was actually operated when the mode was different between the moving sections (for example, a section with and without a spring, a straight section and a curved section), and when the same moving section was raised and lowered. The operating speed in the case may differ from the control speed. Even if the same control speed is set for the movable body, if there are differences in the size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, driving mechanism, etc. of each movable body, the actual operating speed of each movable body is not always the same. Not the same. When operating multiple movable bodies with stepping motors of the same performance, even if the same control speed is set for each movable body, the size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, driving mechanism, etc. of each movable body, etc. If there is a difference, the actual operating speeds of each movable body will not necessarily be the same.

As shown in FIG. 42 (A), when the effect control CPU 120 executes the actual operation check operation control, the set actual operation check process data corresponds to the timer count value of the actual operation check process timer. Operate the accessory to be confirmed based on the set control speed. Specifically, control is performed so that after accelerating from the origin position, the vehicle decelerates and stops at the effect position, and after accelerating from the effect position, the vehicle decelerates and stops at the origin position. That is, in the actual operation confirmation operation control for confirming that each movable body can operate normally, the control speed of the movable body is changed in the order of low speed → high speed → low speed between the origin position and the effect position. Let me. That is, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the movable body effect of each movable body, the range is the range between the minimum speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed which is faster than the minimum speed. Since each movable body is controlled to operate at the speed within, even when the operation control for actual operation confirmation is executed, the minimum speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the second speed which is faster than the minimum speed are set. Control each movable body to operate at a speed within the range of the maximum speed (high speed) of.

That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are the actual operating speeds of the movable body, and the control speed is set so as to be the minimum speed or the maximum speed as the operating speed. Will be. In the following, it is assumed that when the movable body is operated based on the minimum control speed, it operates at the minimum speed, and when the movable body is operated based on the maximum control speed, it operates at the maximum speed. do.

Here, the control speed is set so that the operation speed during acceleration and deceleration of the movable body becomes the minimum speed in the operation control for confirming the actual operation. In addition, when returning to the origin position after moving to the effect position, the movable body is ensured by controlling so as to be the lowest speed in the operation control for actual operation check for a longer time than when stopping at the effect position. After decelerating to, the origin detection sensor detects the detected part.

As shown in FIG. 42B, when executing the operation control at the time of detection, the effect control CPU 120 always confirms the actual operation during the period of moving from the origin position to the effect position and the period of moving from the effect position to the origin position. The movable body is controlled to operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the operation control. That is, the effect control CPU 120 has a speed in which the maximum speed in the detection operation control as the first operation control is equal to or less than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (in the present embodiment, the actual operation). The moving body is always controlled to operate based on the lowest minimum control speed set in the actual operation confirmation operation control so as to be the same as the minimum speed in the confirmation operation control).

Further, in the case of the motion control at the time of detection, the motion distance of the movable body is shorter than that of the motion control for the actual motion check. Check the actual operation because the sensor may not be able to detect the detected part reliably, or the movable body may be damaged by the impact when the movable body returns to the origin position and the movement is restricted from a short distance. Control to operate at the lowest speed in the operation control.

Further, as shown in FIG. 42 (C), when the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection time operation control, the effect control CPU 120 always moves from an arbitrary position between the origin position and the effect position to the origin position. It is controlled to operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. That is, the effect control CPU 120 has a maximum speed (maximum operation speed) in the non-detection operation control as the first operation control, which is equal to or less than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (this implementation). In the form of Control to make it.

In this case, since it is unknown how far the movable body is from the origin position, if the movable body is located near the origin position, the control speed when accelerating in the operation control for actual operation confirmation In other words, when operated at high speed, when the movable body returns to the origin position, the origin detection sensor cannot reliably detect the detected part, or the movable body returns to the origin position from a short distance and movement is restricted. Since there is a risk that the movable body or the like may be damaged due to the impact at that time, the operation is controlled so as to operate at the minimum speed in the operation control for confirming the actual operation.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control as the first operation control, the minimum control speed set in the actual operation confirmation operation control Based on the above, control is performed so that the movable body always operates at a single (constant) operating speed. Since these minimum speeds are the minimum speeds in the actual operation confirmation motion control corresponding to each movable body and are not the operation speeds common to each movable body, the minimum speeds in each movable body may be different.

Specifically, since the movable body 250 and the second effect body 900 are different in size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, and driving mechanism including the driving motor, the movable body is movable even when the same control speed is set. The actual operating speed of is different. Further, even when different control speeds are set for each movable body, the actual operating speeds of the movable bodies are different. In this way, the minimum speed is the operating speed based on the control speed set for each movable body, and in order to control the operation so as to operate at the optimum minimum speed for the movable body, a plurality of movable bodies having different modes can be used. It is possible to reliably detect at the origin position.

(Modification 14)
Next, although not particularly shown, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a shielding member 57L that can shield the left side of the front side of the effect display device 5 invisible to the player, and the right side of the front side of the effect display device 5. A shielding member 57R that can be shielded invisible from the player, a non-shielding position that makes the front side of the effect display device 5 in a non-shielding state that can be seen by the player, and an effect display device 5 A shielding member operating motor 57a for operating the front side of the slingshot in a shielding position that makes it invisible to the player, a left side LED 57b mainly arranged on the shielding member 57L and composed of a plurality of LEDs, mainly It is composed of a right side LED 57c arranged on the shielding member 57R and composed of a plurality of LEDs, a shielding unit control board 57d on which a circuit for driving and controlling the shielding member operating motor 57a, the left side LED 57b, and the right side LED 57c is mounted. The circuit configuration of the shielding unit control board 57d when the shielding unit 57 is provided will be described with reference to FIG. 43.

A shielding unit control board 57d is connected to the effect control board 12, and a shielding member operation motor 57a, a left side LED 57b, and a right side LED 57c are connected to the shielding unit control board 57d. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 transmits a control signal for controlling the excitation mode of the shield member operation motor 57a and the lighting mode of the left LED 57b and the right LED 57c to the shield unit control board 57d. By doing so, the shielding member operation motor 57a, the left side LED 57b, and the right side LED 57c can be operated in a predetermined mode according to the control signal via the shielding unit control board 57d.

The control signal transmitted by the effect control CPU 120 to the shielding unit control board 57d includes a serial control signal 1 for controlling the lighting mode of the left LED 57b and the right LED 57c (for example, the LED drive serial signal of the above embodiment (for example, the LED drive serial signal of the above embodiment). ASIBADT), etc.), serial control signal 2 for controlling the excitation mode of the shielding member operating motor 57a (for example, corresponding to the motor driving serial signal (S1TXD), etc. of the above embodiment), serial control signal 1 The clock signal 1 for transmitting the serial control signal 1 (for example, corresponding to the LED drive serial signal (ASIBACLK) of the above embodiment) and the clock signal 2 for transmitting the serial control signal 2 (for example, the motor drive of the above embodiment). A signal line for transmitting each signal from the effect control board 12 is connected to the shielding unit control board 57d via a connector. Further, these serial control signals and clock signals are transmitted from the effect control board 12 to the shield unit control board 57d by the voltage supplied on the effect control board 12 side, and are shielded as described later. Regardless of whether or not the power supply VCS is connected to the unit control board 57d, a voltage corresponding to the output state of the signal from the effect control board 12 is supplied to the signal line of the serial control signal and the signal line of the clock signal. Will be done.

Further, power is supplied to the shielding unit control board 57d from the power supply board via a plurality of power supply lines, and each circuit or the like mounted on the shielding unit control board 57d is connected to the power supply line. Power supply line to supply the power supply VCS (5V) to be operated (hereinafter, may be referred to as power supply line VCS), power supply VDC (12V) used to operate the shielding member operation motor 57a, left side LED 57b, right side LED 57c, etc. Power supply line (hereinafter, may be referred to as power supply line VDL), power supply line of power supply VSL used for other circuits, electronic components, etc. (not shown) (hereinafter, may be referred to as power supply line VSL). Is included, and a power supply line for supplying each power source is connected to the shielding unit control board 57d via a connector.

Of the power supply lines that supply power to the shielding unit control board 57d, the power supply line VCS is branched into two power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2 before being connected to the shielding unit control board 57d, and is connected to the shielding unit control board 57d. It is supposed to be done.

In this modification, although the description of the ground is omitted in the block diagram of the shielding unit control board 57d, the ground is appropriately grounded.

As shown in FIG. 43, the shielding unit control board 57d is equipped with a connector 57e to which the signal line of the control signal transmitted from the effect control CPU 120 and the power supply line of the power supply are connected. The connector 57e includes a plurality of terminals, and the signal line of the serial control signal 1, the signal line of the serial control signal 2, the signal line of the clock signal 1, and the signal line of the clock signal 2 are connected to the terminal group on one end side, respectively. The power supply line VCS1, the power supply line VCS2, the power supply line VDC, and the power supply line VSL are connected to the terminal group on the other end side, respectively.

Further, each power supply line is connected to each terminal of the terminal group to which the power supply line of the connector 57e is connected in the order of power supply lines VCS1, VSL, VDC, and VCS2 in order from the terminal on the signal line side of the connector 57e. The power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2 are connected to both ends of the terminal group of the power supply line. That is, the power supply line VCS1 is connected to the terminal on one end side of the terminal group of the power supply line of the connector 57e, while the power supply line VCS2 is connected to the power supply line VCS2 of the terminal group of the power supply line of the connector 57e. It is designed to be connected to the terminal on one end side opposite to the terminal.

The power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2 connected to the different terminals of the connector 57e are connected on the shielding unit control board 57d, integrated into the power supply line VCS, and then various circuits and elements on the shielding unit control board 57d, for example, It is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2 and the pull-up resistors 1 and 2 described later. Further, a light emitting diode 57f is connected to the integrated power supply line VCS so that a current flows from the connector 57e side to various circuits and the like side. The light emitting diode 57f emits light when at least one of the power supply line VCS1 or the power supply line VCC2 is connected to the connector 57e and the power supply VCS is supplied to various circuits on the shielding unit control board 57d, while the connector 57e emits light. Neither the power supply line VCC1 nor the power supply line VCC2 is connected to the power supply line VCC1 and does not emit light when the power supply VCS is not supplied to various circuits on the shielding unit control board 57d. It is possible to visually recognize whether or not the power supply VCC is supplied to the shielding unit control board 57d based on the light emitting state.

On the shielding unit control board 57d, the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 received via the connector 57e are used to control the lighting mode of the parallel control signal 1 and the right LED 57c for controlling the lighting mode of the left LED 57b. A serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that converts to a parallel control signal 2, an LED drive circuit 1 that outputs a drive signal 1 that drives the left LED 57b based on the parallel control signal 1, and a drive that drives the right LED 57c based on the parallel control signal 2. The serial control signal 2 received via the LED drive circuit 2 that outputs the signal 2 and the connector 57e is converted into parallel control signals 3 to 6 for controlling the excitation mode of each excitation phase of the shielding member operation motor 57a. Motor drive circuit 1 that outputs excitation signals 1 to 4 for exciting each excitation phase of the shielding member operating motor 57a based on the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 and parallel control signals 3 to 6 to drive the shielding member operating motor 57a. ~ 4, for pulling up the signal line to a predetermined voltage (voltage of power supply VCS (5V) or less) so that the High signal and Low signal in each signal line of the parallel control signals 1 to 6 can be accurately transmitted. Equipped with various circuits and elements including noise removal circuits 1 and 2 for releasing and removing electrical noise due to static electricity, etc. that enters from the outside of the circuit via pull-up resistors 1 and 2, connector 57e, etc. to the power supply side. Has been done.

In the shielding unit control board 57d, among the signal lines of the control signals connected via the connector 57e, the signal line of the serial control signal 1 and the signal line of the clock signal 1 are connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1. Further, the signal line of the parallel control signal 1 output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 is connected to the LED drive circuit 1. Then, the signal line of the drive signal 1 output from the LED drive circuit 1 is connected to the left side LED 57b. Further, the signal line of the parallel control signal 2 output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 is connected to the LED drive circuit 2, and the signal line of the drive signal 2 output from the LED drive circuit 2 is connected to the right LED 57c. Be connected.

Further, in the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1, each signal line of the serial control signal 1, the clock signal 1, the parallel control signal 1, and the parallel control signal 2 is connected, and the power supply line VCS is connected, so that the power supply VCS is connected. When supplied, the function can be normally exerted, the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 are converted into the parallel control signal 1 and the parallel control signal 2, and these parallel control signals 1 and 2 are converted into LEDs. It is possible to output to the drive circuits 1 and 2. When the power supply VCS is not supplied, the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 does not operate and is in a stopped state, and the parallel control signal 1 and the parallel control signal 2 cannot be output.

Further, the left side LED 57b is connected to the signal line of the drive signal 1 output from the LED drive circuit 1 and is connected to the power supply VDC, and the drive signal 1 to light the left side LED 57b is input. , The left side LED 57b is turned on by using the power supply VDC. Further, the signal line of the drive signal 2 output from the LED drive circuit 2 is connected to the right LED 57c, and the power supply VDC is connected, so that the drive signal 2 for lighting the right LED 57c is input. Then, the right side LED 57c is turned on by using the power supply VDC.

Further, the signal line of the parallel control signal 1 and the signal line of the parallel control signal 2 are connected to the power supply line VCS via the pull-up resistor 1. As a result, when the power supply VCS is supplied, each signal line of the parallel control signal 1 and the parallel control signal 2 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage.

Further, the signal line of the serial control signal 1 and the signal line of the clock signal 1 are connected to the power supply line VCS via the noise reduction circuit 1. The noise reduction circuit 1 is composed of a plurality of diodes, and the diodes are connected so that a current can flow from the signal line side of the serial control signal 1 and the signal line side of the clock signal 1 toward the power supply line VCS side. ing. When the power supply VCS is normally supplied to the shielding unit control board 57d, in the noise reduction circuit 1, the voltage of the signal line of the serial control signal 1 and the signal line of the clock signal 1 is higher than the voltage on the power supply line VCS side. When such noise occurs, a current flows from the signal line of the serial control signal 1 and the signal line of the clock signal 1 to the power supply line VCS side, so that the signal line of the serial control signal 1 and the signal line of the clock signal 1 become. The generated noise is emitted to the power supply CRC side and removed.

In the shielding unit control board 57d, among the signal lines of the control signals connected via the connector 57e, the signal line of the serial control signal 2 and the signal line of the clock signal 2 are connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2. Further, the signal line of the parallel control signal 3 output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 is connected to the motor drive circuit 1, and the signal line of the parallel control signal 4 output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 is a motor. The signal line of the parallel control signal 5 connected to the drive circuit 2 and output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 is a signal of the parallel control signal 6 connected to the motor drive circuit 3 and output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2. The wire is connected to the motor drive circuit 4. The signal line of the excitation signal 1 output from the motor drive circuit 1 is connected to the first phase of the excitation phase of the shielding member operating motor 57a, and the signal line of the excitation signal 2 output from the motor drive circuit 2 is The signal line of the excitation signal 3 connected to the second phase of the exciting phase of the shielding member operating motor 57a and output from the motor drive circuit 3 is connected to the third phase of the exciting phase of the shielding member operating motor 57a to drive the motor. The signal line of the excitation signal 4 output from the circuit 4 is connected to the fourth phase of the excitation phase of the shielding member operating motor 57a.

Further, in the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2, each signal line of the serial control signal 2, the clock signal 2, and the parallel control signals 3 to 6 is connected, and the power supply line VCS is connected, so that the power supply VCS is supplied. If so, the function can be normally exerted, the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are converted into parallel control signals 3 to 6, and these parallel control signals 3 to 6 are referred to the motor drive circuits 1 to 4. Can be output. When the power supply VCS is not supplied, the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 does not operate and is in a stopped state, and the parallel control signals 3 to 6 cannot be output.

Further, the signal lines of the excitation signals 1 to 4 are connected to each of the excitation phases of the first phase to the fourth phase of the shielding member operation motor 57a, and the power supply VDC is connected to each excitation phase. By inputting the excitation signals 1 to 4 to the effect that the excitation is performed, the corresponding excitation phase is excited by using the power supply VDC. The excitation phases of the first phase to the fourth phase are arranged in a predetermined order (for example, along the rotation direction of the shielding member operating motor 57a, the fourth phase, the first phase, and the first phase by the signal lines of the excitation signals 1 to 4. , Phase 1 and Phase 2, Phase 2, Phase 2 and Phase 3, Phase 3, Phase 3 and Phase 4, Phase 4, Phase 4, Phase 1, ..., etc. ), The shielding member operating motor 57a is driven in a predetermined mode.

When the excitation signals 1 to 4 are input so as to excite all the exciting phases (first to fourth phases) at the same timing, the shielding member operating motor 57a is excited in all phases. As a result, the current is maintained in a stopped state without rotating, but the current continues to flow from the power supply VDC to each exciting phase during the period in which the signal is input.

Further, each signal line of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 is connected to the power supply line VCS via the pull-up resistor 2. As a result, when the power supply VCS is supplied, each signal line of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage in the same manner as the parallel control signals 1 and 2 described above.

Further, the signal line of the serial control signal 2 and the signal line of the clock signal 2 are connected to the power supply line VCS via the noise reduction circuit 2. The noise removing circuit 2 has the same configuration as the noise removing circuit 1 described above, and when the power supply VCS is normally supplied to the shielding unit control board 57d, the noise removing circuit 2 has a signal line of the serial control signal 2. And when noise occurs such that the voltage of the signal line of the clock signal 2 becomes higher than the voltage of the power supply line VCS side, a current flows from the signal line of the serial control signal 2 and the signal line of the clock signal 2 to the power supply line VCS side. By flowing, noise generated in the signal line of the serial control signal 2 and the signal line of the clock signal 2 is emitted to the power supply VCS side and removed.

As described above, in the shielding unit control board 57d of the present modification, the power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2 branched from the power supply line VCS before being connected to the shielding unit control board 57d are connected to different terminals in the connector 57e, respectively. ing. That is, the power supply line VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 and the like is connected to the shielding unit control board 57d using two wirings and two terminals of the connector 57e.

The connector 57e includes a plurality of terminals, a signal line such as a serial control signal 1 is connected to a terminal group on one end side, and a power supply line such as a power supply line VCS1 or VCS2 is connected to a terminal group on the other end side. The power supply line VCS1 is connected to the terminal on one end side of the terminal group to which the power supply line is connected, and the power supply line VCS2 is connected to the terminal on the other end side.

The power supply lines VCS1 and 2 connected via the connector 57e are integrated into the power supply line VCS on the shielding unit control board 57d, and the light emitting diode 57f is connected to the integrated power supply line VCS to control the shielding unit. When the power supply VCS is supplied to the substrate 57d and a current flows from the connector 57e side to each circuit side such as the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1, the light emitting diode 57f emits light to indicate that the power supply VCS is supplied. Can be recognized.

In the shielding unit control board 57d, the power supply line VCS connected via the connector 57e is connected to each circuit or element such as serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2, noise elimination circuits 1 and 2, and pull-up resistors 1 and 2. By supplying a predetermined power supply (5V) by the power supply line VCS, the circuits such as the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 are in a state where they can normally function, and the shielding unit control board 57d from the effect control CPU 120. Based on the serial control signals 1 and 2 output to the above, the shielding member operating motor 57a, the left side LED 57b, and the right side LED 57c connected to the shielding unit control board 57d can be operated.

The noise reduction circuit 1 of the shielding unit control board 57d is connected to the signal lines of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 and the wiring of the power supply VCS, and the signal of the control signal is connected via the noise removal circuit 1. The wire is connected to the wiring of the power supply VCS. Further, the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 are input to each signal line at the voltage supplied from the effect control board 12, and the effect control board is on the control signal side of the noise removal circuit 1. A voltage corresponding to the output state of the signal from 12 is supplied. That is, on the control signal side of the noise reduction circuit 1, when the signal is transmitted by the serial control signal 2, it becomes a predetermined High voltage, and when the signal is not transmitted, it becomes a predetermined Low voltage. With the voltage changing to and the serial control signal 2, a voltage changing within a predetermined High voltage and a predetermined Low voltage range is applied in a predetermined cycle regardless of whether or not the signal is transmitted. .. When the power supply VCS is not normally supplied to the noise reduction circuit 1, the voltage applied to the noise removal circuit 1 due to the input of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 is a capacitance component in the noise removal circuit 1. By leveling with the noise component and the inductance component, the voltage is output to the wiring side of the power supply VCS of the noise removal circuit 1 at a substantially constant voltage. In such a case, an unintended voltage is applied to each of the parallel control signals 1 and 2 connected to the wiring of the power supply VCS via the pull-up resistor.

Further, the noise elimination circuit 2 of the shielding unit control board 57d is connected to the signal lines of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 and the wiring of the power supply VCS, and the signal of the control signal is connected via the noise elimination circuit 2. The wire is connected to the wiring of the power supply VCS. Further, the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are input to each signal line at the voltage supplied from the effect control board 12, and the effect control board is on the control signal side of the noise removal circuit 2. A voltage corresponding to the output state of the signal from 12 is supplied. That is, on the control signal side of the noise reduction circuit 2, when the signal is transmitted by the serial control signal 2, it becomes a predetermined High voltage, and when the signal is not transmitted, it becomes a predetermined Low voltage. With the voltage changing to and the serial control signal 2, a voltage changing within a predetermined High voltage and a predetermined Low voltage range is applied in a predetermined cycle regardless of whether or not the signal is transmitted. .. When the power supply VCS is not normally supplied to the noise reduction circuit 2, the voltage applied to the noise removal circuit 2 due to the input of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 is a capacitance component in the noise removal circuit 2. By leveling with the noise component and the inductance component, the voltage is output to the wiring side of the power supply VCS of the noise removal circuit 1 at a substantially constant voltage. In such a case, an unintended voltage is applied to each of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 connected to the wiring of the power supply VCS via the pull-up resistor.

Then, the voltage output from the noise removal circuits 1 and 2 to the wiring side of the power supply VCS with the input of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 is a sufficiently high voltage (LED drive circuits 1 and 2 and motor drive circuits 1 and 2). When the parallel control signals 1 to 6 are input in 4 and the voltage is equal to or higher than the threshold voltage of the voltage determined to be ON), the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2 output the parallel control signals 1 to 6. Despite the absence, the voltage output from the noise removal circuits 1 and 2 acts as parallel control signals 1 and 2 to operate the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 so as to light the left LED 57b and the right LED 57c. There is a risk that the motor drive circuits 1 to 4 may be operated so as to act as parallel control signals 3 to 6 to simultaneously excite each exciting phase of the shielding member operating motor 57a. In particular, the clock signals 1 and 2 are signals whose voltage becomes a high voltage in a predetermined cycle, and regardless of whether or not it is the timing to operate the shielding member operation motor 57a, the left side LED 57b, and the right side LED 57c, the effect control board. Since it is a signal that is continuously output from 12 to the shielding unit control board 57d, the LED drive circuit 1 There is a possibility that drive signals 1 and 2 may be output from 2 or excitation signals 1 to 4 may be output from motor drive circuits 1 to 4. That is, if the power supply VCS is not normally supplied to the shielding unit control board 57d, the shielding member operating motor 57a, the left side LED 57b, and the right side LED 57c may be unintentionally operated.

Some conventional gaming machines include a conversion circuit that converts a control signal output from a control board into a drive signal, and drive an electric component such as an LED based on the drive signal. In such a configuration, for example, the power supply used for the conversion circuit may be used for a circuit for removing noise of a control signal or a circuit for generating a drive signal. In such a case, the power supply line is disconnected. If the power supply is stopped due to such reasons, the clock signal superimposed on the control signal may be output from the control signal line to the drive signal line via the noise reduction circuit. In such a case, the drive signal is output. Even though it has not been done, the electrical parts will operate.

On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present modification, the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 are converted into the parallel control signal 1. It is input from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that converts to 2 and 2 and outputs to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively, and the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1. LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b in response to the parallel control signal 1 and LED drive that lights the right LED 57c in response to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2. A circuit 2 is provided, and a power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1, and the power supply VCS is a signal line of a serial control signal 1 and a clock signal 1 (No. 1). It is connected to a noise removal circuit 1 for removing noise of 1 signal line) and a pull-up resistor 1 that pulls up the voltage of the signal lines (2nd signal line) of parallel control signals 1 and 2, and the power supply VCS is The configuration is such that the power supply lines are supplied via the two power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2. In such a configuration, the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the first signal line into the parallel control signals 1 and 2 is a serial control signal. In the configuration connected to the noise reduction circuit 1 of the signal line (first signal line) of 1 and the clock signal 1 and the pull-up resistor 1 of the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, the power supply VCS Since the supply via the two power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2 makes it difficult to stop the supply of the power supply VCS, the left side LED 57b and the right side LED 57c operate unintentionally by stopping the supply of the power supply VCS. It can be prevented from being lost.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 into parallel control signals 3 to 6. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that is output to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 and the parallel control signal that is input from the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6. Motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operation motor 57a are provided according to 3 to 6, and a power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2. The power supply VCS includes a noise removing circuit 2 for removing noise from the signal lines (first signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2, and signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6. It is connected to a pull-up resistor 2 that pulls up the voltage of the above, and the power supply VCS is supplied via two power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2. In such a configuration, the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the first signal line into the parallel control signals 3 to 6 is a serial control signal. In the configuration connected to the noise removal circuit 2 of the clock signal 2 and the clock signal 2 (first signal line) and the pull-up resistor 2 of the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6, there are two power supply VCSs. By being supplied via the power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2, it becomes difficult to stop the supply of the power supply VCS. Therefore, when the supply of the power supply VCS is stopped, the shielding member operation motor 57a operates unintentionally. Can be prevented.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 that is input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b according to the above, and the LED drive circuit 3 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2. In addition, the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal line (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are converted into parallel control signals 3 to 6, and the parallel control signals 3 to 3 are provided. According to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 output to the signal line (4th signal line) of 6 and the parallel control signals 3 to 6 input from the signal lines (4th signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6. Motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operation motor 57a are provided, and a power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2, and the power supply VCS is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2. , Pull up the voltage of the noise removal circuit 2 for removing the noise of the signal line (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 and the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2. It is connected to the pull-up resistor 1 and is supplied via two power supply lines, VCS1 and VCS2. In such a configuration, the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the first signal line into the parallel control signals 3 to 6 is a serial control signal. In the configuration connected to the noise removal circuit 2 of the clock signal 2 and the clock signal 2 (third signal line) and the pull-up resistor 1 of the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, there are two power supply VCSs. Since the supply via the power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2 makes it difficult to stop the supply of the power supply VCS, the left side LED 57b and the right side LED 57c operate unintentionally due to the power supply VCS stoppage. Can be prevented.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 that is input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b according to the above, and the LED drive circuit 3 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2. In addition, the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal lines (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are combined with the signal lines of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 (first signal line). ), The serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 are converted into parallel control signals 1 and 2, and output to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b in response to the parallel control signal 1 input from the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, and the signal line of the parallel control signal 2 (second signal line). It is provided with an LED drive circuit 3 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line), and is input from the signal lines (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2. A serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 into parallel control signals 3 to 6 and outputs them to the signal line (fourth signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6, and a parallel control signal. A serial / parallel conversion circuit including motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operation motor 57a in response to parallel control signals 3 to 6 input from the signal lines 3 to 6 (fourth signal line). A power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to 1 and 2, and the power supply VCS removes noise from the signal lines (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1. It is connected to the noise removal circuit 1 and the pull-up resistor 2 that pulls up the voltage of the signal lines (fourth signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6, and the power supply VCS connects the two power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2. It is a configuration that is supplied via. In such a configuration, the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the first signal line into the parallel control signals 1 and 2 is a serial control signal. In the configuration connected to the noise reduction circuit 1 of 1 and the clock signal 1 (1st signal line) and the pull-up resistor 2 of the signal lines (4th signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6, there are two power supply VCSs. By being supplied via the power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2, it becomes difficult to stop the supply of the power supply VCS. Therefore, when the supply of the power supply VCS is stopped, the shielding member operation motor 57a operates unintentionally. Can be prevented.

In this modification, a serial / parallel conversion circuit that converts a serial control signal and a clock signal into a parallel control signal and outputs the signal, and an electric component (shielding member operating motor 57a, left LED 57b, right side) according to the parallel control signal. Although the configuration includes a drive circuit for driving the LED 57c), an electrical component other than the shielding member operating motor 57a, the left LED 57b, and the right LED 57c, for example, a vibration motor, may be applied as the electric component for driving the drive circuit.

Further, in this modification, in the shielding unit control board 57d, the power supply VCS is supplied via the two power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2, but the power supply VCS is supplied via a plurality of power supply lines of three or more. The configuration may be supplied.

Further, in this modification, the shielding unit control equipped with the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2 that convert the serial control signal and the clock signal transmitted by the effect control CPU 120 into a parallel control signal for operating a predetermined electric component. The board 57d is configured to supply the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2 via the two power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2, and the serial control signal and the clock signal transmitted by the CPU 103. In a control board equipped with a serial / parallel conversion circuit that converts Even in the configuration, since the power supply VCS is supplied through a plurality of power supply lines, it is difficult to stop the supply of the power supply VCS. Therefore, when the power supply VCS is stopped, the predetermined electric components operate unintentionally. It can be prevented from doing so.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modified example has a configuration in which a power supply VCS is supplied to a shielding unit control board 57d on which circuits such as a serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 and motor drive circuits 1 to 4 are mounted via a connector 57e. At the same time, the power supply line of the power supply VCS is branched into the power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2 before being connected to the shielding unit control board 57d, and one end side of the plurality of terminals to which the power supply including the power supply VCS is supplied at the connector 57e. By connecting the power supply line VCS1 to the terminal of the connector and connecting the power supply line VCS2 to the terminal on the other end side, the terminal on one end side and the terminal on the other end side among the plurality of terminals to which power is supplied in the connector 57e. Is the configuration used to supply the power supply VCS. In such a configuration, it is difficult to stop the supply of the power supply VCS even if the predetermined connector connected to the connector 57e is about to come off.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 that is input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b according to the above, and the LED drive circuit 2 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2. A power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1, and the power supply VCS is a signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1. It is connected to a noise removal circuit 1 for removing noise and a pull-up resistor 1 that pulls up the voltage of the signal lines (second signal lines) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2. By connecting the light emitting diode 57f, it is possible to confirm whether or not the power supply VCS is supplied. In such a configuration, the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 is connected to the noise reduction circuit 1 of the first signal line and the pull-up resistor 1 of the second signal line. Since it is possible to confirm the presence or absence of supply and to recognize that the supply of the power supply VCS has stopped, it is possible to prevent the left side LED 57b and the right side LED 57c from operating unintentionally.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 into parallel control signals 3 to 6. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that is output to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 and the parallel control signal that is input from the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6. Motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operation motor 57a are provided according to 3 to 6, and a power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2. The power supply VCS includes a noise removing circuit 2 for removing noise from the signal lines (first signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2, and signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6. It is connected to a pull-up resistor 2 that pulls up the voltage of the power supply, and a light emitting diode 57f is connected to the power supply line of the power supply VCS, so that it is possible to confirm whether or not the power supply VCS is supplied. In such a configuration, the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 is connected to the noise reduction circuit 2 of the first signal line and the pull-up resistor 2 of the second signal line. Since it is possible to confirm the presence or absence of supply and to recognize that the supply of the power supply VCS has stopped, it is possible to prevent the shielding member operation motor 57a from operating unintentionally.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 that is input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b according to the above, and the LED drive circuit 3 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2. In addition, the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal line (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are converted into parallel control signals 3 to 6, and the parallel control signals 3 to 3 are provided. According to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 output to the signal line (4th signal line) of 6 and the parallel control signals 3 to 6 input from the signal lines (4th signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6. Motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operation motor 57a are provided, and a power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2, and the power supply VCS is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2. , Pull up the voltage of the noise removal circuit 2 for removing the noise of the signal line (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 and the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2. It is connected to the pull-up resistor 1 to be connected, and the light emitting diode 57f is connected to the power supply line of the power supply VCS, so that it is possible to confirm whether or not the power supply VCS is supplied. In such a configuration, the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the third signal line into the parallel control signals 3 to 6 is a serial control signal. In the configuration connected to the noise reduction circuit 2 of the signal line (third signal line) of the clock signal 2 and the pull-up resistor 1 of the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, the power supply VCS Since the light emitting diode 57f is connected to the power supply line, it is possible to confirm whether or not the power supply VCS is supplied and to recognize that the power supply VCS supply has stopped. Therefore, the left LED 57b and the right LED 57c are intended. It is possible to prevent it from operating without.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 that is input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b according to the above, and the LED drive circuit 3 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2. In addition, the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal lines (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are combined with the signal lines of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 (first signal line). A serial / parallel conversion circuit that converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from) into parallel control signals 1 and 2 and outputs them to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b in response to the parallel control signal 1 input from the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, and the signal line of the parallel control signal 2 (second signal line). It is provided with an LED drive circuit 3 that lights the right LED 57c in response to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line), and is input from the signal lines (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2. A serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 into parallel control signals 3 to 6 and outputs them to the signal line (fourth signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6, and a parallel control signal. A serial / parallel conversion circuit including motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operation motor 57a in response to parallel control signals 3 to 6 input from the signal lines 3 to 6 (fourth signal line). A power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to 1 and 2, and the power supply VCS removes noise from the signal lines (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1. It is connected to the noise removal circuit 1 and the pull-up resistor 2 that pulls up the voltage of the signal lines (fourth signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6, and the light emitting diode 57f is connected to the power supply line of the power supply VCS. This is a configuration in which it is possible to confirm whether or not the power supply VCS is supplied. In such a configuration, the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the first signal line into the parallel control signals 1 and 2 is a serial control signal. In the configuration connected to the noise removal circuit 1 of 1 and the clock signal 1 (1st signal line) and the pull-up resistor 2 of the signal lines (4th signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6, the power supply line of the power supply VCS By connecting the light emitting diode 57f, it is possible to confirm whether or not the power supply VCS is supplied, and it is possible to recognize that the power supply VCS supply has stopped. Therefore, the shielding member operation motor 57a operates unintentionally. It can be prevented from doing so.

In this modification, in the shielding unit control board 57d, the power supply VCS is supplied via the two power supply lines VCC1 and VCS2, and the light emitting diode 57f is connected to the power supply line of the power supply VCS. However, in the configuration in which the power supply VCS is supplied to the shielding unit control board 57d via one power supply line, the light emitting diode 57f may be connected to the power supply line of the power supply VCS. Even in such a configuration, since the light emitting diode 57f is connected to the power supply line of the power supply VCC, it is possible to confirm whether or not the power supply VCC is supplied and to recognize that the power supply VCC supply has stopped. It is possible to prevent the shielding member operation motor 57a, the left side LED 57b, and the right side LED 57c from operating unintentionally.

Further, in the modification, the embodiment in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of the gaming machine is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is another example of the gaming machine. , Slot machines where the number of bets is set using medals and credits as the value for games, slot machines where the number of bets is set using game balls as the value for games, and bets using only credits as the value for games It may be applied to a fully credited slot machine that sets the number. When using a game ball as a game value, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls, and when setting 3 as the bet number in the above modification, 15 game balls are used. Corresponds to setting the number of bets using.

(Modification 15)
Next, a modification 15 of the pachinko gaming machine to which the present invention is applied will be described. Since the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine of this modification includes the same configuration as that of the above-described modification 14, the differences will be mainly described here.

In the modified example 14, the power supply VCS is supplied via the two power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2 in the shielding unit control board 57d. However, in the modified example 15, as shown in FIG. 44, the shielding unit is supplied. The power supply VCS is supplied to the control board 57d via one power supply line, and the power supply VCS side of the pull-up resistance 1 of the signal lines of the parallel control signals 1 and 2 output by the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 1. On the power supply VCS side of the pull-up resistance 2 of the signal lines of ~ 6, the wraparound prevention circuit 2 that prevents current from flowing from the power supply VCS side to the signal line side of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 is controlled by a shielding unit. The configuration is further provided on the substrate 57d.

As shown in FIG. 44, one end of the wraparound prevention circuit 1 is connected to the signal line of the parallel control signal 1 and the signal line of the parallel control signal 2 via the pull-up resistor 1, and the wraparound prevention circuit 1 is connected to the signal line of the parallel control signal 2. The other end side is connected to the wiring of the power supply line VCS. The turn-around prevention circuit 1 is configured by using a Zener diode or the like, and is connected to the power supply line VCC side and the pull-up resistor via the Zener diode or the like so that no current flows from the power supply line VCC side to the pull-up resistor 1 side. One side is connected. In the turn-around prevention circuit 1, it is determined that the voltage on the wiring side of the power supply line VCS is in the ON state in which the parallel control signals 1 to 6 are input in the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 and the motor drive circuits 1 to 4. When the voltage exceeds the voltage threshold, that is, when the voltage is a predetermined voltage (voltage of the power supply VCS (5V)), the voltage of the power supply VCS is applied to the pull-up resistor 1 side, while the voltage of the power supply line VCS is applied to the wiring side. When the voltage is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold (voltage threshold for determining the ON state in which parallel control signals 1 to 6 are input in the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 and the motor drive circuits 1 to 4), for example, the power supply line VCS. When the power supply VCS is not normally supplied to the wiring side and the voltage associated with the input of the serial control signals 1 and 2 and the clock signals 1 and 2 is output from the noise elimination circuits 1 and 2, the voltage is applied. It is designed so that it is not applied to the pull-up resistor 1 side.

Further, one end side of the turn-around prevention circuit 2 is connected to each signal line of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 via a pull-up resistor 2, and the other end side of the turn-around prevention circuit 2 is connected to a power supply line VCS. There is. The turn-around prevention circuit 2 has the same configuration as the turn-around prevention circuit 1, and is configured by using a Zener diode or the like. When a power supply VCS is not supplied, a current flows from the power supply line VCC side to the pull-up resistor 2 side. The power supply line VCC side and the pull-up resistor 2 side are connected via a Zener diode or the like so that the current does not flow. In the turn-around prevention circuit 2, similarly to the turn-around prevention circuit 1, the voltage on the wiring side of the power supply line VCC is set to a predetermined threshold value (parallel control signals 1 to 6 are set in the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 and the motor drive circuits 1 to 4). When the voltage exceeding the input voltage threshold for determining the ON state), that is, when the voltage is a predetermined voltage (voltage of the power supply VCS (5V)), the voltage of the power supply VCS is applied to the pull-up resistor 2 side. Then, the voltage on the wiring side of the power supply line VCS is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold (voltage threshold for determining the ON state in which parallel control signals 1 to 6 are input in the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 and the motor drive circuits 1 to 4). In the case of, for example, the power supply VCS is not normally supplied to the wiring side of the power supply line VCS, and the voltage accompanying the input of the serial control signals 1 and 2 and the clock signals 1 and 2 is output from the noise removal circuits 1 and 2. In such a case, the voltage is not applied to the pull-up resistor 2 side.

As described above, in the shielding unit control board 57d of the present modification, the pull-up resistor 1 and the power supply line VCS are connected via the turn-around prevention circuit 1, so that the power supply VCS is not supplied. The current discharged from the noise reduction circuits 1 and 2 to the power supply line VCS side flows around the pull-up resistor 1 side, that is, the signal line of the parallel control signal 1 and the signal line of the parallel control signal 2 from the power supply line VCS side. The voltage associated with the inputs of the serial control signals 1 and 2 and the clock signals 1 and 2 is the voltage output from the noise removal circuits 1 and 2, and the voltage is the signal line and parallel control signal of the parallel control signal 1 on the pull-up resistor 1 side. It is designed to prevent it from being applied to the signal line of 2.

Further, in the shielding unit control board 57d of this modification, the pull-up resistor 2 and the power supply line VCS are connected via the turn-around prevention circuit 2 to remove the above-mentioned noise when the power supply VCS is not supplied. The current discharged from the circuits 1 and 2 to the power supply line VCS side wraps around from the power supply line VCS side to the pull-up resistor 2 side, that is, the signal lines of the parallel control signals 3 to 6, and the serial control signal 1, Prevents the voltage associated with the input of 2 and the clock signals 1 and 2 from being applied to the signal lines of the parallel control signals 3 to 4 on the pull-up resistor 2 side by the voltage output from the noise reduction circuits 1 and 2. It has become like.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 that is input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b according to the above, and the LED drive circuit 2 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2. A power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1, and the power supply VCS is a signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1. It is connected to the noise removal circuit 1 for removing noise and the pull-up resistor 1 that pulls up the voltage of the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, and is connected to the noise removal circuit 1 to the second signal. It is configured to include a turn-around prevention circuit 1 capable of preventing a current from flowing to the wire. In such a configuration, in a configuration in which the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 is connected to the noise removing circuit 1 of the first signal line and the pull-up resistor 1 of the second signal line, the noise removing circuit It is equipped with a turn-around prevention circuit 1 that can prevent current from flowing from the 1st to the 2nd signal line, and even if the supply of the power supply VCS is stopped, the current may flow from the noise removal circuit 1 to the 2nd signal line. Since this is prevented, current does not flow into the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 connected to the second signal line, and it is possible to prevent the left LED 57b and the right LED 57c from operating unintentionally.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 into parallel control signals 3 to 6. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 and the parallel control signal input from the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 Motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operation motor 57a are provided according to 3 to 6, and a power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2. The power supply VCS includes a noise removing circuit 2 for removing noise from the signal lines (first signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2, and signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6. It is connected to a pull-up resistor 2 that pulls up the voltage of In such a configuration, in a configuration in which the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 is connected to the noise removing circuit 2 of the first signal line and the pull-up resistor 2 of the second signal line, the noise removing circuit It is equipped with a turn-around prevention circuit 2 that can prevent current from flowing from 2 to the second signal line, and even if the supply of the power supply VCS is stopped, current may flow from the noise elimination circuit 2 to the second signal line. Since this is prevented, current does not flow into the motor drive circuits 1 to 4 connected to the second signal line, and it is possible to prevent the shielding member operating motor 57a from operating unintentionally.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 that is input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b according to the above, and the LED drive circuit 3 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2. In addition, the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal line (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are converted into parallel control signals 3 to 6, and the parallel control signals 3 to 3 are provided. According to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 output to the signal line (4th signal line) of 6 and the parallel control signals 3 to 6 input from the signal lines (4th signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6. Motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operation motor 57a are provided, and a power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2, and the power supply VCS is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2. , Pull up the voltage of the noise removal circuit 2 for removing the noise of the signal line (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 and the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2. It is configured to include a turn-around prevention circuit 1 which is connected to a pull-up resistor 1 and can prevent a current from flowing from the noise removing circuit 2 to the second signal line. In such a configuration, in a configuration in which the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 is connected to the noise removing circuit 2 of the first signal line and the pull-up resistor 1 of the second signal line, the noise removing circuit A turn-around prevention circuit 1 capable of preventing current from flowing from the second signal line to the second signal line is provided, and even if the supply of the power supply VCS is stopped, the current may flow from the noise elimination circuit 2 to the second signal line. Since this is prevented, current does not flow into the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 connected to the second signal line, and it is possible to prevent the left LED 57b and the right LED 57c from operating unintentionally.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 that is input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b according to the above, and the LED drive circuit 3 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2. In addition, the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal lines (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are combined with the signal lines of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 (first signal line). A serial / parallel conversion circuit that converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from) into parallel control signals 1 and 2 and outputs them to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left side LED 57b in response to the parallel control signal 1 input from the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, and the signal line of the parallel control signal 2 (second signal line). It is provided with an LED drive circuit 3 that lights the right LED 57c in response to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line), and is input from the signal lines (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2. A serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 into parallel control signals 3 to 6 and outputs them to the signal line (fourth signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6, and a parallel control signal. A serial / parallel conversion circuit including motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving a shielding member operation motor 57a in response to parallel control signals 3 to 6 input from signal lines 3 to 6 (fourth signal line). A power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to 1 and 2, and the power supply VCS removes noise from the signal lines (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1. It is connected to the noise elimination circuit 1 and the pull-up resistor 2 that pulls up the voltage of the signal lines (fourth signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6, and the current flows from the noise elimination circuit 1 to the fourth signal line. The configuration is provided with a turn-around prevention circuit 2 capable of preventing the above-mentioned. In such a configuration, in a configuration in which the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 is connected to the noise removing circuit 1 of the first signal line and the pull-up resistor 2 of the fourth signal line, the noise removing circuit It is equipped with a turn-around prevention circuit 2 that can prevent current from flowing from the 1st to the 4th signal line, and even if the supply of the power supply VCS is stopped, the current may flow from the noise removal circuit 1 to the 4th signal line. Since this is prevented, current does not flow into the motor drive circuits 1 to 4 connected to the fourth signal line, and it is possible to prevent the shielding member operating motor 57a from operating unintentionally.

In this modification, the turn-around prevention circuits 1 and 2 are configured by using a Zener diode, and by connecting the power supply line VCC side and the signal line side of the parallel control signal via the Zener diode. When the power supply VCS is not supplied, the current flows from the power supply line VCS side to the signal line side of the parallel control signal, and the voltage associated with the input of the serial control signal and the clock signal is output from the noise removal circuits 1 and 2. The configuration is such that the voltage is not applied to the signal lines of the parallel control signals 1 to 6, but an anti-rotation circuit may be configured by using electronic components other than the Zener diode, for example, a transistor or a transistor. When the power supply VCS is not supplied to the power supply line VCS side of the turn-around prevention circuit using a FET, the current flow or voltage from the power supply line VCS side of the turn-around prevention circuit to the signal line side of the parallel control signal It may be configured to block the application.

Further, in this modification, the shielding unit control equipped with the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2 that convert the serial control signal and the clock signal transmitted by the effect control CPU 120 into a parallel control signal for operating a predetermined electric component. The board 57d is provided with a turn-around prevention circuit capable of preventing the current from the noise removal circuit of the signal lines of the serial control signal and the clock signal from flowing into the signal line of the parallel control signal. In a control board equipped with a serial / parallel conversion circuit that converts a control signal and a clock signal into a parallel control signal, the current from the noise elimination circuit of the signal line of the serial control signal and the clock signal input from the CPU 103 is the parallel control signal. A configuration may be provided with a turn-around prevention circuit that can prevent the signal line from flowing into the signal line. Even with such a configuration, even if the supply of the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit or the like is stopped, the noise removal circuit Since it is prevented that a current flows into the signal line of the parallel control signal, it is possible to prevent a predetermined electric component from operating unintentionally.

Although the modified example 15 of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this modified example, and is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configuration as that of the modified example 14 has the same effect as that described in the modified example 14. Further, the modified example illustrated with respect to the modified example 14 can also be applied to the modified example 15.

(Modification 16)
A modified example 16 of the pachinko gaming machine to which the present invention is applied will be described. Since the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine of this modification includes the same configuration as that of the above-described modification 14, the differences will be mainly described here.

In the modified example 14, in the shielding unit control board 57d, the power supply VCS is supplied via the two power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2. However, in the modified example 16, as shown in FIG. 45, the shielding unit is supplied. The power supply VCS is supplied to the control board 57d via one power supply line, and when the power supply VCS is not supplied, the time to prevent the current from flowing into the LED drive circuit 1 from the power supply line VCS side. A shielding unit control board 57d is provided with a penetration prevention circuit 1 and a rotation prevention circuit 2 that prevents current from flowing in from the power supply line VCS side and voltage application to the LED drive circuit 2 when the power supply VCS is not supplied. In addition to the above, a turn-around prevention circuit 3 that prevents current from flowing into the motor drive circuit 1 from the power supply line VCS side when the power supply VCS is not supplied, and a motor when the power supply VCS is not supplied. A turn-around prevention circuit 4 that prevents current from flowing into the drive circuit 2 from the power supply line VCS side, and a turn-around prevention circuit 4 that prevents current from flowing into the motor drive circuit 3 from the power supply line VCS side when the power supply VCS is not supplied. Shielding unit control board with a turn-around prevention circuit 5 and a turn-around prevention circuit 6 that prevents current from flowing in from the power supply line VCS side and voltage application to the motor drive circuit 4 when the power supply VCS is not supplied. It is a configuration further prepared for 57d.

As shown in FIG. 45, the turn-around prevention circuit 1 is arranged on the signal line of the parallel control signal 1, and one end side of the turn-around prevention circuit 1 is connected to the power supply line VCS via a pull-up resistor 1 to turn around. The other end side of the insertion prevention circuit 1 is connected to the LED drive circuit 1 via the signal line. The wraparound prevention circuit 1 is configured by using a Zener diode, and when the power supply VCS is not supplied, the current does not flow from the power supply line VCC side to the LED drive circuit 1 side via the Zener diode. Therefore, the power supply line VCC side and the LED drive circuit 1 side are connected. In the turn-around prevention circuit 1, the voltage of the signal line of the parallel control signal 1 on the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 side is a predetermined threshold value (the voltage at which the LED drive circuit 1 determines that the parallel control signal 1 is input to the ON state). When the threshold value) is exceeded, that is, when the parallel control signal 1 is output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 at a normal voltage, the voltage of the control signal is applied to the LED drive circuit 1 side, and the parallel control signal is signaled. While 1 is transmitted, the voltage of the signal line of the parallel control signal 1 on the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 side is a predetermined threshold value (voltage for determining that the parallel control signal 1 is input to the LED drive circuit 1 in the ON state. In the case of (threshold) or less, for example, the power supply VCS is not normally supplied to the wiring side of the power supply line VCS, the parallel control signal 1 is not normally output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1, and the noise removal circuit is used. When the voltage associated with the input of the serial control signals 1 and 2 and the clock signals 1 and 2 is output from 1 and 2, the voltage is not applied to the LED drive circuit 1 side. ..

The turn-around prevention circuit 2 is arranged on the signal line of the parallel control signal 2, and one end side of the turn-around prevention circuit 2 is connected to the power supply line VCS via a pull-up resistor 1, and the other end of the turn-around prevention circuit 2 is connected. The side is connected to the LED drive circuit 2 via the signal line. The turn-around prevention circuit 2 has the same configuration as the turn-around prevention circuit 1, and is a Zener diode so that a current does not flow from the power supply line VCC side to the LED drive circuit 2 side when the power supply VCS is not supplied. The power supply line VCC side and the LED drive circuit 2 side are connected via the above. In the turn-around prevention circuit 2, similarly to the turn-around prevention circuit 1, when the parallel control signal 2 is output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 at a normal voltage, the voltage of the control signal is the LED drive circuit 1. While the parallel control signal 1 is transmitted to the side, when the power supply VCS is not normally supplied to the wiring side of the power supply line VCS, the noise removal circuits 1 and 2 send the serial control signals 1 and 2 and the clock signal 1 The voltage associated with the inputs of 2 and 2 is not applied to the LED drive circuit 1 side.

The turn-around prevention circuit 3 is arranged on the signal line of the parallel control signal 3, and one end side of the turn-around prevention circuit 3 is connected to the power supply line VCS via a pull-up resistor 2, and the other end of the turn-around prevention circuit 3 is connected. The side is connected to the motor drive circuit 1 via the signal line. The turn-around prevention circuit 3 has the same configuration as the turn-around prevention circuit 1, and is a Zener diode so that a current does not flow from the power supply line VCS side to the motor drive circuit 1 side when the power supply VCS is not supplied. The power supply line VCC side and the motor drive circuit 1 side are connected via the above. In the turn-around prevention circuit 3, similarly to the turn-around prevention circuit 1, when the parallel control signal 3 is output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 at a normal voltage, the voltage of the control signal is the motor drive circuit 1. While the parallel control signal 3 is transmitted to the side, when the power supply VCS is not normally supplied to the wiring side of the power supply line VCS, the noise removal circuits 1 and 2 send the serial control signals 1 and 2 and the clock signal 1 The voltage associated with the inputs of 2 and 2 is not applied to the motor drive circuit 1 side. Hereinafter, the wraparound prevention circuits 4 to 6 are the same as those of the wraparound prevention circuit 3.

The turn-around prevention circuits 4 to 6 are arranged on each signal line of the parallel control signals 4 to 6, and one end side of the turn-around prevention circuits 4 to 6 is connected to the power supply line VCS via a pull-up resistor 2 to turn around. The other end side of the insertion prevention circuits 4 to 6 is connected to the motor drive circuits 2 to 4 via the signal line. The turn-around prevention circuits 4 to 6 have the same configuration as the turn-around prevention circuit 1, and when the power supply VCS is not supplied, no current flows from the power supply line VCS side to the motor drive circuits 2 to 4 side. As described above, the power supply line VCS side and the motor drive circuits 2 to 4 are connected via the Zener diode.

As described above, in the shielding unit control board 57d of the present modification, the connection points of the parallel control signals 1 to 6 and the pull-up resistors 1 and 2 are rotated between the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 and the motor drive circuits 1 to 4. By providing the penetration prevention circuits 1 to 6, respectively, when the power supply VCS is not supplied, the current or voltage emitted from the noise removal circuits 1 and 2 described above to the power supply line VCS side is generated by the LED drive circuits 1 and 2. , It is designed to prevent the motor drive circuits 1 to 4 from wrapping around.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 that is input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b according to the above, and the LED drive circuit 2 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2. A power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1, and the power supply VCS is a signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1. It is connected to the noise removal circuit 1 for removing noise and the pull-up resistor 1 that pulls up the voltage of the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, and the current from the noise removal circuit 1 is It is configured to include rotation prevention circuits 1 and 2 capable of preventing flow to the LED drive circuits 1 and 2. In such a configuration, the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the first signal line into the parallel control signals 1 and 2 is a serial control signal. In the configuration connected to the noise removing circuit 1 of the signal line (first signal line) of 1 and the clock signal 1 and the pull-up resistor 1 of the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, the noise removing circuit The turn-around prevention circuits 1 and 2 that can prevent the current from 1 from flowing to the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 are provided, and even if the supply of the power supply VCS is stopped, the noise removal circuit 1 is connected to the LED drive circuits 1 and 2. Since it is possible to prevent the current from flowing in, it is possible to prevent the left side LED 57b and the right side LED 57c from operating unintentionally.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 into parallel control signals 3 to 6. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 and the parallel control signal input from the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 Motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operation motor 57a are provided according to 3 to 6, and a power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2. The power supply VCS includes a noise removing circuit 2 for removing noise from the signal lines (first signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2, and signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6. It is connected to a pull-up resistor 2 that pulls up the voltage of In such a configuration, the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the first signal line into the parallel control signals 3 to 6 is a serial control signal. 2 and the noise removal circuit 2 of the clock signal 2 (first signal line) and the pull-up resistor 2 of the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 are connected to the noise removal circuit 2. It is provided with turn-around prevention circuits 3 to 6 capable of preventing current from flowing to the motor drive circuits 1 to 4, and even if the supply of the power supply VCS is stopped, current flows from the noise removal circuit 2 to the motor drive circuits 1 to 4. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the shielding member operating motor 57a from operating unintentionally.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 that is input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b according to the above, and the LED drive circuit 3 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2. In addition, the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal line (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are converted into parallel control signals 3 to 6, and the parallel control signals 3 to 3 are provided. According to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 output to the signal line (4th signal line) of 6 and the parallel control signals 3 to 6 input from the signal lines (4th signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6. Motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operation motor 57a are provided, and a power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2, and the power supply VCS is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2. , Pull up the voltage of the noise removal circuit 2 for removing the noise of the signal line (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 and the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2. It is connected to the pull-up resistor 1 to prevent the signal from flowing to the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 and is provided with the turn-around prevention circuits 1 and 2. In such a configuration, the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the first signal line into the parallel control signals 3 to 6 is a serial control signal. 2 and the noise removal circuit 2 of the clock signal 2 (third signal line) and the pull-up resistor 1 of the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2 are connected to the noise removal circuit 2. The rotation prevention circuits 1 and 2 that can prevent the current from flowing to the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 are provided, and even if the power supply VCS is stopped, the current flows from the noise removal circuit 2 to the LED drive circuits 1 and 2. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the left side LED 57b and the right side LED 57c from operating unintentionally.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 that is input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b according to the above, and the LED drive circuit 3 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2. In addition, the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal lines (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are combined with the signal lines of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 (first signal line). A serial / parallel conversion circuit that converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from) into parallel control signals 1 and 2 and outputs them to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left side LED 57b in response to the parallel control signal 1 input from the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, and the signal line of the parallel control signal 2 (second signal line). It is provided with an LED drive circuit 3 that lights the right LED 57c in response to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line), and is input from the signal lines (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2. A serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 into parallel control signals 3 to 6 and outputs them to the signal line (fourth signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6, and a parallel control signal. A serial / parallel conversion circuit including motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving a shielding member operation motor 57a in response to parallel control signals 3 to 6 input from signal lines 3 to 6 (fourth signal line). A power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to 1 and 2, and the power supply VCS removes noise from the signal lines (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1. It is connected to the noise elimination circuit 1 and the pull-up resistor 2 that pulls up the voltage of the signal lines (fourth signal lines) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6, and the current from the noise elimination circuit 1 is applied to the motor drive circuits 1 to 1. It is configured to include rotation prevention circuits 3 to 6 capable of preventing the flow to 4. In such a configuration, the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the first signal line into the parallel control signals 1 and 2 is a serial control signal. 1 and the noise removal circuit 1 of the clock signal 1 (first signal line) and the pull-up resistor 2 of the signal lines (fourth signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 are connected to the noise removal circuit 1. It is provided with turn-around prevention circuits 3 to 6 capable of preventing current from flowing to the motor drive circuits 1 to 4, and even if the supply of the power supply VCS is stopped, current flows from the noise elimination circuit 1 to the motor drive circuits 1 to 4. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the shielding member operating motor 57a from operating unintentionally.

In this modification, the turn-around prevention circuits 1 to 6 are configured by using a Zener diode, and when the power supply VCS is not supplied, the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 are viewed from the signal line side of the parallel control signal. Although the configuration is such that no current flows through the motor drive circuits 1 to 4, an anti-rotation circuit may be configured by using electronic components other than the Zener diode. For example, a transistor or FET may be used. When the power supply VCS is not supplied to the power supply line VCS side of the pull-up resistors 1 and 2, the current flow from the signal line side of the parallel control signal to the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 and the motor drive circuits 1 to 4 side. It may be configured to block.

Further, in this modification, in the shielding unit control board 57d equipped with the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2 for converting the serial control signal and the clock signal transmitted by the effect control CPU 120 into the parallel control signal, the serial control signal and the clock The configuration is provided with a turn-around prevention circuit capable of preventing the current from the noise removing circuits 1 to 6 of the signal line of the signal from flowing into the drive circuit of a predetermined electric component, but the serial control signal and the clock signal transmitted by the CPU 103 are provided. In a control board equipped with a serial / parallel conversion circuit that converts The configuration may be provided with a turn-around prevention circuit capable of preventing the current from being turned around. Is prevented from flowing in, so that it is possible to prevent a predetermined electric component from operating unintentionally.

Although the modified example 16 of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this modified example, and is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configuration as that of the modified example 14 has the same effect as that described in the modified example 14. Further, the modified example illustrated with respect to the modified example 14 can also be applied to the modified example 16.

(Modification 17)
A modified example 17 of the pachinko gaming machine to which the present invention is applied will be described. Since the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine of this modification includes the same configuration as that of the above-described modification 14, the differences will be mainly described here.

In the modification 14, the power supply line including the power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2 (5V) and the power supply line VDC (12V) is connected to the connector 57e of the shielding unit control board 57d, and the shielding unit is controlled via the connector 57e. A power supply VCS for operating various circuits and elements of the substrate 57d is supplied, and a power supply for operating electrical components (shielding member operating motor 57a, left LED 57b, right LED 57c) connected to the shielding unit control substrate 57d. In the present modification 17, the power supply VDC is supplied via the connector 57e, but the power supply VCS is not supplied, and the power supply is supplied to the shielding unit control board 57d from the power supply VDC (12V). It is provided with a step-down circuit that generates a VCS (5V), and is configured to generate a power supply VCS on a shielding unit control board 57d.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46 (A), the shielding unit control board 57d is equipped with a step-down circuit that generates a power supply VCS (5V) from the power supply VDC (12V), and is supplied via the connector 57e. The power supply line of the power supply VDC is branched so that one end is connected to a step-down circuit and the other end is connected to a shielding member operation motor 57a, a left side LED 57b, a right side LED 57c (not shown), and the like. Then, in the step-down circuit, a power supply VCS is generated from the power supply VDC, and the power supply VCS is mounted on the shielding unit control board 57d. It is designed to be supplied to (not shown).

As described above, the shielding unit control board 57d of the present modification is provided with a step-down circuit for generating the power supply VCS from the power supply VDC, and shields the power supply VDC supplied via the connector 57e with the shielding member operation motor 57a. In addition to supplying to the left LED 57b and the right LED 57c, a power supply VCS is generated from the power supply VDC by a step-down circuit and the power supply VCS is supplied to various circuits such as serial / parallel conversion boards 1 and 2, so that serial / parallel conversion is performed. When the supply of the power supply VCS to the boards 1 and 2 is stopped, the power supply VDC to the shielding member operating motor 57a, the left side LED 57b, and the right side LED 57c is also stopped, and the shielding member operating motor 57a and the like do not operate. It has become like.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 that is input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b according to the above, and the LED drive circuit 2 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2. A power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1, and the power supply VCS is a signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1. It is connected to a noise removal circuit 1 for removing noise and a pull-up resistor 1 that pulls up the voltage of the signal lines (second signal lines) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, and the power supply VCS is the left LED 57b and the right side. It is a configuration generated from a power supply voltage for driving the LED 57c. In such a configuration, the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the first signal line into the parallel control signals 1 and 2 is a serial control signal. In the configuration connected to the noise reduction circuit 1 of the signal line (first signal line) of 1 and the clock signal 1 and the pull-up resistor 1 of the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, the left LED 57b, Since the power supply VCS is generated from the power supply VDC for driving the right side LED 57c, when the power supply VCS supply is stopped, the power supply VDC is also stopped, so that the left side LED 57b and the right side LED 57c operate unintentionally. Can be prevented.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 into parallel control signals 3 to 6. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that is output to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 and the parallel control signal that is input from the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6. Motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operation motor 57a are provided according to 3 to 6, and a power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2. The power supply VCS includes a noise removing circuit 2 for removing noise from the signal lines (first signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2, and signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6. It is connected to a pull-up resistor 2 that pulls up the voltage of the above, and the power supply VCS is configured to be generated from the power supply VDC for driving the shielding member operation motor 57a. In such a configuration, the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the first signal line into the parallel control signals 3 to 6 is a serial control signal. 2 and the shield member operating motor 57a are connected to the noise removing circuit 2 of the clock signal 2 (first signal line) and the pull-up resistor 2 of the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6. Since the power supply VCS is generated from the power supply VDC for driving, when the power supply VCS supply is stopped, the power supply VDC is also stopped, so that the shielding member operation motor 57a is prevented from operating unintentionally. can.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 that is input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b according to the above, and the LED drive circuit 3 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2. In addition, the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal line (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are converted into parallel control signals 3 to 6, and the parallel control signals 3 to 3 are provided. According to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 output to the signal line (4th signal line) of 6 and the parallel control signals 3 to 6 input from the signal lines (4th signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6. Motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operation motor 57a are provided, and a power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2, and the power supply VCS is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2. , Pull up the voltage of the noise removal circuit 2 for removing the noise of the signal line (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 and the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2. It is connected to the pull-up resistor 1 to be driven, and the power supply VCS is configured to be generated from the power supply VDC for driving the left side LED 57b and the right side LED 57c. In such a configuration, the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the first signal line into the parallel control signals 3 to 6 is a serial control signal. In the configuration connected to the noise removal circuit 2 of the clock signal 2 and the clock signal 2 (third signal line) and the pull-up resistor 1 of the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, the left LED 57b and the right LED 57c are used. Since the power supply VCS is generated from the power supply VDC for driving, when the power supply VCS supply is stopped, the power supply VDC is also stopped, so that the left side LED 57b and the right side LED 57c are prevented from operating unintentionally. can.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 that is input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b according to the above, and the LED drive circuit 3 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2. In addition, the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal lines (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are combined with the signal lines of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 (first signal line). ), The serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 are converted into parallel control signals 1 and 2, and output to the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, respectively. The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b in response to the parallel control signal 1 input from the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2, and the signal line of the parallel control signal 2 (second signal line). It is provided with an LED drive circuit 3 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line), and is input from the signal lines (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2. A serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 into parallel control signals 3 to 6 and outputs them to the signal line (fourth signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6, and a parallel control signal. A serial / parallel conversion circuit including motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operation motor 57a in response to parallel control signals 3 to 6 input from the signal lines 3 to 6 (fourth signal line). A power supply VCS for operating the conversion circuit is connected to 1 and 2, and the power supply VCS removes noise from the signal lines (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1. It is connected to the noise removal circuit 1 and the pull-up resistor 2 that pulls up the voltage of the signal lines (fourth signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6, and the power supply VCS drives the shielding member operation motor 57a. It is a configuration generated from the power supply VDC of. In such a configuration, the power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the first signal line into the parallel control signals 1 and 2 is a serial control signal. In the configuration connected to the noise removing circuit 1 of 1 and the clock signal 1 (1st signal line) and the pull-up resistor 2 of the signal lines (4th signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6, the shielding member operating motor 57a is used. Since the power supply VCS is generated from the power supply VDC for driving, when the power supply VCS supply is stopped, the power supply VDC is also stopped, so that the shielding member operation motor 57a is prevented from operating unintentionally. can.

In this modification, the shielding unit control board 57d is provided with a step-down circuit that generates a power supply VCS from the power supply VDC, so that the power supply VCS is stopped when the power supply VDC is not supplied to the shielding unit control board 57d. At the same time, the supply of the power supply VDC to the shielding member operating motor 57a, the left side LED 57b, and the right side LED 57c is stopped. For example, as shown in FIG. 46B, the shielding unit control board 57d The FET element or the like may be connected to the power supply VCS and the power supply VDC so that the power supply VDC is supplied to the shielding member operation motor 57a, the left side LED 57b, and the right side LED 57c when the power supply VCS is supplied to the power supply VCS. With such a configuration, when the power supply VCS is not supplied to the shielding unit control board 57d, the supply of the power supply VDC to the shielding member operation motor 57a, the left side LED 57b, and the right side LED 57c is stopped to operate the shielding member. It is possible to prevent the motor 57a and the like from operating.

Further, in this modification, the shielding unit control equipped with the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2 that convert the serial control signal and the clock signal transmitted by the effect control CPU 120 into a parallel control signal for operating a predetermined electric component. The board 57d is configured to include a step-down circuit that generates a power supply VCS for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2 from a power supply VDC for operating a predetermined electric component, but the serial is transmitted by the CPU 103. In a control board equipped with a serial / parallel conversion circuit that converts a control signal and a clock signal into a parallel control signal for operating a predetermined electric component, a predetermined operating power source for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit is used. A configuration including a power generation circuit generated from an operating power source for operating an electric component may be provided. Even in such a configuration, when the supply of the operating power supply is stopped, the supply of the operating power source is also stopped, so that the predetermined electric component can be used. It is possible to prevent unintentional operation.

Although the modified example 17 of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this modified example, and is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configuration as that of the modified example 14 has the same effect as that described in the modified example 14. Further, the modified example illustrated with respect to the modified example 14 can also be applied to the modified example 17.

(12) A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1).
Movable bodies (for example, movable body 250, second effect body 900, third movable body, etc.) provided so as to be movable between the origin position and a position away from the origin position.
A driving means for operating the movable body and
A control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) for controlling the operation of the movable body by the drive means is provided.
When the control means does not detect the first operation control for locating the movable body at the origin position (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 does not detect steps S105 to S114 of the second initialization process as the first operation control). The operation control and the part that executes the operation control at the time of detection in steps S120 to S128, and the second operation control for confirming that the movable body can operate normally (for example, the effect control CPU 120) As the second operation control, a part for executing the actual operation confirmation operation control in steps S201 to S213 of the second initialization process and a third operation control for performing the effect by the movable body (for example, for the effect control). As the third operation control, the CPU 120 can perform a period during which the fluctuation display of the symbol is executed, a control for executing the movable body effect in the jackpot game state, and the like).
In the second operation control, the movable body is controlled to operate within a range of the first speed and the second speed faster than the first speed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is for checking the actual operation. When the motion control is executed, the movable body is controlled to operate at a speed within a range of the minimum speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed which is faster than the minimum speed. In the first operation control, the movable body is controlled to operate at a speed equal to or lower than the first speed in the second operation control (for example, the effect control CPU 120 serves as the first operation control. When executing the operation control at the time of non-detection or the operation control at the time of detection, the speed equal to or less than the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation as the second operation control (in the present embodiment, the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation). The part that controls the movable body to move at the same speed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the first motion control, the movable body operates at a speed at which it can be stopped at any timing, so that it can be safely positioned at the origin position.

(13) In the gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that plays a game
The control signal input from the first signal line (serial control signal 1 signal line, clock signal 1 signal line) is converted into a drive signal and output to the second signal line (parallel control signals 1 and 2 signal lines). Conversion circuit (serial / parallel conversion circuit 1) and
Drive circuits (LED drive circuits 1 and 2) that drive electrical components (left side LED57b, right side LED57c) according to the drive signal input from the second signal line.
With
A predetermined power supply (power supply VCS) is connected to the conversion circuit to operate the conversion circuit, and the predetermined power supply is a noise removal circuit (noise removal circuit) for removing noise of the first signal line. It is connected to 1) and a pull-up circuit (pull-up resistor 1) that pulls up the voltage of the second signal line.
The predetermined power supply is characterized in that it is supplied via a plurality of wirings (power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2).
According to this feature, the predetermined power source for operating the conversion circuit that converts the control signal input from the first signal line into the drive signal is the noise reduction circuit of the first signal line and the pull-up circuit of the second signal line. In the configuration connected to, when the predetermined power supply is input via a plurality of wires, it becomes difficult to stop the supply of the predetermined power supply. Therefore, when the supply of the predetermined power supply is stopped, the electric parts unintentionally It can be prevented from operating.

(14) In the gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that plays a game
The first control signal input from the first signal line (the signal line of the serial control signal 1 and the signal line of the clock signal 1) is converted into the first drive signal and the second signal line (parallel control signals 1 and 2 signals). The first conversion circuit (serial / parallel conversion circuit 1) that outputs to the line) and
The first drive circuit (LED drive circuits 1 and 2) for driving the first electric component (left side LED57b, right side LED57c) according to the first drive signal input from the second signal line.
The second control signal input from the third signal line (serial control signal 2 signal line, clock signal 2 signal line) is converted into a second drive signal to convert the fourth signal line (parallel control signals 3 to 6 signals). The second conversion circuit (serial / parallel conversion circuit 2) that outputs to the line) and
The second drive circuit (motor drive circuits 1 to 4) for driving the second electric component (shielding member operation motor 57a) in response to the second drive signal input from the fourth signal line,
With
A predetermined power supply (power supply VCS) is connected to the first conversion circuit and the second conversion circuit in order to operate the first conversion circuit and the second conversion circuit, and the predetermined power supply is the first conversion circuit. It is connected to a noise removal circuit (noise removal circuit 1) for removing noise from the signal line and a pull-up circuit (pull-up resistor 2) that pulls up the voltage of the fourth signal line.
The predetermined power supply is characterized in that it is supplied via a plurality of wirings (power supply lines VCS1 and VCS2).
According to this feature, a predetermined power source for operating the first conversion circuit that converts the first control signal input from the first signal line into the first drive signal is the noise removal circuit of the first signal line and the fourth. In a configuration connected to a signal line pull-up circuit, when a predetermined power supply is input via a plurality of wires, it becomes difficult to stop the supply of the predetermined power supply. 2 It is possible to prevent the electric parts from operating unintentionally.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a game ball having a predetermined number of balls is a game machine. The number of rented balls that are circulated inside and lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine that is stored and stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) has been applied as an example of the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game such as a medal. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine is applied as an example of the game machine, but for example, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the variable display device capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines that can generate prizes.

The variable display of the identification information (special figure, effect pattern, general figure, etc.) also includes the blinking of the identification information. For example, in a special figure, a variable display includes a pattern in which all segments are turned off and a pattern in which at least some segments are turned on (for example, a lost pattern) are alternately repeated. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed in the variable display may be a symbol different from the special symbol that is displayed before the stop display (during fluctuation) (the same applies to the effect symbol and the normal symbol).

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like in which a gaming medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) and a specific electronic component (for example, a connector) having a metal fixing portion (for example, a metal fixing portion 651). ) Is mounted, and each electronic component to be mounted has a substrate (for example, LED substrate 275) formed with a wiring pattern for electrically connecting the mounted electronic components. For example, a component fixing portion (for example, a fixing pad P) for fixing with solder) is formed, and the component fixing portion is electrically connected to any of the wiring patterns (for example, GND pattern). Further, the suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the player is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and the above suggestion. A title notification means (for example, a production control CPU 120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the effect is provided, and the title notification means provides a title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect. Examples thereof include gaming machines that can be notified (for example, FIGS. 55 (D) and 55 (F)).

According to such a configuration, since the component fixing portion can be formed as a part of the wiring pattern, it is not necessary to provide the component fixing portion separately from the wiring pattern. The wiring pattern can be provided satisfactorily. In addition, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, as an example of a form of a gaming machine in which a wiring pattern can be satisfactorily provided while securing an area of a fixed portion and an effect of effect can be enhanced, an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state). ), Which is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the machine is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the effect control CPU 120). ) And a title notification means (for example, a production control CPU 120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect, the title notification means provides the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect. Examples thereof include gaming machines capable of notifying titles corresponding to (for example, FIGS. 55 (D) and 55 (F)). Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)
FIG. 47 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 47, the right side of the game area), a variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of on hold storage. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening that is always maintained in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 48). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 47, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 48), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 47, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is suspended, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 47), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 48).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 48).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, stick controller 31A and push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko game machine 1 by the player. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (although the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in the time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in the probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in the normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like / extinguishing, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability big hit" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also called) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state having the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. 48. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output voice) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 49, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). Along with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the recovery from the power failure has been performed or the recovery from the power failure is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 50 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, refer to the details. See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 50 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the look-ahead judgment, etc. is made to the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 50 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination values to be compared with the random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be changed in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 52. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 52 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 52 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 53, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the jackpot middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the jackpot game state is to be terminated. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation was a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature 31AK)
Next, the feature portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern and a type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 54 (A), in the present embodiment, the non-reach loss variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1-2 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode and the display result is “loss”. , The variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode, and the display result is "loss". The variation pattern of reach loss is PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., and the display result is "big hit". PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like are prepared.

Further, as shown in FIG. 54 (B), in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that suggests that the jackpot state is controlled. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 54 (B). Normal reach <Super reach E <Super reach D <Super reach C <Super reach B <The order is higher in the order of Super Reach A. In addition, a reach that is determined to be a big hit may be provided.

In this embodiment, the super reach is performed via the normal reach. In addition, during the reach production of Super Reach, a development production that develops (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. The fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like shown in FIG. 54 (A) and the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like are fluctuation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. In addition, although FIG. 54 (A) shows a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops to a super reach one step higher, a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops by two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

In this embodiment, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 54 (B), the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, Super Reach E, which has the lowest reliability among Super Reach, is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and other Super Reach is notified of the title by display and voice. In this way, the title notification is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than in the reach with low reliability. As a result, the player's expectation can be effectively fueled and the effect of the effect is improved. The mode of notification of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be different depending on the actual display result and the like. In addition, the font (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) and typeface (Semi-cursive, regular script, etc.) of the title characters may be different depending on the type of reach.

The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the one indicating the title itself such as the name of the reach, and may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach production, the production content of the reach production, and the like.

(Example of production operation of feature unit 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following effect operation is executed by the effect control CPU 120 executing the effect control process process based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. FIGS. 55 and 56 are diagrams showing an example of a super reach effect operation according to the present embodiment. FIG. 55A shows that the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. .. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), the decorative symbols showing the numbers 7 on the “left” and “right” are stopped to enter the reach mode. After that, the production branches according to the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 55 (C), the character 31AK001, which is a ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect (also referred to as the super reach effect), the entire screen of the image display device 5 is as shown in FIG. 55 (D). The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the character "SP Reach A") is displayed, and the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach (here, "Super Reach A") is output from the speaker 8. , The title of Super Reach A is notified. After that, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, and as shown in FIG. 55 (E), the character 31AK003, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 confront each other. The subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. The production in which the characters confront each other is also called a battle production, and in the battle production, if the ally character wins, it becomes a big hit, and if the ally character loses, it becomes a loss.

When displaying the dialogue on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the sound corresponding to the dialogue may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 55 (E), and may be displayed in subtitles at the lower part of the image display device 5.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of super reach B, as shown in FIG. 55 (C), the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period has passed since the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B (here) is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 55 (F). Then, the characters "SP reach B") are displayed, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "super reach B") is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of super reach B is notified. NS. After that, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 55 (G), the character 31AK006, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 confront each other. The subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed.

As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title of the reach is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the super reach effect. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction portion of the super reach effect is shown to the player, so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

In addition, the titles of Super Reach A (Fig. 55 (C) → (D) → (E) ...) and Super Reach B (Fig. 55 (C) → (F) → (G) ...) In the introduction part until the notification, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 55 (C)). By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which super reach will be achieved after the super reach production is started and which title will be notified. Super Reach A and Super Reach B are not limited to completely sharing the production mode until the title is notified, and it is possible to determine which Super Reach will be achieved by paying close attention to the production. The parts may be made to have a common production mode. For example, in the introduction part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect of displaying an enemy character or suggesting an enemy character) is executed in a manner related to the title notified thereafter. It may be. By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be executed after making it possible to identify which super reach will be achieved.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 55 (H), the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the character “SP Reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, the title of Super Reach D is notified by outputting the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach (here, "defeat the enemy") from the speaker 8. In this way, in Super Reach D, the title is notified at the start of the Super Reach effect. Further, under the title 31AK007, an expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 that suggests the expectation degree of the reach is displayed. Expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 55 (H). Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation that is a big hit, but it does not have to completely match the reliability of the big hit of the reach.

It should be noted that the voice notification of Super Reach D does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the content of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is different depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification becomes various and the interest is improved.

After the title is notified in Super Reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 55 (I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of reach even during the reach production. Although FIG. 55 (I) shows the same effect contents as those in FIG. 55 (C) (Super Reach A, Super Reach B), a super reach effect dedicated to Super Reach D may be executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 55 (J), the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is executed. NS.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 56 (A), the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the character “SP Reach E”) is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. As a result, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 which is an enemy character are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is displayed. Will be executed. In this way, in Super Reach E, the title is notified along with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach production.

In the reach production of Super Reach E, which has low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of expectation by notifying the title without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach production of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach production is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 55 (D), (F), (Fig. 55). H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, even in the super reach production such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach. Further, contrary to this embodiment, in the reach production of the super reach having high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach production of super reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped to notify the title.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach production is performed. The title is notified at the start. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has passed after the start of the super reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach having low jackpot reliability are notified. In E, the title was notified at the start of the super reach production, but in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, the title is notified at the start of super reach production, and in the case of reach with low jackpot reliability, super The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is notified. The title is notified in a part of the screen (second area) of. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification becomes possible. The title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be one in which the title is displayed in a size that fits in the entire screen, or the title is displayed there with the entire background as the background for title notification. It may be something (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display areas for performing title notification may be different between Super Reach A and Super Reach B, and the display areas for performing title notification may be different between Super Reach D and Super Reach E.

The method of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be arbitrarily changed according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of reach with low reliability. Further, when the display area for performing the title notification is different according to the reach effect, the display area may be different or the display place may be different as in this embodiment.

(Expectation suggestion display)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the expectation suggestion display is not displayed, and Super Reach D having a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach A and Super Reach B is displayed. In the title notification in, the expectation degree suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming dull. Further, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation degree suggestion display is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the sense of expectation by displaying the expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. In addition, the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed in at least a part of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach E.

As shown in FIG. 55 (H), the expectation degree suggestion display is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars, and the expectation degree may be suggested by a meter or a gauge, and corresponds to the expectation degree. The numerical value may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 55 (H) and the like, when the number of black stars is used, half of the black stars may be displayed so that the number of steps of the degree of expectation may be increased.

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is deleted and the super reach effect is executed. As a result, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, attention can be paid to the reach effect. Further, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until the determined effect described later is executed. As a result, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during the super reach production. Further, by doing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed in order to improve the effect of the effect.

Although the production operation of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted here, for example, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decisive production)
After each reach effect is executed, when the timing for deriving the display result (the final stage of the variable display) is reached, a determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed. The deciding effect includes a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "big hit" and a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "missing". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56B, a determination effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. After that, if the display result is "big hit", the image 31AK013 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 56 (C), and the big hit combination is displayed as shown in FIG. 56 (D). A fixed decorative pattern is derived. If the display result is "missing", an image showing that the ally character has been defeated is displayed, and a definite decorative pattern that is a reach loss combination is derived.

In this embodiment, even if the title is continuously notified even during the reach production, the notification of the title is terminated before the determined production is executed. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the determined production, and it is possible to execute a sharp title notification.

In the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative pattern is reduced in the lower right portion of the image display device 5 to execute the variable display. The method of displaying the decorative pattern of is arbitrary. For example, the decorative pattern may not be displayed during the reach effect, or the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be different depending on the type of reach effect.

When the image display device 5 displays the hold display, the active display, the character that is residently displayed during the variable display, and the display related to mobile interlocking, it is appropriately hidden during the reach effect of the super reach in order to pay attention to the reach effect. May be. At that time, these displays may be left displayed during a low-reliability reach effect such as Super Reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly expected by the low-reliability reach production, and it is possible to draw attention to the reach production in the high-reliability reach production.

(Development production)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 57 (A), when the development effect is executed while the reach effect of Super Reach D is being executed (the title notification of Super Reach D is being executed), FIG. 57 (B) shows. As shown, the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn. After that, when developing into Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 57 (C), the title of Super Reach A is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. When developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 57 (D), the title of Super Reach B is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 57, when the reach of the development destination is the reach of performing the title notification by display and voice, the title notification by display and voice is executed again.

The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 57 (B), and may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked and cracked, or a sandstorm (display as if it has failed) is displayed. You may do so. By making such an effect, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect. In addition, there may be a development effect of Gase, such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion production)
In the production operation example shown in FIG. 55 (H), the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 was designed to display the black star indicating the expectation degree from the beginning, but five white stars are displayed first and gradually. It is also possible to execute the expectation suggestion effect that suggests the expectation by becoming a black star.

For example, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), when notifying the title of Super Reach D, the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 of five white stars is displayed first. Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 58 (C), the black star 31AK022 moves and the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 The production is performed so that it fits in one of the white stars. At this time, a voice "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 58 (D) and 58 (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise each time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the expectation is settled in the expectation suggestion display 31AK021, the black stars are highlighted as shown in FIG. 58 (F). By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion effect has been completed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 58 (A) to 58 (F), the black stars are displayed one by one and the expectation degree indicated by the expectation degree suggestion display is increased by one step, but two or more black stars are displayed. It may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be raised by two or more steps. Also, half a black star may be displayed to raise the degree of expectation by half a step. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output depending on the number of displayed stars (the number of steps of the rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when a half black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three and a half black stars are displayed. In addition, audio may not be output in some cases. By doing so, the expectation suggestion effect becomes diverse and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, regardless of the number of steps of expectation that increases at one time, the same image of the black star is displayed, it fits in the white star of the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of steps of expectation that increases. You may try to perform such an effect.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In the different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command for designating a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, the effect based on the command is executed in a different effect mode. In each effect mode, the background, characters, motifs, sounds output from the speaker 8 and the like displayed on the image display device 5 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of variable displays and the game state, or may be changed by the operation of the player.

FIGS. 58 (G) to 58 (L) are examples of the effect operation of the title notification and the expectation suggestion effect when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes. In the normal mode, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. 58 (A) to 58 (F). In the special mode, the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2, which is different from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 58 (G). At this time, the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but the sound different from the normal mode (for example, the sound having a different voice color) is output. Further, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024 in Super Reach D2 is not a star shape but a rhombus shape.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (H), a black rhombus 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 58 (I), the black rhombus 31AK025 moves and the expectation suggestion display 31AK024. The production is performed so that it fits in one of the white rhombuses. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a voice "pon" indicating that the black rhombus indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 58 (J) and 58 (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the expectation is settled in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombuses are highlighted as shown in FIG. 58 (L). In this way, depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the game state, etc., the effect of the effect is diversified by changing the notification mode of the title. improves.

FIG. 58 shows an example of the effect operation when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, but other reach effects (title notification, expectation suggestion effect) depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed). (Including) may be made different. Depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not to notify the reach title and the execution rate of the title notification may be different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect according to the player's preference, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the expectation is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation suggestion display, and the expectation suggestion effect that gradually increases the number of black stars is executed. It is also possible to execute an expectation suggestion effect that gradually reduces the number of indications suggesting. Such an expectation degree suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the expectation degree suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other examples of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect for gradually increasing the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, when the display showing the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, a button is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 59 (B). The development effect in which the image 31AK031 is displayed is executed. Here, when the operation to the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 59 (C), the title 31AK032 of the super reach C (here, the character "SP reach C") is displayed, so that the super reach C is displayed. The title of reach C is notified. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has been developed. Further, under the title 31AK032, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, the development effect in which the title and the expectation degree suggestion display change may be executed.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to a title notification mode (for example, the display color of the title). For example, as shown in FIG. 60 (A), the title 31AK036 of the super reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach A is notified. After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), the title notice that the display color of the title 31AK030 changes to red is executed. In this way, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title notice shown in FIG. 60, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display.

Further, when the title notice in which the display mode (display color) of the title changes is executed, the sound may be output according to the display mode after the change in the title display mode. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. Further, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, the sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change.

(Execution timing of title notification)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) that is controlled to the jackpot advantageous state and the expectation level is improved, such as the advance notice effect and the development effect. By doing so, once the title is notified, an effect of improving the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice effect determination process for determining whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect mode. The advance notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 of FIG. 53. In the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is the variation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of the superreach (whether or not the title notice is executed) is determined (step 31AKS002).

In step 31AKS002, the display color of the super reach title is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 62 (A), depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “miss”. As shown in FIG. 62 (A), the display color of the title of Super Reach changes from "black", "red", "black" to "red", and from "black" to "fruit pattern". Things that change from "red" to "fruit pattern" are provided, and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing of the change in the display color of the title. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In the "fruit pattern", the characters of the title may be displayed in bold and the characters themselves may be the "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the display area of the title may be the "fruit pattern". .. There may be a pattern displayed as a "fruit pattern" from the beginning. For those whose display color changes, as shown in FIG. 60, the display color may change after the title notification is executed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the title display period differs depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may differ depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach (for example, super reach D or super reach E) in which the title display period is long, a plurality of changing timings may be provided and the change timing may be determined as one of them. Then, in the case of a super reach with a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or less than the number of super reach with a long title display period.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 62 (A) in the normal mode, and the normal mode as shown in FIG. 62 (B) is used in the special mode. Determine the title display color at different rates. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by making the execution mode (display color and change timing of the display color) of the title notice different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a line notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed depending on the display mode of the character's lines (for example, the display color of the lines) in the reach effect of the super reach.

After determining the display color of the title of the super reach, the display color of the character's dialogue (whether or not the dialogue notice is executed) in the reach production of the super reach is determined (step 31AKS003).

In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 62C, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “missing”. As shown in FIG. 62 (C), the display colors of the lines in the reach production are provided to change from "white", "red", and "white" to "red", and in this order (ascending order). The jackpot reliability is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the dialogue. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the effect is improved. If the display color changes, the display color may change after the dialogue is displayed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes.

In addition, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the title notice and the dialogue notice include the same effect mode (display color), the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same effect mode is used. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the change timing of the production mode between the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the change timings are the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be different depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the timing of each change between the title notice and the dialogue notice.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the dialogue may be determined in the special mode at a ratio different from that in the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

In addition, instead of the dialogue notice, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability may be executed by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the advance notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the jackpot reliability differs according to the change timing.

After determining the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect, or when it is determined that the pattern is not the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), whether or not to execute the other advance notice effect and the effect mode are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the advance notice effect determination process is completed.

In this embodiment, the title notice and the dialogue notice can be executed in the case of super reach, but the title notice is given in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the unreliable super reach). And at least one of the dialogue notices may be executable. Further, the title notice and the dialogue notice have been described as being determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 62, but the determination ratio is arbitrary, and for example, the determination ratio may be different depending on the type of super reach. By doing so, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect according to the type of reach, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the number of executable production modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing so, the production becomes diverse and the production effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of feasible production modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of feasible production modes may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute a unified notice effect, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action production)
When the effect mode of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect mode changes may be executed. For example, the action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the action effect that the image acts on at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or dialogue may be changed. The effect mode (action effect image, etc.) of the action effect may be the same regardless of whether it acts on the title or the dialogue. In addition, there may be a case where the effect mode of the title and the dialogue does not change even though the action effect is executed. When executing the action effect, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination results related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be executed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different depending on the effect mode of the action effect, or may be different from the title notice. The ratio of the dialogue notice and which production mode changes (the ratio of acting on which) may be different, or the ratio of changing to what color (how many stages) may be different. .. By executing such an action effect, the player will eventually pay attention to whether the action effect image is displayed, the title or the dialogue, and the effect effect will be improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect and the effect mode may be determined at different ratios depending on the effect mode. By doing so, it is possible to execute the action effect according to the effect mode, and the effect effect is improved.

As another example of such an action effect, at least one of the title and the dialogue is produced (display color) according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action content of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May change. By doing so, the player pays attention to the production content of the reach production.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the feature section 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention. For example, all of the feature portions described in the above embodiment are not essential configurations and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub-display device different from the image display device 5, a sub-liquid crystal display may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Although expressed as a sub liquid crystal display here, the sub display device may be composed of an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed in the vicinity of the image display device 5, for example, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub liquid crystal display, various effects such as a notice effect and a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal display. When the title is continuously displayed even after the title is notified as in the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display. In this case, after notifying the title on the image display device 5, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display. By doing so, the title and the expected degree suggestion display can be displayed without disturbing the super reach effect in the image display device 5, and the title and the expected degree suggestion display can be easily understood.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestion effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the title notification (mainly the notification for displaying characters) related to other effects. You may. For example, as a advance notice effect (for example, a look-ahead advance notice effect), when a look-ahead zone effect for shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) in which the background image and the effect mode are different in the image display device 5 is executed, the shifted zone is executed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of. When presenting a mission ("Reach with 7", "Eliminate enemies with a stick controller", etc.) and perform a mission production that will be in an advantageous state for the player when the mission is completed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of a mission.

(Modification example 1 of feature portion 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a deciding effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed, and then the display result is shown (). 56 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect for prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and when the predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the victory or defeat of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, since the display result is displayed according to the operation of the player, the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest is improved.

63 and 64 are diagrams showing an example of a super reach effect operation in a modified example in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 63 (A), after the reach mode is set in the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), the ally character 31AK041 and the enemy character 31AK042 are displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 63 (C) to (F) and 64 (G) to (I), the reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

Along with the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 63C, a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. As a result, the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the reception of the operation is currently restricted.

In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that the operation effect is executed are prepared. Then, the jackpot reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, the image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a more reliable mode.

For example, as shown in FIG. 63 (D), the praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 63 (E), the praying character 31AK045 changes to the happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 changes to the large button image 31AK047. Changes to.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 64 (I), the effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the bullet hits the large button image 31AK047. The effect 31AK050 is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

As described above, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, the action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. In addition, the operation effect image may change without the action effect. In addition, the operation effect image may not change even though the action effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

Then, before the predetermined time from which the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 64 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is enlarged and displayed in the center as shown in FIG. 64 (K). , A display prompting the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is displayed. Further, at this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A becomes an effective operation valid period.

Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 64 (L). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 64 (M), a definite decorative symbol to be a jackpot combination is derived. If the operation is not detected within the predetermined operation validity period, the image shown in FIG. 64 (L) is automatically displayed.

In this modification, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as operation effect images, and when an operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability of is high. Even if an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, it may change to an operation effect image with high reliability during the reach effect, so that the effect is improved and the player's expectation is increased. Can be maintained.

In the production operation examples shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the reach title notification and the expectation degree suggestion display are omitted, but they are appropriately performed in parallel with the reach production and the operation production shown in FIGS. 63 and 64. It may be executed. The determination regarding the operation effect and the operation effect image (presence / absence of operation effect, display of operation effect image, presence / absence of action effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG.

(Modification example 2 of feature portion 31AK)
A suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state may be performed. For example, the shutter effect of performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect of performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with the shutter display is executed after the variable display is started. Further, in the reach title production, the production of displaying the reach title indicating the development destination of the reach production is executed after the reach. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title notice of the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

The specific image is an image with high jackpot reliability that is displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. A fruit pattern image composed of these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in each of the shutter display and the reach title display.

When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the reach effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include each element E1 to E5 is displayed. An image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image showing the reliability of the jackpot when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach title in red letters). Then, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

When the shutter display and the reach title are displayed, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 notifies the speaker 8 to output a common sound (melody), and the game effect lamp 9 emits the light. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. Further, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output periods of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

FIG. 65 is a display screen view when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 65A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display on the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. The downward arrows indicate the variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the reach state is reached as shown in FIG. 65 (c).

Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (d), the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed small, for example, in the upper right corner of the screen, and the character is displayed on the left side of the screen. The reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the content of the super reach to be executed is shown as the reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "battle reach" indicating that the reach effect accompanied by the battle effect is executed are displayed.

Further, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect of emitting a specific sound (voice) indicating that the character has high jackpot reliability such as "hot" is executed. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title production, by outputting a specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the case where the output periods of the common sound and the specific sound are completely separated has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

After that, the battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 65 (e) is executed. Enemy characters are displayed on the left side of the screen, and ally characters are displayed on the right side of the screen. When a friendly character wins a battle with an enemy character, the characters "Battle win!" Are displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is notified that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect is completed, the screen returns to the variable display screen with the original number pattern. As shown in FIG. 65 (f), all the symbols are stopped and the jackpot symbol of "777" is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 65A and 65D, both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 include all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image and are displayed. In this way, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. As a result, it is possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image with high jackpot reliability is displayed.

Further, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 65 (a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 65 (d). Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 65 (a) and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 65 (d) are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is a specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

The determination regarding the shutter effect (presence / absence of shutter effect and effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. In that case, the determination related to the shutter effect may be made based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. For example, when the display color of the title is determined to be a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily executed. Further, the determination related to the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 61 together with the determination related to the shutter effect.

(Explanation of Characteristic Part of This Embodiment)
Next, the feature portion of the present embodiment will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 66-1 and 66-2, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 105SG001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a (gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 47) and a game machine frame (underframe) 105SG003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 105SG003, between a door opening position in which a glass door frame 105SG003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 105SG003 centering on the left side and a door closing position in which the front surface is closed. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 105SG003a, and when the glass door frame 105SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the gaming machine frame 105SG003 can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the clerk of the game hall into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and the player other than the clerk can open the gaming machine frame 105SG003 and the glass. The door frame 105SG003a cannot be opened.

The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 105SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 105SG051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state described later, and a set value such as a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the setting change state are changed. A setting changeover switch 105SG052 that functions as a setting switch is provided.

The setting switching main body unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is housed in the board case 105SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the right side of the back surface of the board case 105SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 105SG201.

Since the board case 105SG201 having the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 52 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not possible when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. It is possible, and the operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using a predetermined door key. Further, since the lock switch 105SG051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch 105SG051. Further, the lock switch 105SG051 is also a switch capable of performing an ON / OFF switching operation described later and an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation) by using a setting key. In this embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used in combination.

Further, in the substrate case 105SG201, a display monitor 105SG029 and a display changeover switch 105SG030 for switching the display of the display monitor 105SG029 are arranged. The display monitor 105SG029 and the display changeover switch 105SG030 are connected to the main board 11 and are arranged in the upper left portion of the board case 105SG201. That is, the display monitor 105SG029 and the display changeover switch 105SG030 are arranged in front of the board case 105SG201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

As described above, the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 in the present embodiment cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 may be operated from the inside of the game island where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 66-2 and 66-3, the right end portion of the outer frame 105SG001a includes a lock switch 105SG051 and a setting changeover switch 52 when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed. A security cover 105SG500A that covers the right side of the board case 105SG201 from the back side is attached. The security cover 105SG500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 105SG500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 105SG500Ab extending from the rear end portion of the short piece 105SG500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is composed of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having transparency. The vertical dimension of the short piece 105SG500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 105SG201. Further, the security cover 105SG500A is fixed to the right end portion of the outer frame 105SG001a via the front end portion of the short piece 105SG500Aa.

As shown in FIG. 66-2, the long piece 105SG500Ab abuts (or approaches) the right portion of the board case 105SG201 from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed. As a result, the right side of the board case 105SG201 including the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 are inoperable by the long piece 105SG500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 66-3, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is open, the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 move together with the gaming machine frame 105SG003 from the long piece 105SG500Ab. By separating the pieces, the covering state of the long piece 105SG500Ab is released, and the operation becomes operable.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, the security cover 105SG500A regulates the operation of the operation unit including the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052. While the state is maintained, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is open, the above-mentioned restricted state by the security cover 105SG500A is released, and the operation of the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is permitted. It becomes a state.

Since the board case 105SG201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed. The set value cannot be changed by operating the lock switch 105SG051 or the setting changeover switch 105SG052 unless the clerk of the game hall opens the game machine frame 105SG003 with the door key.

However, even if the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a gaming island (not shown) in the game field, for example, with another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. A lock switch 105SG051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by allowing an illegal member such as a wire or a cell plate to enter between the gaming device such as a card unit or a spacer member installed between the pachinko gaming machines 1 and the pachinko gaming machine 1. And the setting changeover switch 105SG052 may cause fraudulent acts such as changing the set value. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, the security cover 105SG500A switches the setting with the lock switch 105SG051. By maintaining the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the switch 105SG052 is regulated, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suitably suppressed.

Further, even in a regulated state in which the game machine frame 105SG003 is closed and the back right side of the board case 105SG201 including the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is covered by the security cover 105SG500A, the substrate is passed through the transparent security cover 105SG500A. Since the main board 11 and the like housed in the case 105SG201 can be seen through, the state of the mounting surface on the main board 11 on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted, the seal, and the like can be easily confirmed.

FIG. 66-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 66-4, in the present embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern Numerical data indicating each of the numerical value MR3, the random number value MR4 for determining the normal map display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In the present embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 51, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each of these random values MR1 to MR1 is not limited to this. The range of MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 66-5 shows the variation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variation display result is "missing", the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" and "reach", respectively. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit". Further, 1 fluctuation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the fluctuation display result is a “small hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern") and varies. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “loss”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "big hit" is called a jackpot fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 66-5, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the present embodiment is set shorter than the super reach fluctuation patterns of super reach α and super reach β. Has been done. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed is In this case, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the jackpot expectation that the fluctuation display result becomes "big hit" are set in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In the present embodiment, these fluctuation patterns are determined after first determining the type of fluctuation pattern, such as the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, and the like. Instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the specified type, the determination is made using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the value varies from the random values for determining the variation pattern type. The type of the pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66-5, a mode in which the fluctuation content (effect content) is predetermined for each fluctuation pattern is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the fluctuation content (effect content) may be different even if the fluctuation pattern is the same, depending on the set value. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 of the normal reach loss, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is the normal reach loss, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo continuous effect is performed. When the set value of 3 is set as the fluctuation pattern that causes non-reach loss when executed twice, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to obtain a fluctuation pattern that causes super reach loss.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as a work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the side of the main board 11 by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 66-6 and 66-7, which are prepared by the CPU 103 for performing various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 66-6 (A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 66-6 (B), and FIG. 66. The display result determination table (set value 3) shown in -6 (C), the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 66-6 (A), and the jackpot type determination shown in FIG. 66-6 (B). In addition to the table (for the second special symbol), the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown), the small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown), the loss fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown), and the normal figure display result judgment table (not shown). (Omitted), a table for determining the fluctuation pattern of the general map (not shown), etc. are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit and a small hit changes according to a set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit and the small hit is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. It has become. The set value is composed of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 having the highest payout rate and increasing the value in the order of 1, 2 and 3 to lower the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the larger the value in the order of 2 or 3, the lower the advantage is stepwise.

66-6 (A) to 66-6 (C) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 66-6 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/99 and 1 /. While the judgment value is set so that a small hit is won with a probability of 50, if the gaming state is a probability change state, a big hit is won with a probability of 1 / 9.9, and a small hit is won with a probability of 1/50. The judgment value is set so as to win.

Further, as shown in FIG. 66-6 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 is used, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/150. While the judgment value is set so that the small hit is won with a probability of 1/99, if the gaming state is in a probabilistic state, the big hit is won with a probability of 1/15 and the small hit is won with a probability of 1/99. The judgment value is set so as to win.

Further, as shown in FIG. 66-6 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/200. While the judgment value is set to, the judgment value is set so that if the game state is a probability change state, the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/20. When the set value is 3, the determination value is set so that the small hit is not won.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the probability that the big hit or the small hit is won is highest when the set value is "1", and the set value is "3". The judgment value is set so that the probability of winning the big hit or the small hit is the lowest in the case. Further, in the present embodiment, even when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the probability of winning the big hit or the small hit is highest when the set value is "1", and the set value is "3". The judgment value is set so that the probability of winning the big hit or the small hit is the lowest.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 66-6 (A) to 66-6 (C). If any of the hit determination values is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 66-6 (A) to 66-6 (C), it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a big hit symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit game state, but the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to decide whether or not to make the stop symbol in the small hit symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 shown in FIG. 66-6 (C) is used, the determination value other than the determination value corresponding to the big hit is the determination value corresponding to the small hit. That is, the small hit is not won, but a part of the judgment values other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, and the small hit is won. You may do so. That is, the fact that the ratio of the small hit probability differs depending on the set value includes that the small hit probability is 0%.

In the present embodiment, a total of three setting values, 1 to 3, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 2 or 4 or more.

Further, in the present embodiment, both the big hit probability and the small hit probability are different for each set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. , Only one of the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be made different for each set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

66-7 (A) and 66-7 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 66-7 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, in FIG. 66-7 (B), the jackpot type is determined by using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 66-8. In the present embodiment, the jackpot type includes high accuracy control (probability variation control) and time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Is executed and the jackpot B or jackpot C shifts to the high accuracy high base state, and after the end of the jackpot game state, only the time saving control is executed and the variable jackpot A shifts to the low accuracy high base state is set. ..

The jackpot game state by the "big hit A" is a normally open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. The big hit game state by the "big hit B" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. The big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player.

The high-accuracy control and the time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot B or the jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is the big hit B or the big hit C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs in.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times. It ends when it becomes a big hit game state before it is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 66-7 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is "1", the MR2 determination value ranges from 0 to 299. 0 to 150 are assigned to jackpot A, 151 to 200 are assigned to jackpot B, and 201 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 150 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 151 to 250 are assigned to the jackpot B. 251 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 150 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 151 to 275 are assigned to the jackpot B. 276 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 66-7 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is "1", the MR2 determination value ranges from 0 to 299. , 0 to 150 are assigned to jackpot A, 151 to 160 are assigned to jackpot B, and 161 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 150 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 151 to 170 are assigned to the jackpot B. 171 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 150 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 151 to 180 are assigned to the jackpot B. 181 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C.

In this way, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be "big hit A" is the same between the case where a jackpot occurs in the special symbol game of the first special symbol and the case where a jackpot occurs in the special symbol game of the second special symbol. Is set to. Further, when a big hit occurs in the special symbol game of the second special symbol with the same set value, the jackpot type is determined to be "big hit C" as compared with the case where the big hit occurs in the special symbol game of the first special symbol. In addition to the high ratio, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "big hit C" when a jackpot occurs in the special symbol game of the second special symbol is lowered in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the ratio in which the jackpot type is determined to be "big hit A" is the same for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. Although an example is shown in which the probability variation continuation rate (consecutive villa rate) is the same regardless of the probability variation continuation rate (consecutive villa rate), the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability variation continuation rate (probability variation continuation rate) is set for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The rate of consecutive villas) may be different.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game playability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be "big hit B" or "big hit C" when the variable display result is a big hit, so that the game is probable after the big hit game is completed. While the control and the time saving control are executed, when the variable display result becomes a big hit, the big hit type is determined to be "big hit A", so that only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game is completed. The present invention is not limited to this, and the playability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is such that when the variation display result is a jackpot, probabilistic control and time reduction control are performed over a predetermined number of variation displays regardless of the jackpot type. It may be executed (so-called number-cutting probability change machine).

However, in such a pachinko gaming machine that cuts the number of times, it is conceivable that the probability variation continuation rate (consecutive villa rate) will differ by making the jackpot probability different for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine. , When the jackpot probability is different for each set value in a pachinko machine that cuts the number of times, the number of probability variation controls and time reduction controls that are executed after the jackpot game ends so that the probability variation continuation rate (consecutive villa rate) is the same. May be different.

That is, in the set values 1 to 3, the ratio at which both the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed after the jackpot game is completed (the ratio at which only the time-saving control is executed) is the first special regardless of the set value. While the jackpot is the same when a jackpot occurs in the special symbol game of the symbol and when a jackpot occurs in the special symbol game of the second special symbol, the jackpot type is determined to be "big hit C" which is a 16-round jackpot. The ratio is highest when the set value is 1 and lowest when the set value is 3 (ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "big hit C": setting 1> setting 2> setting 3). That is, the ratio of the jackpot type determined to be "big hit B", which is a 5-round jackpot, is highest when the set value is 3 and lowest when the set value is 1 (the jackpot type is "big hit B"). Percentage determined to: Setting 3> Setting 2> Setting 1). From the above, regarding the ball ejection rate, the ball ejection rate is the highest when the set value is 1, and the ball ejection rate is the lowest when the set value is 3.

In this embodiment, a mode is illustrated in which the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is determined at a different ratio from the jackpot A, the jackpot B, and the jackpot C according to the set value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value set, there may be one or a plurality of undetermined jackpot types among jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C. In other words, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types should not be determined (the determination rate is 0%), or a specific jackpot type should be 100%. Included in determining by percentage.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result becomes a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved. ..

In the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is a special figure display result. It may be determined by using MR1 which is a random value for determination.

Further, in the present embodiment, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability and the small hit probability increase, and the jackpot C as the jackpot type is easily determined. The present invention is not limited to this, and the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability change according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, while the game playability itself does not change. The game playability is not limited to this, and the game playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a specific round during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through a predetermined count switch, the rate at which the game ball passes through the count switch during the big hit game differs depending on the big hit type. When the property (so-called V probability variation type) is set and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the high base is medium (time reduction control). In the middle), the game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) may be set in which the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state based on passing through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, although the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same as those set in 1 to 3, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability are higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4) may be provided.

Further, when the game playability is changed according to the set value in this way, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, the effect switch (the game ball passes through the count switch) is passed through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time, and when the set value is 2 or 3, the predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (game ball). It may be used as a switch for controlling the gaming state to the probability change state or the jackpot gaming state based on passing through the count switch).

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the fluctuation display result to "big hit" and the fluctuation display result to be "small hit". A fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits, which is used when it is pre-determined, and a fluctuation pattern judgment table for loss, which is used when it is pre-determined to make the fluctuation display result "miss", are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) are used. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take.

As shown in FIGS. 66-9 (A) and 66-9 (B), the jackpot variation pattern determination table is a jackpot variation pattern determination table (big hit A) used when the jackpot type is jackpot A. (For big hit) and the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (for big hit B and big hit C) used when the big hit type is for big hit B and big hit C are prepared in advance, and these big hit fluctuation pattern judgment tables (for big hit C) are prepared in advance. The fluctuation pattern judgment table for (for A) and jackpot (for jackpot B and jackpot C) shows the fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot. For each fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIG. 66-9 (A), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), when the set value is "1", 0 to 0 in the range of the determination value of MR3 0 to 997. Up to 300 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 301 to 800 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 801 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β. It is assigned to the jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 351 to 825 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 826 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 400 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 401 to 850 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 66-9 (B), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), when the set value is "1", the MR3 determination value ranges from 0 to 997. , 0-100 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 101-350 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 150 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 151 to 450 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 451 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 201 to 550 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

In this way, when the jackpot A is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). It is higher than that and lowers in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3. Further, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2). It is higher than the ratio and lowers in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3.

That is, in the present embodiment, when these determination values are the jackpot type "big hit B" or "big hit C", the super reach β is easily determined, and the jackpot type is "big hit A". In this case, the player is assigned so that the super reach α can be easily determined, so that when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player may become a “big hit B” or a “big hit C”. It is possible to raise the expectation of.

Further, in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, a predetermined random number value is a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take with respect to the variation pattern of the variation pattern (PC1-1) for small hits. Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66-9 (C), in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, even if the set value is any of "1", "2", and "3", the MR3 Of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value, 0 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of small hits (PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in the present invention, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern of the small hit. With the set values "1", "2", and "3", the fluctuation pattern of the small hit may be determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns at different ratios.

Further, the variation pattern determination table for loss includes the variation pattern determination table A for loss, which is used when the number of reserved memories is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control, and the low base. Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for loss, which is used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed, are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the super reach A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take with respect to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of β loss.

As shown in FIG. 66-10 (A), in the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss (for low-base medium total pending storage number of 1 or less), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the range 0 to 997, 0 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1). ~ 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss, the shortened non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach corresponding to the total number of reserved memories of 2 to 4 are obtained. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

As shown in FIG. 66-10 (B), in the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss (for 2 to 4 total pending storage numbers in low base), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3. Of the range 0 to 997, 0 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the MR3 determination value range 0 to 997, 0 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1). It is assigned to the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss, the shortened non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach corresponding to the total number of reserved storages of 5 to 8 are obtained. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

As shown in FIG. 66-10 (C), in the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss (for low-base medium total pending storage number of 5 or more), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the range 0 to 997, 0 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701. ~ 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", out of the MR3 determination value range 0 to 997, 0 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1). It is assigned to the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 551 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach loss (PA2-1), and the variation pattern of the super reach α loss corresponding to the time reduction control (PA1-4). A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take with respect to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of PA2-2) and super reach β loss.

As shown in FIG. 66-10 (D), in the loss fluctuation pattern determination table D (for high base and medium), when the set value is "1", the MR3 determination value ranges from 0 to 997. 0 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", out of the MR3 determination value range 0 to 997, 0 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1). It is assigned to the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 551 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

As described above, when the loss pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is higher than that of determining the super reach variation pattern, and the set values 1, 2, It is designed to be lower in the order of 3. When the fluctuation pattern judgment tables A to D for loss are used, 701 to 900 of the judgment values are the fluctuation patterns of super reach α loss, and 901 to 997 are the fluctuation patterns of super reach β loss regardless of the fluctuation pattern judgment table. When each of the fluctuation patterns is assigned, that is, when the fluctuation display result is lost, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined by a common determination ratio regardless of the set value, so that the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined. It is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered due to the fact that the variable display is not executed.

The "common decision rate" in the present embodiment means that the decision rate is completely the same at different set values (the present embodiment), and the decision rate is the same at different set values. (For example, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach differs by about 1% between the set value 1 to the set value 3).

In the present embodiment, when the variation display result is lost, the embodiment in which the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, but the present invention illustrates the embodiment. Not limited to this, if the variation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. However, only the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of either non-reach or normal reach may be the same.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, both the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss are both regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which is the same regardless of the set value in which is set is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variation display result is a loss, the variation pattern of the super reach α loss is illustrated. The determination ratio of only one of the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss may be the same regardless of the set value.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, both the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss are both regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which is the same regardless of the set value set is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value is set even when the variable display result is a big hit. Regardless of the set value, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is lost, a mode in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of non-reach or normal reach differs depending on the set value is illustrated, but it is set. Depending on the set value, there may be one or a plurality of undetermined fluctuation patterns among the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern. In other words, if the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value, one of the variation patterns should not be determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific variation pattern is 100%. It is also included to decide by the ratio of.

As shown in FIG. 66-10, the fluctuation time of the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and further, the fluctuation pattern (PA1). The fluctuation time of the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) is shorter than that of -2). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. Occasionally, by winning a start, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize that is not stored on hold to occur, and when the number of stored memories decreases, the fluctuation time is long and the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening ( By determining PA1-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not executed because the variable display time becomes long.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 66-10 (A) to 66-10 (C), the variation pattern is determined using a variation pattern determination table for loss that differs according to the total number of reserved storages. Although the embodiment is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the hold of the first special symbol is held. When executing the variation display of the number of stored symbols and the second special symbol, the variation pattern may be determined by using a variation pattern determination table for loss, which is different depending on the number of stored memory of the second special symbol).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table for each loss of the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the super reach loss (PA2-2) regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be any of 1 to 3. And the range of random numbers assigned to PA2-3) is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the fluctuation display is actually executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss (the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss). Appearance rate) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the present embodiment, the ratio in which the variation display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach loss differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention illustrates this. In consideration of the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the fluctuation display is displayed at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss. It may be executed.

(Setting change processing)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described. First, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 66-11, after the initialization process (step S8) is executed in the game control main process (see FIG. 49) described above, the CPU 103 It is determined whether or not the lock switch 105SG051 is ON (step 105SGSa11). When the lock switch 105SG051 is ON (step 105SGSa11; Yes), it is determined whether or not the door opening sensor 105SG090 is ON (step 105SGSa12). When the door opening sensor 105SG090 is ON (step 105SGSa12; Yes), the setting change process (step 105SGSa13) is executed to proceed to step 105SGSa14.

Then, after executing the setting change process (step 105SGSa13), after executing step S7, when the lock switch 105SG051 is OFF (step 105SGSa11; No), when the door opening sensor 105SG090 is OFF (step 105SGSa12; No). ) Reads the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 in step 105SGSa14, sets the read set value as the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and then executes the processes after step S10.

FIG. 66-12 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change process. In this setting change process, the CPU 103 first identifies the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 (step S105SGSa21), and displays the specified set value on the display monitor 105SG029 (step S105SGSa22).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is operated (step 105SGSa23). If there is no operation of the setting changeover switch 105SG052 (step 105SGSa23; No), the process proceeds to step 105SGSa25, and if there is an operation of the setting changeover switch 105SG052 (step 105SGSa23; Yes), the setting value displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 is displayed. The update is displayed (step S105SGSa24), and the process proceeds to step 105SGSa25. In the process of step S105SGSa24, for example, when "1" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 105SG029, the display of the display monitor 105SG029 is updated and displayed as "2", and the display monitor 105SG029 is set as the set value. When "2" is displayed, the display of the display monitor 105SG029 is updated to "3", and when "3" is displayed as a set value on the display monitor 105SG029, the display of the display monitor 105SG029 is changed to "3". It may be updated and displayed in "1".

In step 105SGSa25, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 105SG051 is pushed. If there is no pressing operation of the lock switch 105SG051 (step 105SGSa25; No), the process proceeds to step 105SGSa23, and if there is a pressing operation of the lock switch 105SG051 (step 105SGSa25; Yes), the set value displayed on the display monitor 105SG0029 is set. At the same time as specifying (step 105SGSa26), the specified set value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 (updated and stored with respect to the already stored set value) (step 105SGSa27). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 105SG051 is ON (step 105SGSa28). When the lock switch 105SG051 is ON (step 105SGSa28; Yes), the process of step 105SGSa28 is repeatedly executed, and when the lock switch 105SG051 is OFF (step 105SGSa28; No), the setting change process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed based on the fact that both the clear switch (see FIG. 49) and the lock switch 105SG051 are ON (setting change processing). Although the embodiment (execution) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and other processing may be executed depending on the combination of ON / OFF of the clear switch and the lock switch 105SG051. For example, when the clear switch is OFF and the lock switch 105SG051 is ON, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a state where it can be confirmed (the setting confirmation process is executed), and the clear switch is ON. When the lock switch 105SG051 is OFF, the data stored in the RAM 122 is cleared, and when both the clear switch and the lock switch 105SG051 are OFF, the recovery process from power failure (recovery process shown in FIG. 49). Just execute. During the execution of the setting change processing and setting confirmation processing described above, the fluctuation display of the special symbol, the launch of the game ball, whether or not the fluctuation display result is a big hit, various lottery such as the big hit type, the payout of the prize ball, etc. It suffices if it is controlled to the game stop state which does not execute any processing of.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 105SG029 in the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 66-13 (A) and 66-13 (B), when the power is turned off (powered off) by the operation of a clerk at the amusement park or the like, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied. When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 105SG029 ends. If the large winning opening is open during a big hit game or a small hit game at the timing when the power is turned off, the large winning opening is closed by stopping the supply of electric power to the solenoid 82.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66-13 (C), when the clerk of the game hall or the like turns on the power while operating the clear switch (in the case of Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the lock switch 105SG051 is turned on. The setting change process is executed by the CPU 103 on the condition that the door opening sensor 105SG090 is ON (the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is open), and the RAM 102 is backed up on the display monitor 105SG029. The setting value stored in the area is displayed.

In the state where the set value is displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 in this way, as shown in FIG. The numerical values displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 are sequentially updated (for example, updated as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 → ... Every time the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is operated).

Next, as shown in FIG. 66-13 (E), the CPU 103 sets the set value displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 on the RAM 102 based on the detection of the push operation of the lock switch 105SG051 by the clerk of the amusement park or the like. Store in the backup area (update storage). At this time, the CPU 103 blinks the display monitor 105SG029 to notify the clerk of the amusement park that the new set value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102. If the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the hold storage is cleared. Further, when the big winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 66-13 (A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the big winning opening is opened again. After that, the CPU 103 ends the setting change process based on the lock switch 105SG051 being turned off by the operation of the clerk of the game hall, and the game is possible, that is, the fluctuation display result, the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern. The decision lottery and the payout of prize balls will be feasible.

In the setting change process in the present embodiment, a mode in which the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. The initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 in the setting change process is the most advantageous setting value for the player (“1” in the present embodiment) or the most disadvantageous for the player. The set value (“3” in the present embodiment) may be displayed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55 (H), the effect control CPU 120 has a reach effect of super reach A and super reach B as the first suggestion effect, and a second effect. It is possible to execute the reach effects of Super Reach C and Super Reach D as suggestive effects, and when executing the reach effects of Super Reach C and Super Reach D, the reach of the Super Reach C and Super Reach D is performed. Since the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach production of the super reach C or the super reach D is notified from the start of the production, the notification of the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach production can be executed, and the production effect can be improved.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the introduction portion of the super reach A and the super reach B, a super reach effect (for example, displaying an enemy character or an enemy) is performed in a manner related to the title notified thereafter. By performing an effect that suggests a character), the effect of the effect can be improved and the player can pay attention to the effect.

The present embodiment also includes the second invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 have a problem that security is not improved. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
An opening / closing body that can be opened / closed (for example, a gaming machine frame 105SG003 / glass door frame 105SG003a) and
A setting means (for example, the setting shown in FIG. 66-12 by the CPU 103) that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values by operating the operation unit (for example, the lock switch 105SG051 or the setting changeover switch 105SG052). The part that executes the change process, etc.) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process as shown in FIG. 51) capable of executing control to the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
A regulatory member (for example, security cover 105SG500A / security cover 105SG500B / security cover 105SG500C) capable of regulating the operation of the operation unit, and
With
When the opening / closing body is closed, the regulation member maintains the regulation state in which the operation of the operation unit is restricted, and when the opening / closing body is open, the regulation state can be released (for example, a gaming machine). When the frame 105SG003 is closed, the security cover 105SG500A maintains the operation of the operation unit including the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 in a regulated state, while the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened. In this state, the regulated state by the security cover 105SG500A is released, and the operation of the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is permitted. FIGS. 66-2, 66-3, 66-. A gaming machine characterized by 14 to 66-17) is described, and according to this feature, security is improved. Specifically, it is possible to prevent the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 from being illegally operated when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, so that security is improved.

Further, as a gaming machine of means B of the second invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
An opening / closing body that can be opened / closed (for example, a gaming machine frame 105SG003 / glass door frame 105SG003a) and
A setting means (for example, the setting shown in FIG. 66-12 by the CPU 103) that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values by operating the operation unit (for example, the lock switch 105SG051 or the setting changeover switch 105SG052). The part that executes the change process, etc.) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 51) capable of executing control to the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
A regulatory member (for example, security cover 105SG500A / security cover 105SG500B / security cover 105SG500C) capable of regulating the operation of the operation unit, and
With
When the opening / closing body is closed, the regulation member maintains the regulation state in which the operation of the operation unit is restricted, and when the opening / closing body is open, the regulation state can be released (for example, for a game machine). In the state where the frame 105SG003 is closed, the security cover 105SG500A maintains the restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is regulated, while the game machine frame 105SG003 is opened. In this state, the regulation state by the security cover 105SG500A is released, and the operation of the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is permitted. FIGS. 66-2, 66-3, 66-14. ~ Fig. 66-17),
Moreover,
A substrate (for example, an LED substrate) on which at least a specific electronic component (for example, a connector) having a metal fixing portion (for example, a metal fixing portion 651) is mounted and a wiring pattern for electrically connecting each mounted electronic component is formed. 275)
A component fixing portion (for example, fixing pad P) for fixing the metal fixing portion with a low-temperature molten metal (for example, solder) is formed on the substrate.
An example of a gaming machine is that the component fixing portion is electrically connected to any of the wiring patterns (for example, GND pattern). According to this feature, security is improved. Specifically, it is possible to prevent the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 from being illegally operated when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, so that security is improved. Further, since the component fixing portion can be formed as a part of the wiring pattern, it is not necessary to provide the component fixing portion separately from the wiring pattern, so that the wiring pattern is satisfactorily provided while securing the area of the fixing portion. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention,
A game control board (for example, a main board 11) on which the game control means is mounted,
A board case (for example, board case 105SG201) for accommodating the game control board and
With
The operation unit is housed in the board case (for example, the setting switching main body unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is inside the board case 105SG201 together with the main board 11. A gaming machine characterized in that it is housed in (Fig. 66-2, Fig. 66-3, etc.) is described, and according to this feature, security is improved. Specifically, by protecting the setting switching main body by using the board case 105SG201 capable of accommodating the main board 11, it is possible to prevent the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting switching switch 105SG052 from being illegally operated. , Security is improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention,
The regulating member is a member that covers the operating portion so that the operation of the operating portion is regulated in the regulated state.
At least a part of the regulating member has transparency (for example, the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, 105SG500C are made of a transparent plate-shaped synthetic resin material, and are housed in the substrate case 105SG201 through the security cover. A gaming machine characterized in that the main board 11 and the like can be seen through is described, and according to this feature, security is improved. Specifically, since the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, and 105SG500C can cover a part of the board case 105SG201, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts not only on the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 but also on the main board 11. Further, since the main board 11 can be confirmed through the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, 105SG500C without canceling the regulation by the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, 105SG500C, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity. The work can be done easily.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention,
A detection means capable of detecting the opening of the opening / closing body (for example, the door opening sensor 105SG090) is provided.
When the detecting means does not detect the opening of the opening / closing body, the setting means does not set the set value even if the operation unit is operated (for example, as shown in FIG. 66-11, the game control main process. A gaming machine is described in which the CPU 103 does not execute the setting change process unless the door opening sensor 105SG090 is ON in step 105SGSa12), and the security is improved according to this feature.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention,
A game value-adding means that adds game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball has entered the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, and a game ball has entered the general winning opening. The part where the prize ball is paid out based on the entry and the entry of the game ball into the big prize opening),
An information display means (for example, the display monitor 105SG029 in the modification 4) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value adding means, and
With
The information display means can display predetermined information according to a set value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 66-120, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 105SG029). According to this feature, it is possible to easily grasp the state of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention,
A game value-adding means that adds game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball has entered the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, and a game ball has entered the general winning opening. The part where the prize ball is paid out based on the entry and the entry of the game ball into the big prize opening),
An information display means (for example, the display monitor 105SG029 in the modification 4) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value adding means, and
With
The information display means can display the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 66-20, a portion capable of displaying the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base on the display monitor 105SG029. ) Is described, and according to this feature, it is not necessary to individually provide a display device for displaying the set set value, so that the cost increase of the gaming machine can be prevented. Can be done.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the second invention,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the variable pattern setting process) for determining the variable display pattern in any of a plurality of variable display patterns, and
A variable display executing means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol variation process) that executes variable display with the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means, and
With
The variable display pattern determining means determines which variable display pattern is to be used at different ratios depending on the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 66-9 to 66-10). A game machine characterized in that each fluctuation pattern of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is determined at a different ratio based on a set value) is described. Since the player pays attention to the variable display pattern in an attempt to specify the set value from the determination status of the variable display pattern, the effect of the variable display pattern can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the second invention,
The game control means can control any of a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, a jackpot game state of jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C) based on a set value. There,
When the set value set by the setting means is the first set value and the second set value, the ratio of which of the plurality of types of advantageous states to control is different (for example). , The part where the ratio of determining which of the big hit A, the big hit B, and the big hit C is controlled is different depending on whether the set value is 1 or 2 or 3. ) Is described, and according to this feature, the type of advantageous state controlled according to the set value changes, so that the gaming interest can be improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the second invention,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
It is provided with a hold storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a start winning process) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
When a new set value is set by the setting means while the holding storage is stored in the holding storage means, the stored holding storage is erased (for example, as shown in the modification 5). A gaming machine characterized by (a part that clears the hold memory based on the setting of a new set value) is described, and according to this feature, the hold memory is straddled before and after the setting change. Since it is not memorized, the setting change can be reflected accurately.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the second invention,
A variable winning means (for example, a large winning opening) that can change into a first state in which the game medium can win a prize and a second state in which the game medium is more difficult to win or cannot win than the first state.
A control means for controlling the variable winning means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a process during jackpot opening), and
With
When a new set value is set by the setting means in the first state, the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state (for example, as shown in FIG. 66-13). A game machine characterized in that the grand prize opening is closed by turning off the power of the pachinko game machine 1 in order to set a new set value for the pachinko game machine 1) is described. According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the first state in which the gaming medium can win a prize straddles the change of the set value, and the change of the set value is not accurately reflected.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to the means 10 of the second invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the second invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means B of the second invention described above.

The present embodiment also includes the third invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 have a problem that security is not improved. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
An opening / closing body that can be opened / closed (for example, a gaming machine frame 105SG003 / glass door frame 105SG003a) and
A setting means (for example, the setting shown in FIG. 66-12 by the CPU 103) that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values by operating the operation unit (for example, the lock switch 105SG051 or the setting changeover switch 105SG052). The part that executes the change process, etc.) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 51) capable of executing control to the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
A regulatory member (for example, security cover 105SG500A / security cover 105SG500B / security cover 105SG500C) capable of regulating the operation of the operation unit, and
With
The restricting member can be switched between a first state that regulates an operation on the operation unit and a second state that does not restrict an operation on the operation unit (for example, the security cover 105SG500B has a covering position with respect to the substrate case 105SG201). It is slidable in the left-right direction between the coating position and the coating removal position on the right side of the coating position./The security cover 105SG500C has a coating position centered on the pivot 105SG500Cd and a coating removal position rotated from the coating position. Can rotate between),
When the restricting member is in the second state when the opening / closing body is open, the opening / closing body cannot be closed unless the regulating member is switched from the second state to the first state (for example). When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state, as shown in FIG. 66-15 (B), the security cover 105SG500B must be slid from the uncovered position to the covering position (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is put into the regulated state). (If not changed) The security cover 105SG500B comes into contact with the front end of the outer frame 105SG001a, making it impossible to close the gaming machine frame 105SG003 (modification example 1). / Pachinko gaming machine 1 is acceptable. In the state, as shown in FIG. 66-17 (B), the security cover 105SG500C must be rotated from the uncovered position to the covered position (unless the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the regulated state). A gaming machine characterized in that the cover 105SG500C comes into contact with the front end portion of the outer frame 105SG001a, making it impossible to close the gaming machine frame 105SG003 (modification example 2)). According to this feature, security can be improved. Specifically, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 105SG003 from being closed in the second state, that is, in the state where the security covers 105SG500B and 105SG500C are in the uncovered position, so that the security can be improved.

Further, as a gaming machine of means B of the third invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
An opening / closing body that can be opened / closed (for example, a gaming machine frame 105SG003 / glass door frame 105SG003a) and
A setting means (for example, the setting shown in FIG. 66-12 by the CPU 103) that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values by operating the operation unit (for example, the lock switch 105SG051 or the setting changeover switch 105SG052). The part that executes the change process, etc.) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 51) capable of executing control to the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
A regulatory member (for example, security cover 105SG500A / security cover 105SG500B / security cover 105SG500C) capable of regulating the operation of the operation unit, and
With
The restricting member can be switched between a first state that regulates an operation on the operation unit and a second state that does not restrict an operation on the operation unit (for example, the security cover 105SG500B has a covering position with respect to the substrate case 105SG201). It is slidable in the left-right direction between the coating position and the coating removal position on the right side of the coating position./The security cover 105SG500C has a coating position centered on the pivot 105SG500Cd and a coating removal position rotated from the coating position. Can rotate between),
When the restricting member is in the second state when the opening / closing body is open, the opening / closing body cannot be closed unless the regulating member is switched from the second state to the first state ( For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state, as shown in FIG. 66-15 (B), the security cover 105SG500B must be slid from the uncovered position to the covering position (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the regulated state). The security cover 105SG500B comes into contact with the front end of the outer frame 105SG001a, making it impossible to close the gaming machine frame 105SG003 (modification example 1). In the allowable state, as shown in FIG. 66-17 (B), the security cover 105SG500C must be rotated from the uncovered position to the covered position (unless the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the regulated state). The security cover 105SG500C comes into contact with the front end of the outer frame 105SG001a, making it impossible to close the gaming machine frame 105SG003 (modification example 2)).
Moreover,
A substrate (for example, an LED substrate) on which at least a specific electronic component (for example, a connector) having a metal fixing portion (for example, a metal fixing portion 651) is mounted and a wiring pattern for electrically connecting each mounted electronic component is formed. 275)
A component fixing portion (for example, fixing pad P) for fixing the metal fixing portion with a low-temperature molten metal (for example, solder) is formed on the substrate.
An example of a gaming machine is that the component fixing portion is electrically connected to any of the wiring patterns (for example, GND pattern). According to this feature, security is improved. Specifically, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 105SG003 from being closed in the second state, that is, in the state where the security covers 105SG500B and 105SG500C are in the uncovered position, so that the security can be improved. Further, since the component fixing portion can be formed as a part of the wiring pattern, it is not necessary to provide the component fixing portion separately from the wiring pattern, so that the wiring pattern is satisfactorily provided while securing the area of the fixing portion. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention,
A game control board (for example, a main board 11) on which the game control means is mounted,
A board case (for example, board case 105SG201) for accommodating the game control board and
With
The operation unit is housed in the board case (for example, the setting switching main body unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is inside the board case 105SG201 together with the main board 11. A gaming machine characterized in that it is housed in (Fig. 66-2, Fig. 66-3, etc.) is described, and according to this feature, security is improved. Specifically, by protecting the setting switching main body by using the board case 105SG201 capable of accommodating the main board 11, it is possible to prevent the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting switching switch 105SG052 from being illegally operated. , Security is improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention,
The regulating member is a member that covers the operating portion so that the operation of the operating portion is regulated in the regulated state.
At least a part of the regulating member has transparency (for example, the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, 105SG500C are made of a transparent plate-shaped synthetic resin material, and are housed in the substrate case 105SG201 through the security cover. A gaming machine characterized in that the main board 11 and the like can be seen through is described, and according to this feature, security is improved. Specifically, since the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, and 105SG500C can cover a part of the board case 105SG201, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts not only on the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 but also on the main board 11. Further, since the main board 11 can be confirmed through the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, 105SG500C without canceling the regulation by the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, 105SG500C, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity. The work can be done easily.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention,
A detection means capable of detecting the opening of the opening / closing body (for example, the door opening sensor 105SG090) is provided.
When the detecting means does not detect the opening of the opening / closing body, the setting means does not set the set value even if the operation unit is operated (for example, as shown in FIG. 66-11, the game control main process. A gaming machine is described in which the CPU 103 does not execute the setting change process unless the door opening sensor 105SG090 is ON in step 105SGSa12), and according to this feature, security can be improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention,
A game value-adding means that adds game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball has entered the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, and a game ball has entered the general winning opening. The part where the prize ball is paid out based on the entry and the entry of the game ball into the big prize opening),
An information display means (for example, the display monitor 105SG029 in the modification 4) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value adding means, and
With
The information display means can display predetermined information according to a set value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 66-120, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 105SG029). According to this feature, it is possible to easily grasp the state of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the third invention,
A game value-adding means that adds game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball has entered the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, and a game ball has entered the general winning opening. The part where the prize ball is paid out based on the entry and the entry of the game ball into the big prize opening),
An information display means (for example, the display monitor 105SG029 in the modification 4) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value adding means, and
With
The information display means can display the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 66-20, a portion capable of displaying the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base on the display monitor 105SG029. ) Is described, and according to this feature, it is not necessary to individually provide a display device for displaying the set set value, so that the cost increase of the gaming machine can be prevented. Can be done.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the third invention,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the variable pattern setting process) for determining the variable display pattern in any of a plurality of variable display patterns, and
A variable display executing means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol variation process) that executes variable display with the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means, and
With
The variable display pattern determining means determines which variable display pattern is to be used at different ratios depending on the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 66-9 to 66-10). A game machine characterized in that each fluctuation pattern of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is determined at a different ratio based on a set value) is described. Since the player pays attention to the variable display pattern in an attempt to specify the set value from the determination status of the variable display pattern, the effect of the variable display pattern can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the third invention,
The game control means can control any of a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, a jackpot game state of jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C) based on a set value. There,
When the set value set by the setting means is the first set value and the second set value, the ratio of which of the plurality of types of advantageous states to control is different (for example). , The part where the ratio of determining which of the big hit A, the big hit B, and the big hit C is controlled is different depending on whether the set value is 1 or 2 or 3. ) Is described, and according to this feature, the type of advantageous state controlled according to the set value changes, so that the gaming interest can be improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the third invention,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
It is provided with a hold storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a start winning process) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
When a new set value is set by the setting means while the holding storage is stored in the holding storage means, the stored holding storage is erased (for example, as shown in the modification 5). A gaming machine characterized by (a part that clears the hold memory based on the setting of a new set value) is described, and according to this feature, the hold memory is straddled before and after the setting change. Since it is not memorized, the setting change can be reflected accurately.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the third invention,
A variable winning means (for example, a large winning opening) that can change into a first state in which the game medium can win a prize and a second state in which the game medium is more difficult to win or cannot win than the first state.
A control means for controlling the variable winning means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a process during jackpot opening), and
With
When a new set value is set by the setting means in the first state, the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state (for example, as shown in FIG. 66-13). A game machine characterized in that the grand prize opening is closed by turning off the power of the pachinko game machine 1 in order to set a new set value for the pachinko game machine 1) is described. According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the first state in which the gaming medium can win a prize straddles the change of the set value, and the change of the set value is not accurately reflected.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to the means 10 of the third invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the third invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means B of the third invention described above.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

(Modification example 1)
For example, in the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the security cover 105SG500A is fixed to the outer frame 105SG001a is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 105SG003 side. May be good. Specifically, as a modification 1, as shown in FIGS. 66-14 (A) and 66-14 (B), a security cover 105SG500B composed of a short piece 105SG500Ba and a long piece 105SG500Bb is attached to, for example, a substrate case 105SG201. The right end of the long piece 105SG500Bb slides in the left-right direction between the coating position that covers the right end of the substrate case 105SG201 including the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 and the coating release position on the right side of the coating position. Installed so that it can be moved.

On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened, the security cover 105SG500B is slid to the right side with respect to the board case 105SG201, and the lock is locked through the through hole 105SG500Bc formed on the left side of the long piece 105SG500Bb. The switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 may be operated. That is, in the present modification 1, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, the security cover 105SG500B (long piece 105SG500Bb) covers the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 in the left-right direction with respect to the board case 105SG201. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the regulated state by restricting the slide movement to. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is open, the security cover 105SG500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 105SG201 to release the state of covering the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be brought into a state in which it can be released from the regulated state (it can be changed to a permissible state).

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 66-14 (A) and 66-14 (B), when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, the protruding dimension of the security cover 105SG500B from the board case 105SG201 is length L1. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened, the protruding dimension of the security cover 105SG500B from the board case 105SG201 is extended to the length L2 by sliding the security cover 105SG500B with respect to the board case 105SG201. (L2> L1).

That is, as shown in FIG. 66-15 (A), when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is rotated around a predetermined rotation axis and opened, the security cover 105SG500B has a protruding dimension from the substrate case 105SG201. By sliding the board case 105SG201 until it reaches the length L2 (pachinko gaming machine 1 is allowed), a pachinko game clerk or the like operates the lock switch 105SG051 or the setting changeover switch 105SG052. The set value of the machine 1 can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowable state, as shown in FIG. 66-15 (B), the security cover 105SG500B is attached to the board case 105SG201 until the protruding dimension from the board case 105SG201 becomes the length L1. On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not slid to move (unless the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the regulated state), the security cover 105SG500B comes into contact with the front end of the outer frame 105SG001a, making it impossible to close the gaming machine frame 105SG003. It has become.

Therefore, in the present modification 1, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 105SG003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state. Therefore, the lock switch 105SG051 is set by the security cover 105SG500B. It is possible to prevent forgetting to cover the changeover switch 105SG052, that is, to prevent the gaming machine frame 105SG003 from being closed without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and the security can be improved.

In the state where the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, the front end portion of the short piece 105SG500Ba is arranged between the outer frame 105SG001a and the gaming machine frame 105SG003, so that the movement from the covering position to the left-right direction is restricted. However, the security cover 105SG500B may be moved in the left-right direction as long as the state of covering the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is maintained by the security cover 105SG500B. ..

(Modification 2)
Further, as a form in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 105SG003 side, as shown in FIGS. 66-16 (A) and 66-16 (B) as a modification 2, the left end portion of the security cover 105SG500C is provided on the gaming machine. A cover position covering the right side of the substrate case 105SG201 including the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 and rotation from the cover position around the pivot axis 105SG500Cd provided on the back side of the frame 105SG003 and facing in the vertical direction. It may be rotatably pivotally supported from the uncovered position. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, the front end portion of the short piece 105SG500Ca is locked to the locking portion 105SG500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 105SG001a, and the long piece 105SG500Cb is set to switch with the lock switch 105SG051. The rotation of the switch 105SG052 from the back surface side to the back surface side may be restricted.

Then, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is opened, the security cover 105SG500C is rotated around the pivot 105SG500Cd (counterclockwise in a plan view) with respect to the board case 105SG201 to form the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052. It suffices to release the state of being covered with and make it operable. That is, in the present modification 2, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, the rotation is restricted with the security cover 105SG500C (long piece 105SG500Cb) covering the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052. As a result, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is open, the security cover 105SG500C is rotated around the pivot 105SG500Cd (counterclockwise in a plan view) with respect to the board case 105SG201 to rotate the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052. By releasing the covered state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be released from the regulated state (it can be changed to the allowable state).

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 66-17 (A), the security cover 105SG500C in the second modification is rotated around the pivot 105SG500Cd (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is allowed), so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowable state. The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by a clerk or the like operating the lock switch 105SG051 or the setting changeover switch 105SG052. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowable state, as shown in FIG. 66-17 (B), the security cover 105SG500C is rotated clockwise in a plan view and locked by the security cover 105SG500C. If the 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 are not covered (unless the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the regulated state), the security cover 105SG500C will come into contact with the front end of the outer frame 105SG001a and close the gaming machine frame 105SG003. Is impossible.

Therefore, in the present modification 2, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 105SG003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state. Therefore, the lock switch 105SG051 is set by the security cover 105SG500C. It is possible to prevent forgetting to cover the changeover switch 105SG052, that is, to prevent the gaming machine frame 105SG003 from being closed without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and the security can be improved.

(Modification example 3)
Further, in the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the gaming machine frame 105SG003 has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass door frame is not limited thereto. The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed by opening 105SG003a. When the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 105SG003a in this way, it is shown in FIGS. 66-18 (A) to 66-18 (C) as a modification 3. As described above, the through-hole 105SG003b may be formed in the lower part of the gaming machine frame 105SG003 so that the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 can be operated via the through-hole 105SG003b. In this case, the mounting surface of the IC or the like on the main board 11 is arranged toward the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 are on the side opposite to the mounting surface on the main board 11. Placed on the surface.

When the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 can be operated via the through port 105SG003b, a door body 105SG003c capable of opening and closing the through port 105SG003b is provided, and the door body 105SG003c is closed. The operation of the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 may be restricted. As shown in FIGS. 66-18 (B) and 66-18 (C), when the door body 105SG003c is provided on the front side of the game machine frame 105SG003, the door body is closed by closing the glass door frame 105SG003a. Since the 105SG003c is sandwiched between the glass door frame 105SG003a and the game machine frame 105SG003 so as to be openable and closable, the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 are illegally operated when the glass door frame 105SG003a is closed. Can be strongly prevented and security can be improved.

(Modification example 4)
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of executing a game using a gaming ball is disclosed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the pachinko gaming machine 1, each winning opening The number of game balls entering the (large winning opening, 2nd major winning opening, 1st starting winning opening, 2nd starting winning opening, general winning opening) is totaled, and the comparison, role ratio, base, etc. based on the total are calculated. It may be possible to calculate various prize information. When the winning information can be calculated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this way, as a modified example 4, as shown in FIG. 66-19 (A), the display monitor 105SG029 displays the winning ratio, the winning ratio, and the winning information. The base or the like may be displayable.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 66-19 (A) and 66-19 (B), the display monitor 105SG029 in the present modification 4 has a first display unit 105SG029105SG0A, a second display unit 105SG029B, and a third display. A unit 105SG029C, a fourth display unit 105SG029D, and a fifth display unit 105SG029E are provided. The first display unit 105SG029A to the fifth display unit 105SG029E are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 105SG029A to the fifth display unit 105SG029E can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

On the display monitor 105SG029, each item of display Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 66-19 (B) is displayed. The aggregated set values (1 to 3) are displayed on the first display unit 105SG029A of the first digit, and the aggregation period is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B of the second digit and the third display unit 105SG029C of the third digit. Then, the numerical value is displayed as a percentage on the fourth display unit 105SG029D of the fourth digit and the fifth display unit 105SG029E of the fifth digit. The display No. 1 displays the short-term continuous ratio, and the display No. 2 displays the short-term combination ratio. Display No. 3 displays the total cumulative ratio, and display No. 4 displays the total cumulative combination ratio. Further, in the display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls is displayed, and in the display No. 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60,000 prize balls is displayed. Will be done.

The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) was 6000. The period for obtaining the total cumulative total means the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset.

In the above example, the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the continuous ratio may be the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls due to winning a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second start winning opening in the high base state and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening in the big hit game state to the total number of prize balls. May be good. Further, the base may be calculated individually for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, "y6." Is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B and the third display unit 105SG029C, and when the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the second display unit is displayed. "Y7." Is displayed on the display unit 105SG029B and the third display unit 105SG029C. When the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E, and the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. If so, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." Is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B and the third display unit 105SG029C, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, "A7." Is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B and the third display unit 105SG029C. When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E, and the total cumulative combination of display No4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, "bL." Is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B and the third display unit 105SG029C, and when the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit "B6." Is displayed on the 105SG029B and the third display unit 105SG029C. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

Further, in the present modification 4, the main board 11 (CPU103) controls the display monitor 105SG029 to display the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. Here, the main board 11 controls to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 66-20 (A) is a time chart showing the display time of the items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 66-20 (A), when the display on the display monitor 105SG029 is started, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is first displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1, as shown in FIG. 66-20 (B-1), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 105SG029A, and "y" is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B. Is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 105SG029C. Further, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D, and the character "1." is displayed on the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

When the display of display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 66-20 (B-2), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 105SG029A, and "y" is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B. Is displayed, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 105SG029C. Further, the short-term combination ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E. For example, when the short-term combination ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D, and the character "3." is displayed on the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

When the display of display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3, as shown in FIG. 66-20 (B-3), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 105SG029A, and "A" is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B. Is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 105SG029C. Further, the total cumulative ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 105SG029D and the 5th display unit 105SG029E. For example, when the total cumulative ratio is 58%, the character "5." is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

When the display of display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative winning combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 66-20 (B-4), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 105SG029A, and "A" is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B. Is displayed, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 105SG029C. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 105SG029D and the 5th display unit 105SG029E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character "6." is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 66-20 (B-5). The display of the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 1 of the display No. 5, as shown in FIG. 66-20 (B-5), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 105SG029A, and the set value "1" is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B. The characters are displayed, and the characters "L." are displayed on the third display unit 105SG029C. Further, the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E display the base 1 calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D, and the character "0." is displayed on the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

When the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed as shown in FIG. 66-20 (B-6). The display of the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 2 of the display No. 6, as shown in FIG. 66-20 (B-6), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 105SG029A, and the set value "1" is displayed on the second display unit 105SG029B. The characters are displayed, and the characters "6." are displayed on the third display unit 105SG029C. Further, the fourth display unit 105SG029D and the fifth display unit 105SG029E display the base 2 calculated based on the immediately preceding 60,000 prize balls. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 105SG029D, and the character "2" is displayed on the fifth display unit 105SG029E.

Then, when the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 66-20 (B-1). The short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. After that, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 to the display of base 2 of display No. 6 are sequentially displayed every 5 seconds. Further, as for the display color, only the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is green, and the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 to the base 2 of the display No. 5 is red. In this way, the display monitor 105SG029 switches between the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 every 5 seconds for display.

Further, the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed in FIGS. 66-20 (A) and 66-20 (B-1) to 66. As shown in -20 (B-6), based on the operation of the display changeover switch 105SG030, the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, and base when the set value is "1". 1. Display of base 2, short-term connection ratio when the set value is "2", short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, display of base 1 and base 2, when the set value is "3" It is possible to sequentially change the display of the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2. If the display changeover switch 105SG030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "1", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 105SG029A is updated to "2", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display unit 105SG029D and the 5th display unit 105SG029E are updated. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "2".

In addition, when the display changeover switch 105SG030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "2", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 105SG029A is updated to "3", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display unit 105SG029D and the 5th display unit 105SG029E are updated. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "3".

Then, when the display changeover switch 105SG030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "3", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 105SG029A is updated to "1", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display unit 105SG029D and the 5th display unit 105SG029E are updated. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "1".

In the display monitor 105SG029 of the present modification 4, a form in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at each set value can be displayed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor is not limited to this. In 105SG029, among these ratios, combination ratios, and bases, only a numerical value of 1 or only a numerical value of any 2 may be displayed.

Further, in the present modification 4, a mode is illustrated in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of prize balls given, are calculated, and the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 105SG029. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 105SG029 may display the history of the number of prize balls given without calculating the joint ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. good.

Further, in the present modification 4, only the short-term continuous ratio is displayed in red on the display monitor 105SG029, and the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed in green. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be displayed in the same color different from the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, and the total cumulative combination ratio.

(Modification 5)

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited thereto. The change of the set value of may be feasible during the game. When changing the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during a game, for example, a clerk at the gaming hall first opens the gaming machine frame 105SG003, and then turns on the lock switch 105SG051 to turn on the display monitor 105SG029. After displaying the set value currently set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a clerk at the game hall or the like operates the setting changeover switch 105SG052 to change the value displayed on the display monitor 105SG029. Then, a clerk of the amusement park or the like pushes the lock switch 105SG051 to set the numerical value (set value) displayed on the display monitor 105SG029 as the set value of the new pachinko gaming machine 1, and also sets the backup area of the RAM 102. You just have to store it. After the new set value is set, the data such as the special figure hold storage and the normal figure hold storage may be deleted. In this way, by clearing the data such as the special figure hold memory and the normal figure hold memory, a new hold memory in which the variable display result becomes a big hit will be newly generated due to the change of the set value, or it will be newly variable. It is possible to prevent the winning ball device 6B from being opened (a hit on a normal figure occurs) and an unreasonably large hit on the variable display result during execution.

(Other disclosure contents)
Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a gaming machine frame 105SG003 capable of opening and closing the opening of the outer frame 105SG001a and a glass door frame 105SG003a capable of opening and closing the front surface of the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is applied as an opening / closing body has been exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and includes, for example, a front door capable of opening and closing the front opening of a housing, such as a slot machine. Further, not only the one that can be opened and closed by rotation, but also the one that can be opened and closed by sliding or attaching / detaching may be used.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 are applied as the operation unit is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 are included. Only one of them may be used, or other operation units having different operation modes (for example, pull operation, push operation, rotation operation, etc.) such as other switches, buttons, levers, dials, and touch sensors may be used.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, and 105SG500C are applied as the regulating member is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation unit is formed by such a plate-shaped member. The shape, size, material, and the like can be variously changed as long as the member is not a member to be covered but the operation of the operation portion can be regulated. More specifically, for example, the operation of the operation unit may be regulated by contacting the operation unit instead of covering the operation unit.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the security covers 105SG500A, 105SG500B, and 105SG500C as the regulating member need only be in a state where the operation unit is difficult to operate by covering the operation unit in the regulated state of the operation unit, and the operation is not always possible. It does not have to be.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a setting switching main body portion having an operation unit such as a lock switch 105SG051 and a setting switching switch 105SG052 is mounted on the main board 11 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , It may be provided on a substrate separate from the main substrate 11, may be housed in a case other than the board case 105SG201, or may not be housed in the board case 105SG201.

In the first and second modifications, the security covers 105SG500B and 105SG500C as the regulating members exemplify a mode in which the gaming machine frame 105SG003 cannot be closed in the uncovered position, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed. For example, an interlocking mechanism or the like that interlocks according to the closing operation of the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is provided so that the security covers 105SG500B and 105SG500C return from the coating release position to the coating position. May be good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the substrate case 105SG201 provided with the lock switch 105SG051 and the setting changeover switch 105SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited thereto. If it is provided at a position where it is difficult to operate when the gaming machine frame 105SG003 is closed, a glass door frame is provided at a location other than the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, in the front of the gaming machine frame 105SG003). It may be provided at a position closed by 105SG003a or at an outer frame 105SG001a or the like).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but for example, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to an image display device capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and the variable display result is derived according to the variable display result derived to the image display device. It can also be applied to slot machines that can generate prizes.

(Explanation of feature 112IW)
Next, the feature unit 112IW will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 67-1 and 67-2, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 112IW001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a (gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 47) and a game machine frame (underframe) 112IW003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 112IW003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 112IW003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 112IW003 with the left side as the center and the door closing position which closes the front surface. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 112IW003a, and when the glass door frame 112IW003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the gaming machine frame 112IW003 can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the clerk of the game hall into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and the player other than the clerk can open the gaming machine frame 112IW003 and the glass. The door frame 112IW003a cannot be opened.

The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case 112IW201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. Further, on the main board 11, the setting key 112IW051 for switching to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state described later, and the setting value such as the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the setting change state are changed. A setting changeover switch 112IW052 that functions as a setting switch is provided.

The setting switching main body unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is housed in the board case 112IW201 together with the main board 11, and the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the right side of the back surface of the board case 112IW201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 112IW201.

Since the board case 112IW201 having the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 52 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not possible when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. It is possible, and the operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using a predetermined door key. Further, since the setting key 112IW051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the setting key 112IW051. The setting key 112IW051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later. In the feature unit 112IW, the form in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys is illustrated, but one key may be used in combination.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67-8 (A), the substrate case 112IW201 is provided with a display monitor 112IW029 and a display changeover switch 112IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 112IW029. The display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged in the upper left portion of the board case 112IW201. That is, the display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are arranged in front of the board case 112IW201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is not opened, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

As described above, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 in the feature unit 112IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be operated from the inside of the game island where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in the feature unit 112IW, as shown in FIGS. 67-2 and 67-3, the right end portion of the outer frame 112IW001a includes a setting key 112IW051 and a setting changeover switch 52 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. A security cover 112IW500A that covers the right side of the board case 112IW201 from the back side is attached. The security cover 112IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 112IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 112IW500Ab extending from the rear end portion of the short piece 112IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is composed of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having transparency. The vertical dimension of the short piece 112IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 112IW201. Further, the security cover 112IW500A is fixed to the right end portion of the outer frame 112IW001a via the front end portion of the short piece 112IW500Aa.

As shown in FIG. 67-2, the long piece 112IW500Ab abuts (or approaches) the right portion of the board case 112IW201 from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. As a result, the right side portion of the board case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are inoperable by the long piece 112IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 67-3, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 move together with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 from the long piece 112IW500Ab. By separating the pieces, the covering state of the long piece 112IW500Ab is released, and the operation becomes operable.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 112IW, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the security cover 112IW500A regulates the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. While the state is maintained, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open, the above-mentioned restricted state by the security cover 112IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is permitted. It becomes a state.

Since the board case 112IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. The set value cannot be changed by operating the setting key 112IW051 or the setting changeover switch 112IW052 unless the pachinko / pachislot machine clerk or the like opens the gaming machine frame 112IW003 with the door key.

However, even if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a gaming island (not shown) in the game field, for example, with another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. A setting key 112IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by allowing an illegal member such as a wire or a cell plate to enter between the gaming device such as a card unit or a spacer member installed between the pachinko gaming machines 1 and the pachinko gaming machine 1. And the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may cause fraudulent acts such as changing the set value. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the security cover 112IW500A switches the setting with the setting key 112IW051. By maintaining the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the switch 112IW052 is regulated, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suitably suppressed.

Further, even in a regulated state in which the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed and the back right side of the board case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is covered by the security cover 112IW500A, the substrate is passed through the transparent security cover 112IW500A. Since the main board 11 and the like housed in the case 112IW201 can be seen through, the status of the mounting surface on the main board 11 on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted, the seal, and the like can be easily confirmed.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as a work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the side of the main board 11 by executing the random number generation program.

In the feature unit 112IW, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the normal figure display result determination Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR4 and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 67-4 and 67-5, which are prepared by the CPU 103 for performing various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 67-4 (A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 67-4 (B), and FIG. 67. In addition to the display result determination table (set value 3) shown in -4 (C) and the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 67-5 (A), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown) and the small hit variation pattern determination table (not shown). (Not shown), a loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67-6, a normal figure display result determination table (not shown), a normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 112IW has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value is composed of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 having the lowest payout rate and increasing the value in the order of 1, 2 and 3 increasing the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2, 3 the advantage increases stepwise. In this feature unit 112IW, the winning probability of a small hit is the same regardless of the set value.

(Display result judgment table)
FIGS. 67-4 (A) to 67-4 (C) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 67-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. In the case of, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 at the time of non-probability change, 1/32 at the time of probability change) than when the set values are "2" and "3". On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "2" and "3". It is designed to do. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display (1/320 at the time of non-probability change, 1/32 at the time of probability change). do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, the probability (1/2) is higher than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. You will win the prize.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/300 at the time of non-probability change, 1/30 at the time of probability change) than in a certain case. On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "3". It is designed to do. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display (1/300 at the time of non-probability change, 1/30 at the time of probability change). do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is the target of variable display, and the set value. The small hit is won with the same probability (1/2) as when is "1" and "3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 67-4 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability than the case of "2" (1/280 at the time of non-probability change, 1/28 at the time of probability change). On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "2". It is designed to do. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display (1/280 at the time of non-probability change, 1/28 at the time of probability change). do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is the target of variable display, and the set value. The small hit is won with the same probability (1/2) as when is "1" and "2".

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to any of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 67-4 (A) to 67-4 (C). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 67-4 (A) to (C), it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 67-4 (A) to 67-4 (C) indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a jackpot means determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit game state, but stop at the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 67-4, the case where the winning probability of the small hit is the same regardless of the set value is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, as in the case of the big hit winning probability, the small hit winning probability may be increased as the set value increases in the order of 1, 2, and 3. Further, in this case, the setting difference of the winning probability of the small hit may be the same ratio as the setting difference of the winning probability of the big hit. Specifically, if the probability of winning a small hit at the set value "1" is 1/100, the probability of winning a small hit at the set value "2" is designed to be 1 / 93.75. The probability of winning a small hit at the set value "3" may be set to 1 / 87.5.

Further, in a gaming machine without a small hit, the configuration shown by the feature unit 112IW may be applied.

Further, in the feature unit 112IW, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit by using the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 67-4 (A) to 67-4 (C). A big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table are provided separately, and the big hit judgment can be made depending on whether the first special symbol is a variable display or the second special symbol is a variable display regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. A common table may be used, and the small hit may be determined using separate tables depending on whether the variable special figure designation buffer is the first or the second.

Further, in this feature unit 112IW, the case where the advantage is higher in the order of the set value "1" <set value "2" <set value "3" is shown. May be configured to change. For example, it is applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability / high base state, maintains a high probability / high base state until the next big hit occurs, and is configured to obtain a certain amount of prize balls in a small hit game. In this example, as shown in Fig. 67-4, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit occurs with a high probability of 1/2 and a prize ball is likely to be obtained. In a specific gaming state (high probability / high base state in this example), unlike other gaming states, a big hit is unlikely to occur (high probability / high base state is likely to continue). The value "1" may be set to have the highest advantage.

Further, for example, when the same probability change is applied to a gaming machine in which the probability change state ends based on the execution of the variation display of a predetermined number of times (the number of times the probability change ends) after being controlled to the probability change state (high probability state). If it is the number of ends, the probability variation continuation rate (consecutive villa rate) may be increased in the order of set value "1" <set value "2" <set value "3".

The feature unit 112IW provides a total of three set values of 1 to 3 as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 2 or 4 or more.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 67-5 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this feature unit 112IW, the jackpot type is determined by using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed). A common jackpot type determination table is used when determining the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning in the second start winning slot (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Although it is configured to be used, different tables may be provided so that the ratio of which jackpot type is determined is different.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. A table referenced to determine one.

In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 67-5 (A), the determination values corresponding to the random numbers (MR2) for determining the jackpot type are assigned to each set value, but they are assigned for the sake of simplification of the explanation. The ratio of the determined judgment values is shown. That is, the ratio of which of the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C is determined for each set value is shown. The loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67-6 and the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67-7, which will be described later, are also actually assigned determination values corresponding to random numbers. To simplify, the percentage of assigned determination values is shown.

As shown in FIG. 67-5 (A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the set value is "1", the ratio of being determined to the jackpot type C is high, and when the set value is "2", When the rate determined for the jackpot type B is high and the set value is "3", the determination value is assigned so that the rate determined for the jackpot type A is high.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 112IW will be described with reference to FIG. 67-5 (B). In the feature unit 112IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in the jackpot game are determined for each jackpot type. Has been done.

The fanfare period is, for example, a period during which the jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 12, the start of the jackpot game state is started. This is the period during which the fanfare effect as the effect effect to be notified is executed.

The interval period is, for example, a period during which the post-opening process of the jackpot in step S116 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the round of opening the jackpot on the effect control board 12 side is completed, the next This is the period during which the interval effect is executed as the effect operation for notifying the start of the round.

The ending period is, for example, a period during which the jackpot end process of step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed on the effect control board 12 side. It is a period to be done.

As shown in FIG. 67-5 (B), the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are the longest in the case of the jackpot type A, then the longest in the case of the jackpot type B, and the longest in the case of the jackpot type C. It is set to be short.

As described above, in the feature unit 112IW, when the set value is "1", the ratio of determining the jackpot type C is high, so that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the ratio of determining the jackpot type A is high, so that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively long. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

The feature unit 112IW is configured so that the winning probability (ball output rate) of the jackpot increases in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". The average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of "<" 2 "<" 3 ". With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the game is gambling. Can be prevented from becoming too high.

The feature unit 112IW is configured to be able to execute a jackpot suggestion effect (details will be described later) that suggests a set value during the jackpot game, and this jackpot suggestion effect is performed during the fanfare period, interval period, and ending. It is feasible in the period. With such a configuration, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be enhanced. In addition, by directing the player's attention to the suggestion effect during the big hit, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the length of each period.

In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is difficult for the player to notice the length of the period is commonly executed.

Further, in this feature unit 112IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are set for each jackpot type, and the ratio of which jackpot type is determined is different for each set value, so that the jackpot can be hit. When the winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, interval period and ending period is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the setting is not limited to such a configuration. The fanfare period, interval period, and ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table in which the judgment values are set so that the ratio of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in which the relatively long period is set increases in the order of the jackpot types A <B <C is used. As a result, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be increased in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

In the feature unit 112IW, in any of the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C, the time saving control and the probability variation control executed after the end of the jackpot game state are characterized by a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 112IW). It ends when the figure game is executed or when the special figure game is entered into the jackpot game state before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. For example, the number of time reduction control and the probability variation control is different for each jackpot type. Alternatively, in the case of a specific jackpot type, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. It may be done. In the case of such a specific jackpot type, the jackpot game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state, which is a so-called consecutive villa state. The feature unit 112IW is configured so that the ratio of big hits differs for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, the probability change continues for each set value. The rate (consecutive villa rate) may be different.

Further, in this feature unit 112IW, there is no difference in the advantage (for example, the number of rounds during the jackpot game, the presence / absence of time reduction control and the probability variation control, the number of controls, etc.) between the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C, and the fanfare period and interval. The average period of the period and the ending period is configured to be different, but for example, the number of rounds during the jackpot game, the presence / absence of time reduction control and probability variation control, and the number of controls are different for each jackpot type, and the advantage is different. You may do so. In this case, the effect during the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type.

It should be noted that the feature unit 112IW exemplifies a form in which the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is determined at a different ratio from the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C according to the set value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value set, one of the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C cannot be determined. There may be more than one. In other words, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types should not be determined (the determination rate is 0%), or a specific jackpot type should be 100%. Included in determining by percentage.

Further, in this feature unit 112IW, the case where the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period are different depending on the jackpot type is shown, but not limited to such a mode, the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending are not limited to the jackpot type. It may be configured so that the period is different. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be uniformly determined according to any of the set values "1" to "3". Further, for example, a lottery process with a selection probability according to the set value is performed according to any of the set values "1" to "3", and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are determined. You may.

In this way, in this feature unit 112IW, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result becomes a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved. ..

In the feature unit 112IW, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is a special figure display result. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determination.

Further, in the feature unit 112IW, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability and the small hit probability increase, and the jackpot type C as the jackpot type is easily determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

Further, the feature unit 112IW exemplifies a mode in which the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game playability itself does not change, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a specific round during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through a predetermined count switch, the rate at which the game ball passes through the count switch during the big hit game differs depending on the big hit type. When the property (so-called V probability variation type) is set and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the high base is medium (time reduction control). In the middle), the game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) may be set in which the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state based on passing through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, although the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same as those set in 1 to 3, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability are higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4) may be provided.

Further, when the game playability is changed according to the set value in this way, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, the effect switch (the game ball passes through the count switch) is passed through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time, and when the set value is 2 or 3, the predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (game ball). It may be used as a switch for controlling the gaming state to the probability change state or the jackpot gaming state based on passing through the count switch).

(Variation pattern judgment table)
Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is predetermined to set the fluctuation display result to "big hit" and the fluctuation display result to be "small hit". A small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table used when is pre-determined and a loss fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is pre-determined to make the fluctuation display result "miss" are prepared in advance. ..

(Loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 67-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. In this feature unit 112IW, the period from the time when the setting is changed at the time of turning on the power until the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example) (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period) and the other period (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period). Hereinafter, it is also referred to as a non-special period), and is configured to use different loss fluctuation pattern determination tables.

Specifically, in the special period, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67-6 (A), and in the non-special period, it is shown in FIG. 67-6 (B). The fluctuation pattern is determined using the second loss fluctuation pattern determination table. In the feature unit 112IW, the period from the time when the setting is changed when the power is turned on to the time when the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example) is set as a special period, but the present invention is limited to this. For example, the period until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) may be set as a special period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. Further, a special period may be set by using a real-time clock or the like as long as it is in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). In addition, the period until the first big hit may occur may be a special period.

In the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 67-6 (A) and 67-6 (B), normal reach loss and super reach loss are obtained in the order of set values "1" <"2" <"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio is high and the ratio of non-reach loss is low. With such a configuration, since the execution rate of normal reach and super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value is suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach and super reach.

Further, the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67-6 (A) has a higher ratio of normal reach loss than the second loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67-6 (B), and further, a set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between them becomes large. With such a configuration, in the special period, it is easier to recognize the difference in the frequency of normal reach execution than in the non-special period (that is, it is easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value), so that the motive for playing the game in the special period is Can be given, and the entertainment of the game can be enhanced.

For example, the fluctuation pattern with super reach (or a specific fluctuation pattern among them) is determined at the same ratio regardless of the difference in the set value (or the difference between the special period and the non-special period). You may do so. By doing so, the execution rate differs only for a specific fluctuation pattern (normal reach loss in this example) according to the set value, and the set value is suggested by the frequency with which the specific fluctuation pattern is executed. become. On the contrary, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern that causes the super reach loss may be different depending on the set value.

Further, the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 67-6 (A) and 67-6 (B) are either normal reach loss or super reach loss when other than non-reach loss, depending on the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio (that is, the balance of normal reach loss: super reach loss) is different. Specifically, in the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67-6 (A), the ratio of normal reach loss increases remarkably in the order of set values "1" <"2" <"3" (this example). Then, it increases by 5%). Specifically, in the second loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67-6 (B), the normal reach loss is in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". The ratio of is slightly higher (in this example, it is increased by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency between the normal reach loss and the super reach loss. In addition, the difference in selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period can be increased.

In this feature unit 112IW, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at different ratios according to the set value, but this depends on the execution ratios of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss as a whole depending on the set value. This is a concept that includes that the execution ratios of normal reach loss and super reach loss are different, and that only normal reach loss has different execution ratios depending on the set value.

The feature unit 112IW displays a common background image in the image display device 5 when any of the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 67-6 (A) and 67-6 (B) is used. Then, the effect pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Further, when the set value is set to any of 1 to 3, the image display device 5 displays a common background image and displays the effect symbol in a variable manner. The dedicated background image may be displayed only during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game interest during the special period or the period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example).

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the example of the feature unit 112IW. (Selected only in) may be provided so that the special variation pattern can be selected only in a special period. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a special period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

(Non-reach loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 67-7 is an explanatory diagram showing a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table. In this feature unit 112IW, a plurality of types of non-reach loss fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times are provided, and when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be non-reach loss, it is further determined to be one of non-reach loss A to C. It is configured in. Not limited to such a configuration, for example, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67-6 may include non-reach loss A to C, and any of non-reach loss A to C, normal reach loss, and super reach loss. It may be configured to determine the crab.

As shown in FIG. 67-7, in the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table, when the set value is "1", the ratio of non-reach loss C (variation time 7 seconds) is high, and the set value is "2". When the value is "3", the ratio determined to non-reach loss B (variation time 8 seconds) is high, and when the set value is "3", the ratio determined to non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds) is high. Judgment value is assigned to.

In the feature unit 112IW, when the set value is "1", the rate of determination as non-reach loss C is high, so that the fluctuation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the rate of determination as non-reach loss A is high, so that the fluctuation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

The feature unit 112IW is configured so that the winning probability (ball output rate) of the jackpot increases in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". It is also configured so that the average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of "<" 2 "<" 3 ". With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling becomes too high. Can be prevented.

The feature unit 112IW is configured so that the average fluctuation time is different by changing the ratio of non-reach loss A to C having different fluctuation times according to the set value. A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) may be provided so that the fluctuation time is different, and the selected ratio may be different depending on the set value. In addition, when multiple types of fluctuation patterns (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) are provided so that the fluctuation time is different, the time of the shaking display of the effect symbol and the time of the high-speed fluctuation display may be different to perform the effect, etc. It is desirable that there is no difference in appearance.

Further, in the present feature unit 112IW, the average fluctuation time is configured to be different according to the set value, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the final effect symbol (final) is determined according to the set value. The period during which the stop symbol) is displayed as a stop may be different. With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the period during which the final stop symbol (final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed. , It is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Further, in this feature unit 112IW, the fluctuation time is set for each of the non-reach loss A to C, and the ratio of which of the non-reach loss A to C is determined is different for each set value, so that the jackpot is won. When the probability (ball output rate) is set high, the average fluctuation time is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern is not limited to such a configuration. Is fixedly set, and the fluctuation time may be longer when the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is set higher.

The feature unit 112IW is provided with a variation pattern for shortening the variation time, which is shorter than other variation patterns. For example, a variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (variation time 1.5 seconds), which is shorter than the non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds), is provided. Then, this variation pattern for shortening is configured to be used, for example, when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more. In such a configuration, when the number of reserved memories has reached the upper limit or is close to the upper limit, this state is eliminated and the variable display is efficiently performed (that is, the game is efficiently advanced). ) Is the purpose. Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the number of reserved memories is equal to or more than a predetermined number. Therefore, in the feature unit 112IW, the variation pattern for shortening used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or more than a predetermined number has a common variation time regardless of the set value. Regardless of the configuration of the feature unit 112IW, the variation time for shortening used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or greater than a predetermined number may be different depending on the set value.

(Display monitor 112IW029)
In this feature unit 112IW, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of game balls entering each winning opening (large winning opening, second major winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, general winning opening) It is possible to perform aggregation and calculate various winning information such as a continuous ratio, a winning combination ratio, and a base based on the aggregation.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 67-8 (A) and 67-8 (B), the display monitor 112IW029 has the first display unit 112IW029A, the second display unit 112IW029B, the third display unit 112IW029C, and the fourth display unit 112IW029A. It includes a display unit 112IW029D and a fifth display unit 112IW029E. The first display unit 112IW029A to the fifth display unit 112IW029E are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 112IW029A to the fifth display unit 112IW029E can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

On the display monitor 112IW029, each item of display Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 67-8 (B) is displayed. The aggregated set values (1 to 3) are displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A of the first digit, and the aggregation period is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B of the second digit and the third display unit 112IW029C of the third digit. Then, the numerical value is displayed as a percentage on the fourth display unit 112IW029D of the fourth digit and the fifth display unit 112IW029E of the fifth digit. The display No. 1 displays the short-term continuous ratio, and the display No. 2 displays the short-term combination ratio. Display No. 3 displays the total cumulative ratio, and display No. 4 displays the total cumulative combination ratio. Further, in the display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls is displayed, and in the display No. 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60,000 prize balls is displayed. Will be done.

The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) was 6000. The period for obtaining the total cumulative total means the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset.

In the above example, the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the continuous ratio may be the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls due to winning a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second start winning opening in the high base state and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening in the big hit game state to the total number of prize balls. May be good. Further, the base may be calculated individually for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, "y6." Is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C, and when the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the second display unit is displayed. "Y7." Is displayed on the display unit 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C. When the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E, and the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. If so, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." Is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, "A7." Is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C. When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the 4th display unit 112IW029D and the 5th display unit 112IW029E, and the total cumulative ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, "bL." Is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C, and when the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit "B6." Is displayed on the 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

Further, in the feature unit 112IW, the main board 11 (CPU103) controls the display monitor 112IW029 to display the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. Here, the main board 11 controls to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 67-9 (A) is a time chart showing the display time of the items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 67-9 (A), when the display on the display monitor 112IW029 is started, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is first displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1, as shown in FIG. 67-9 (B-1), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A, and "y" is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. Is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. Further, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 112IW029D and the 5th display unit 112IW029E. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the character "1." is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the display of display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 67-9 (B-2), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A, and "y" is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. Is displayed, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. Further, the short-term combination ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E. For example, when the short-term combination ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the character "3." is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the display of display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3, as shown in FIG. 67-9 (B-3), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A, and "A" is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. Is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. Further, the total cumulative ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 112IW029D and the 5th display unit 112IW029E. For example, when the total cumulative ratio is 58%, the character "5." is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the display of display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative winning combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 67-9 (B-4), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A, and "A" is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. Is displayed, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 112IW029D and the 5th display unit 112IW029E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character "6." is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 67-9 (B-5). The display of the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 1 of the display No. 5, as shown in FIG. 67-9 (B-5), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A, and the set value "1" is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. The characters are displayed, and the characters "L." are displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. Further, the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E display the base 1 calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the character "0." is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed as shown in FIG. 67-9 (B-6). The display of the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 2 of the display No. 6, as shown in FIG. 67-9 (B-6), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A, and the set value "1" is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. The characters are displayed, and the characters "6." are displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. Further, the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E display the base 2 calculated based on the immediately preceding 60,000 prize balls. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the character "2" is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

Then, when the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 67-9 (B-1). The short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. After that, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 to the display of base 2 of display No. 6 are sequentially displayed every 5 seconds. Further, as for the display color, only the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is green, and the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 to the base 2 of the display No. 5 is red. In this way, the display monitor 112IW029 switches between the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 every 5 seconds for display.

Further, the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed in FIGS. 67-9 (A) and 67-9 (B-1) to 67. As shown in -9 (B-6), based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030, the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, and base when the set value is "1". 1. Display of base 2, short-term connection ratio when the set value is "2", short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, display of base 1 and base 2, when the set value is "3" It is possible to sequentially change the display of the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2. If the display changeover switch 112IW030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "1", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 112IW029A is updated to "2", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display unit 112IW029D and the 5th display unit 112IW029E are updated. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "2".

If the display changeover switch 112IW030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "2", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 112IW029A is updated to "3", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E are updated. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "3".

Then, when the display changeover switch 112IW030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "3", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 112IW029A is updated to "1", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E are updated. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "1".

In the feature unit 112IW, the display monitor 112IW029 exemplifies a form in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at each set value can be displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display is not limited to this. The monitor 112IW029 may be able to display only a numerical value of 1 or only a numerical value of any 2 of these ratios, combination ratios, and bases.

In addition, the feature unit 112IW exemplifies a form in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of prize balls given, are calculated, and the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 112IW029. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 112IW029 may display the history of the number of prize balls given without calculating the joint ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. good.

Further, in the feature unit 112IW, only the short-term continuous ratio is displayed in red on the display monitor 112IW029, and the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed in green. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be displayed in the same color different from the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, and the total cumulative combination ratio.

(Setting change processing)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 112IW will be described. 67-10 and 67-11 are flowcharts showing the game control main processing in the feature unit 112IW. In the feature unit 112IW, the processing of steps IWS001 to S002 is the same as the processing of steps S1 to S2 shown in FIG. 49.

When the initial settings are made, the CPU 103 waits for the effect control means to start the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) for measuring the time until the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) starts when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. Set the timer (step 112IWS003). In this case, the effect control means activation waiting timer is set with a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the activation of the effect control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 112IWS004), and confirms whether or not the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 112IWS005). If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 112IWS004 and the processes of steps 112IWS004 to S005 are repeatedly executed. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 112IWS006.

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS003 to S005, the processes after step 112IWS006 are executed after waiting until the effect control CPU 120 is started, and the setting values are changed and confirmed, and the RAM initialization and recovery processes are executed. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a setting value command, an initialization specification command, and a recovery command, which will be described later, are transmitted before the effect control CPU 120 is started, and the command is missed. It can be prevented from occurring.

Next, the CPU 103 clears, for example, a factory-factory setting flag indicating that the RAM 102 is still set at the factory-shipped (for example, this flag is cleared even if the RAM clearing processes 1 and 2 and the recovery processing described later are executed. (Cleared when the setting change process described later is executed) is set so that it is not set, and in step 112IWS006, it is confirmed whether or not this factory default setting flag is set. do it. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, a value indicating that the factory default value is set (for example, "0" or "-") is set as the set value, and the value of the set value is set in step 112IWS006. May be checked to see if is still at the factory default. If the factory default settings are used (step 112 IWS006; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

If it is not the factory default setting (step 112IWS006; Yes), that is, if the set value has already been changed at least once, the CPU 103 backs up to the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same process as in step S4. It is determined whether or not the data is stored (step 112IWS007). Specifically, in step 112IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 112 IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (performed by using an error detection code) by the same process as in step S5, and the data is normal. Whether or not it is determined (step 112 IWS008). In step 112 IWS008, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 112 IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 112IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting changing flag indicating that the setting value is being changed is set (step 112IWS009). ). If the setting changing flag is set (step 112IWS009; No), that is, if a power failure occurs during the change of the setting value and the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted, the process proceeds to step IWS010.

In step 112IWS010, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 112IWS010). The CPU 103 may control the display monitor 112IW029 to display a display (for example, display of "E") indicating that a RAM error has occurred.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS011). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS012). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS013). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 1 process (step 112IWS014). In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, in the storage area of the RAM 102, an area other than the area for storing information for performance display such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base as shown in FIGS. 67-8 and 67-9 is used. It is cleared, and information for performance display such as connection ratio, combination ratio, and base is not cleared and is retained. Further, in the RAM clear 1 process, the value of the set value stored in the RAM 102 is also cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS027.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is off (N in step 112IWS011), when the setting key 112IW051 is off (N in step 112IWS012), or when the output signal from the clear switch is off (N in step 112IWS012). In step 112IWS013 N), the process does not shift to step 112IWS014, but shifts to loop processing.

When the processes of steps 112IWS006 to S014 are executed, the backup RAM is not normal in the feature unit 112IW (N in steps 112IWS007 and S008), or the factory default settings remain (step 112IWS007, S008). In the case of 112IWS006 Y), if a power failure occurs during the setting change (Y in step 112IWS009), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 open. The RAM is cleared on the condition that the setting value can be changed after step 112IWS027. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened and the setting key 112IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, the loop processing is executed, the set value cannot be changed, and the gaming control does not proceed.

If the setting changing flag is not set (step 112IWS009; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS015).

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS016). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS017). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation process start command indicating that the setting confirmation process is started to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS018). When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation process start command, it controls to notify that the setting is being confirmed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or a predetermined image is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. Or a decorative light emitter such as a decorative LED is made to emit light in a predetermined manner).

Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019).

When the setting confirmation process is completed, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step 112 IWS020) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped by the same process as in step S6. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation processing end command indicating that the setting confirmation processing is completed to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS021). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on (N in step 112IWS016) or when the setting key 112IW051 is not on (N in step 112IWS017), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as in step S6. (Step 112IWS022) is performed to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 by the same process as in step S7 (step 112IWS023). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 2 process (step 112IWS024). In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 processing, of the storage areas of the RAM 102, the area for storing information for performance display such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base as shown in FIGS. 67-8 and 67-9, and the set value. The area other than the area for storing is cleared, and the information for performance display such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, and the information of the set value are not cleared and are retained.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS025). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS026). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 sets the setting changing flag (step 112IWS027).

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change processing start command indicating that the setting change processing is started to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS028). When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting change processing start command, it controls to notify that the setting is being changed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or a predetermined image is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. Or a decorative light emitter such as a decorative LED is made to emit light in a predetermined manner).

Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting change process (step 112IWS029).

When the setting change process is completed, the CPU 103 resets the setting changing flag (step 112IWS030). Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set set value to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS031). Further, a setting change processing end command indicating that the setting change processing is completed is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS032). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on (N in step 112IWS025) or when the setting key 112IW051 is not on (N in step 112IWS026), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as in step S9. Therefore, an effect control command instructing initialization is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step S9). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

In the feature unit 112IW, the processing of steps IWS034 to S036 is the same as the processing of steps S10 to S12 shown in FIG. 49.

Next, the setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019) will be described. FIG. 67-12 (A) is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019).

In the setting confirmation process, the CPU 103 first identifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the specified setting value on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSA01).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWSA02). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSA03). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the process proceeds to step 112IWSA02, and the processes of steps 112IWSA02 to SA03 are repeatedly executed. That is, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the open state and the setting key 112IW051 is on, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029.

If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes a setting confirmation error process (step 112IWSA04). Then, after that, the process shifts to loop processing. In step 112IWSA04, for example, the CPU 103 may transmit a command indicating that a setting confirmation error occurs, and execute the setting confirmation error notification based on the reception of the command on the effect control CPU 120 side. good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by lighting an error LED on a board mounted on the gaming machine. Further, in this example, when the setting confirmation error processing is executed, the process shifts to the loop processing, and then the error state is continued until the power is turned on again so that the processing does not proceed.

If the setting key 112IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSA05). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the process of step 112IWSA05 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on (that is, if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the closed state), the setting confirmation process ends.

Next, the setting change process (step 112IWS029) will be described. FIG. 67-12 (B) is a flowchart showing a setting change process (step 112IWS029).

In the setting change process, the CPU 103 first identifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the specified setting value on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSB01).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is on (step 112IWSB02). If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is not on, the process proceeds to step 112IWSB05. If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is ON (Y in step 112IWSB02), the CPU 103 updates and displays the setting value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSB03). For example, when "1" is displayed as a set value on the display monitor 112IW029, the display of the display monitor 112IW029 is updated to "2", and "2" is displayed as a set value on the display monitor 112IW029. The display of the display monitor 112IW029 may be updated to "3", and when "3" is displayed as a set value on the display monitor 112IW029, the display of the display monitor 112IW029 may be updated to "1". Further, the CPU 103 stores the set value (updated set value) displayed on the display monitor 112IW0029 in the backup area of the RAM 102 (updates and stores the set value already stored) (step 112IWSB04).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWSB05). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSB06). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the process proceeds to step 112IWSB02, and the processes of steps 112IWSB02 to SB06 are repeatedly executed. That is, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the open state and the setting key 112IW051 is on, the processes of steps 112IWSB02 to SB06 are repeatedly executed.

If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes the setting change error processing (step 112IWSB07). Then, after that, the process shifts to loop processing. In step 112IWSB07, for example, the CPU 103 may transmit a command indicating that a setting change error occurs, and execute the setting change error notification based on the command received by the effect control CPU 120 side. good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by lighting an error LED on a board mounted on the gaming machine. Further, in this example, when the setting change error processing is executed, the process shifts to the loop processing, and then the error state is continued until the power is turned on again so that the processing does not proceed. In this case, since the setting changing flag is still set in step 112IWS027, the RAM clear 1 process is executed after the power is turned on again (see Y and 112IWS014 in step 112IWS009). The error state will be cleared.

If the setting key 112IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSB08). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the process of step 112IWSB08 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on (that is, if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the closed state), the setting change process is terminated.

FIG. 67-13 is an explanatory diagram showing a process executed when the power is turned on. In this feature unit 112IW, as shown in FIG. 67-13, when the setting key 112IW051 is turned on when the power is turned on (furthermore, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is turned on), the clear switch is turned on. If, the setting change process (step 112IWS005-S010) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process (step 112IWS015-S017) is executed. If the setting key 112IW051 is off when the power is turned on, the initialization process (step S8) is executed if the clear switch is on, and the recovery process (step S6) is executed if the clear switch is off. Will be executed.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 67-14 (A) and 67-14 (B), when the power is turned off (powered off) by the operation of a clerk at the amusement park or the like, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied. When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 112IW029 ends. If the large winning opening is open during a big hit game or a small hit game at the timing when the power is turned off, the large winning opening is closed by stopping the supply of electric power to the solenoid 82.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67-14 (C), when the clerk of the game hall or the like turns on the power while operating the clear switch (in the case of Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on. The setting change process is executed by the CPU 103 on the condition that the setting value is set to, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029.

In the state where the set value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in this way, as shown in FIG. 67-14 (D), the CPU 103 each time it detects the operation of the setting changeover switch 112IW052 by a clerk of the amusement park or the like. The numerical value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is sequentially updated (for example, every time the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is operated, it is updated as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 → ...).

Next, as shown in FIG. 67-14 (E), the CPU 103 sets the set value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 to the RAM 102 based on the fact that the setting key 112IW051 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the amusement park or the like. Store (update storage) in the backup area of. At this time, the CPU 103 blinks the display monitor 112IW029 to notify the clerk of the amusement park that the new set value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102. If the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the hold storage is cleared. Further, when the big winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 67-14 (A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear processing is executed when the setting is changed. As the memory about the jackpot is erased, the jackpot remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 finishes the setting change process, and is in a state where the game can be played, that is, a state in which the fluctuation display result, the jackpot type, the lottery for determining the fluctuation pattern, the payout of the prize ball, and the like can be executed.

In the setting change process in the feature unit 112IW, a mode in which the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. As the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process, the setting value most disadvantageous to the player (“1” in the case of the feature unit 112IW) or the most advantageous to the player. The set value (“3” in the case of this feature unit 112IW) may be displayed.

(Special design normal processing)
Next, the processing of the special symbol normal processing (step S110) in the feature unit 112IW will be described. 67-15 and 67-16 are flowcharts showing a special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total reserved storage number (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) (step 112IWS101). For example, check the count value of the total pending storage counter for counting the total pending storage.

If the total number of reserved storages is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second number of reserved storages is 0 (step 112IWS102). For example, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the second hold storage number counter for counting the second hold storage number is 0. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to the data indicating "second" (step 112IWS103). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 112IWS104).

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS102 to S104, in the feature unit 112IW, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are displayed according to the starting winning order in which the game ball is won in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. And may be configured to execute.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 112IWS105). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 112IWS106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first hold storage counter and sets each storage area in the first hold storage buffer. Shift the content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second hold storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second hold storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 is placed in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or the first reserved storage number). The order of the second reserved memory) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total reserved storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage counter is subtracted by 1 (step 112IWS107). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 112 IWS108). As described above, in the feature unit 112, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change process is executed at the time of turning on the power by executing the process of step 112IWS011, but even after the power is turned on, the step The setting value command is transmitted every time the variation display is started by executing the process of 112IWS108.

Even if the same fluctuation pattern is used, if different fluctuation pattern commands are sent for each set value, the total number of fluctuation patterns x the number of set values (3 in this example) of fluctuation pattern commands are required. Therefore, the data capacity may increase. Therefore, for example, even if the set value command is transmitted only when a specific fluctuation pattern is used, and only the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the specific fluctuation pattern is provided with the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the set value. good. In this case, for example, the set value command is sent only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation with the highest output frequency is used, and only the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation is the fluctuation pattern command for the number of the set value. May be provided.

Further, in this example, the case where the same setting value command is transmitted by the setting value command (see step 112IWS011) transmitted at the time of turning on the power and the setting value command (see step 112IWS108) transmitted at the start of fluctuation is shown. It is not limited to any mode. For example, even if the setting value command for turning on the power and the setting value command for starting fluctuation are configured as separate commands, different setting value commands are sent at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation. good.

Further, in this example, the case where the setting value command is transmitted separately from the fluctuation pattern command is shown at the start of fluctuation, but it is configured to transmit the effect control command that is used as both the fluctuation pattern command and the setting value command. May be good. In this case, for example, even if the fluctuation pattern command specifies the same fluctuation pattern A, if the setting value is "1", the fluctuation pattern command A-1 is transmitted, and if the setting value is "2", the fluctuation pattern command A-1 is transmitted. The variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and if the set value is "3", the variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted.

Further, the game control microcomputer 100 side is configured to be able to output the same fluctuation pattern command (for example, fluctuation pattern command A) regardless of the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 side is configured to output which set value. It may be configured so that which fluctuation pattern is selected and the selection ratio thereof is different. For example, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern A-1 is selected or the fluctuation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, and if the setting value is 2, the fluctuation pattern A-2 is selected or the fluctuation pattern A-2 is high. It may be selected by the ratio, or if the set value is 3, the fluctuation pattern A-3 may be selected or the fluctuation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high ratio. In this case, for example, the fluctuation patterns A-1 to A-3 may be configured so that the fluctuation time is the same, but the presence / absence of pseudo-ream, the number of pseudo-ream, the presence / absence of reach, and the type are different. Further, in this case, for example, when the set value command is not received normally, the fluctuation pattern A-1 is uniformly selected, or when the set value command is not received normally, the dedicated selection ratio is selected. It may be configured to select a fluctuation pattern with.

Further, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of the fluctuation is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, the set value command may be transmitted at the end of the fluctuation.

Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the background designation command to the effect control board 12 according to the current gaming state (step 112IWS109). In this case, for example, the CPU 103 controls to send a probabilistic state background specification command when it is in a probabilistic state, and controls to send a time saving state background specification command when it is in a time saving state, which is a normal state. In this case, control is performed to send the normal state background specification command.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result from the random number buffer area, and executes the jackpot determination module. The big hit judgment module compares a predetermined big hit judgment value or small hit judgment value (see FIG. 67-4) with the random number value MR1, and if they match, decides to make a big hit or a small hit. It is a program to be executed. That is, it is a program that executes processing of big hit determination and small hit determination.

If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step 112IWS110), the CPU 103 performs the small hit determination process (step 112IWS111). Then, when it is decided to make a small hit (Y in step 112IWS111), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit (step 112IWS112), and proceeds to step 112IWS116.

If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step 112IWS111), that is, if it is out of the range, the process proceeds to step 112IWS116 as it is.

When the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the jackpot determination values (Y in step 112IWS110), the CPU 103 sets the jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot (step IWS113). Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 67-5) to correspond to a type corresponding to a value that matches the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer area (“big hit type A”). , "Big hit type B" or "Big hit type C") is determined as the big hit type (step 112IWS114).

Further, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS115). For example, when the jackpot type is "big hit type A", "01" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "big hit type B", "02" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is "big hit type C", "03" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step 112IWS116). For example, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-", which is an outlier symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, for example, when the jackpot flag is set, "7", which is the jackpot symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, it may be determined to be a stop symbol of a different special symbol depending on the jackpot type. Further, for example, when the small hit flag is set, "5", which is the small hit symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 112IWS117).

(Production mode change process)
Next, the operation of the effect control means in the feature unit 112IW will be described. FIG. 67-17 is a flowchart showing a part of the effect control main process in the feature unit 112IW. In the feature unit 112IW, in the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect mode change process (step 112IWS201) to change the effect mode when the effect control random number update process of step S77 is executed, and then the effect mode is changed (step 112IWS201). The process returns to step S73.

The feature unit 112IW can control three types of effect modes, effect mode A to effect mode C, and for example, the background screen of the image display device 5 differs depending on which effect mode is controlled. The types of characters that appear in the advance notice and reach effects are different. In the effect mode change process of step 112 IWS201, the effect control CPU 120 controls to change from the current effect mode to a different effect mode when a predetermined effect mode change condition is satisfied. For example, when the effect control board 12 is equipped with a real-time clock, the effect mode may be changed based on a predetermined date or time based on the date and time information from the real-time clock. Further, for example, a lottery process based on a random number may be executed, and the effect mode may be changed based on the decision to change the effect mode.

In step 112IW201, when the effect mode is changed, the effect control CPU 120 may, for example, set a flag corresponding to the effect mode after the change and reset the flag corresponding to the effect mode before the change. For example, when the effect mode A is changed, the effect mode A flag may be set and the effect mode B flag or the effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode is changed to B, the effect mode B flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode is changed to C, the effect mode C flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or effect mode B flag before the change may be reset.

The production mode may be changed in a predetermined order such as production mode A → production mode B → production mode C → production mode A → ... It may be changed at random from modes A to C.

(Command analysis processing)

FIG. 67-18 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 112IWS301). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 112IWS302). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 112IWS303). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 112IWS304), the effect control CPU 120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step). 112IWS305). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a set value command reception flag indicating that the set value command has been normally received at least once after the power is turned on to the gaming machine (step 112IWS306).

In the feature unit 112IW, since the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is not backed up by power supply, the set value and the set value command reception flag stored in the set value storage area supply power to the gaming machine. Is cleared when is stopped. Therefore, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, no set value is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122, and the process is started with the set value command reception flag cleared. NS. Since the effect control board 12 is started in a state where the set value is not stored, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command even when the setting confirmation process or the recovery process is executed. It may be configured so that the set value command is always sent when the power is turned on.

Further, in this feature unit 112IW, the set value command is transmitted when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the setting change process is performed, but the set value command is normally performed due to missing command or garbled data. If the data cannot be received, the process of step 112IWS305 is not executed and the set value is not stored in the set value storage area. However, in this feature unit 112IW, even if the set value command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, the set value command is transmitted for each fluctuation display, so that the process of step 112IWS305 is performed based on the set value command received thereafter. It is executed and the setting value can be stored in the setting value storage area.

Further, even if the setting value command is received, the setting value included in the setting value command may be an abnormal value. Therefore, when the setting value command is read out on the effect control CPU 120 side, the setting value command is used. It may be configured to determine whether or not the included set value is a normal value. For example, in this example, the set value is configured to be set to any of "1" to "3", but includes values such as "5" and "10" that should not be set. If so, the setting value included in the setting value command may be determined to be abnormal. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 120 side stores the set value indicated by the received set value command, and then when a new set value command is received, the newly received set value command is used. If the set value shown does not match the set value stored last time, it may be determined that an inconsistency has occurred, and it may be determined that the setting value is abnormal. Then, even if it is determined that the set value included in the set value command is an abnormal value, it is assumed that the set value command has not been received normally, and the effect is restricted according to the processing method shown by the feature unit 112IW. It may be configured to do so.

(Initial roll setting)
When the effect control board 12 side receives any of the initialization designation command, the recovery command, the setting change processing end command, and the setting confirmation process end command from the main board 11 in the command analysis process, the feature unit 112IW receives. , The image display device 5 controls to display a predetermined initial result (specifically, a combination of effect symbols displayed on the image display device 5 until the first variable display is started). Perform (hereinafter, also referred to as initial roll production).

If the received effect control command is a setting change process end command (step 112IWS307), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112IWS308). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the setting change process is executed and the set value command is received normally), the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Based on the set value, the initial roll determination table is used to combine an even initial roll (for example, "246" or "224"), which is a combination of even-numbered effect symbols, and an odd-numbered effect symbol. It is determined to be one of an odd initial number (for example, "135" or "113") and a special initial number which is a combination of a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) (step 112IWS309). .. Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS314.

FIG. 67-19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial roll determination table. In step 112IWS309, a lottery process based on a random number is performed according to the allocation of the determination value according to the set value stored in the set value storage area using the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 67-19 (A), and the initial result is performed. Determine the outcome. In the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 67-19 (A), the ratio of odd initial rolls determined increases in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". Therefore, if the odd-numbered initial rolls are displayed on the image display device 5 before the start of the game, the setting value is advantageous as compared with the case where the setting has been changed and the even-numbered initial rolls are displayed. It will be suggested that it is set to. Further, as shown in FIG. 67-19 (A), the special initial result may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, if the special initial result is displayed on the image display device 5 before the start of the game, it is confirmed that the setting has been changed and that the setting value is "3". With such a configuration, it is possible to give an interest in the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game and to give a motivation to play the game from an early time zone of the business hours of the game store, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the effect control The CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 112 IWS310). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial roll using the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 67-19 (A), assuming that the set value is "1" (step 112IWS311). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS314.

By executing the process of steps 112IWS310 to S311, the feature unit 112IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. The initial roll is determined as "1". As shown in FIG. 67-19 (A), the ratio of the odd initial rolls determined to be the odd initial roll is the lowest with respect to the set value "1", and the special initial roll is not determined. By configuring in such a way, it is possible to reduce the situation where an odd initial number or a special initial number is displayed to disappoint the player even though an unfavorable setting value is set, and the interest in the game is reduced. It is possible to prevent the decrease of.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112IWS312). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial result using the initial result determination table for the effect mode C (step 112IWS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS314.

FIG. 67-19 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial roll determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 67-19 (B), in the initial roll determination table for the effect mode C, an odd initial roll is determined as compared with the case of the setting value “3” which is the most advantageous for the player. The ratio is low, and it may not be determined as a special initial roll.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS312 to S313, the feature unit 112IW sets a disadvantageous setting value when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode C is set. In spite of this, the odd initial rolls and special initial rolls are displayed to reduce the situation in which the player is disappointed, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the initial rolls determined in steps 112IWS309, S311 and S313 (step 112IWS314).

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial result to be an even initial number, and the image display device 5 In, the control to display the even initial result is performed (step 112IWS315).

By executing the process of step 112IWS315, the feature unit 112IW uniformly displays an even initial result when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the situation in which an odd initial number or a special initial number is displayed to disappoint the player even though an unfavorable setting value is set, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. I have to.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the odd initial number symbol may be determined at a low rate. In this case, for example, an initial roll is used by using a table in which the determination ratio of the odd initial roll symbol is set lower than the set value "1" of the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 67-19 (A). It may be configured to determine the eye pattern.

In this example, the case where the even initial number is uniformly displayed when the set value command cannot be received normally and the effect mode B is set is not limited to such a mode. .. For example, when the set value command cannot be received normally and the effect mode B is set, and the set value command cannot be received normally, such as a combination of "???" symbols as the initial result. It may be configured to display a dedicated initial roll. Any combination of symbols that does not suggest a set value in some form may be displayed as an initial result.

In addition, the processing when the setting value command cannot be received normally (or when the setting value cannot be stored normally) is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, when it is determined to be N in step 112IWS308, the set value "1" may be stored in the set value storage area as a default to determine the initial result. Further, for example, a dedicated setting value (for example, setting value "4") indicating that the setting value command could not be received normally is stored in the setting value storage area to determine the initial outcome. May be good.

If the received effect control command is any of the initialization specification command, the recovery command, and the setting confirmation process end command (step 112IWS316), that is, if the setting change process is not executed, the effect control CPU 120 , The initial roll is determined as the even initial roll, and the image display device 5 controls to display the even initial roll (step 112IWS317). In the feature unit 112IW, when the setting change process is not executed, the initial roll is determined as the even initial roll and is not determined as the odd initial roll, but the even initial roll is determined by lottery. It may be determined as either an eye or an odd initial result. In this case, the determined ratio may be different depending on the set value.

If the received effect control command is a RAM error notification command (step 112IWS318), the effect control CPU 120 executes RAM error notification (step 112IWS319). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a character display such as "a RAM error error has occurred" in the image display device 5, or outputs a sound indicating a RAM error error or an error sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Alternatively, the game effect lamp 9 and the LED are controlled to emit light in a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when the RAM error abnormality notification is performed, the maximum volume sound or error sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and LED are emitted with the maximum brightness (for example, in the case of a full-color LED). Is white and emits light).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received effect control command or sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 112IWS320). For example, if the received effect control command is a variation pattern command, the received variation pattern command is stored in the variation pattern command storage area provided in the RAM 122, and the variation pattern command reception flag is set. Further, for example, if the received effect control command is a display result designation command, the received display result designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area provided in the RAM 122. Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS301.

The feature unit 112IW is configured so that the odd initial roll is not displayed when the setting change process is not executed when the power is turned on. However, even if the odd initial roll can be displayed. good. Further, also in this case, the ratio determined by the odd initial number may be different depending on the set value (that is, the set value may be suggested).

Also, for example, in place of or in addition to the odd initial roll and the even initial roll, the initial roll that denies the possibility of a specific set value (for example, the possibility of the set value 1 is denied and is set. (It is confirmed that the value is 2 or the set value 3), an initial result that is determined to be a specific set value, or the like may be provided so that the value is displayed according to the set value. For example, in the case of the set value 1, the possibility that the set value is 1 is denied when the specific initial result is displayed by preventing the determination of the specific initial result, and the set value 2 or It will be confirmed that the set value is 3. Further, for example, by setting a specific initial roll to be determined only in the case of the set value 3, it is confirmed that the set value is 3 when the specific initial roll is displayed. .. Further, at the time of determining the initial outcome, one of these initial outcomes may be determined by lottery. In this case, the determined ratio may be different depending on the set value.

(Setting suggestion production)
In the feature unit 112IW, the set value can be changed, and as the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value, the pre-game suggestion effect executed before the start of the game, the above-mentioned initial roll effect, and the game (for example, during the game). , The suggestion effect during the game executed during the change display of the effect symbol, the setting suggestion based on the determination tendency of the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern, and the suggestion effect during the big hit executed during the big hit (for example, during the big hit game) can be executed. Has been done. In the feature unit 112IW, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect can be executed by a plurality of types of effect modes in which the reliability of the suggestion is different. The reliability of the suggestion may be different for each. For example, the reliability of the suggestion may be increased in the order of pre-game suggestion effect> jackpot suggestion effect> in-game suggestion effect, or in the order of pre-game suggestion effect> in-game suggestion effect> jackpot suggestion effect. The reliability of the suggestion may be increased in the order of the suggestion effect during the game> the suggestion effect during the big hit> the suggestion effect during the game, or the suggestion effect during the big hit> the suggestion effect during the game> the suggestion effect during the game. Further, the execution ratio of each setting suggestion effect may be set to be set. For example, the administrator of the gaming machine does not execute some or all of the setting suggestion effects (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect and the initial appearance effect suggesting that the setting has been changed), or the execution ratio. It may be possible to change the setting so as to lower (or raise). For example, the setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the setting related to the setting suggestion effect is set by operating the operation means such as the push button 31B or the operation means (operable only by the administrator) such as the switch provided inside the gaming machine. May be changed.

(Variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 67-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start waiting process. In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 is set with a variable start command reception flag (for example, a variable pattern command reception flag) indicating that a command or the like for designating the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Whether or not it is confirmed (step 112 IWS401).

When the variable start command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the effect waiting demo effect if it is being executed (step 112IWS402, step 112IWS403). Then, the variable start command reception flag is reset (step 112IWS404), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" (step 112IWS405), and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

If the fluctuation start command reception flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the time measurement result by the time measuring means matches the predetermined condition unless the customer waiting demo effect is being executed (N in step 112IWS406). (Step 112 IWS407). In step 112IWS407, for example, when the timer set when the previous variable display (display result "loss") ends (for example, set in 30 seconds) times out, it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Further, even when the timer is not set (that is, when the fluctuation display has not been executed even once after the power is turned on and before the start of the game), it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, when the variable display is not executed and the predetermined period elapses (and the jackpot game state is not controlled), or when the game is not started, the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the customer waiting demo effect is produced by the process described later. Will be executed.

If the timing result by the timing means matches a predetermined condition, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0 (step 112IWS408). That is, in step 112IWS408, it is confirmed whether or not the game has been started yet.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112 IWS409). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, it is determined whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode when the pre-game suggestion effect is executed (step 112IWS410). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS415.

In the feature unit 112IW, when the customer waiting demonstration effect of the mode including the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the decorative lamp is changed to the first special color (blue) different from the normal color (for example, white). When the customer waiting demo effect is controlled and includes the pre-game suggestion effect of the second effect mode, the decorative lamp is controlled to the second special color (red), and the pre-game suggestion effect of the third effect mode is performed. When the customer waiting demonstration effect of the including aspect is executed, the decorative lamp is controlled to the third special color (rainbow color).

FIG. 67-21 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pre-game suggestion effect determination table. In step 112 IWS410, using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 67-21 (A), a lottery process based on random numbers is performed according to the allocation of determination values according to the set values stored in the set value storage area. Whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect and the mode of the effect are determined. In the pre-game suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 67-21 (A), the determination values are assigned so that the ratio of the pre-game suggestion effect being executed increases in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". Has been done. Further, the determination values are assigned so that the ratio of the set values "1" <"2" <"3" in which the second effect mode is determined increases. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed, and that the pre-game suggestion effect is set to an advantageous set value by being executed by the second effect mode rather than the first effect mode. Become. In addition, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect, it is suggested that the setting has been changed when the power is turned on. Further, as shown in FIG. 67-21 (A), the third effect mode may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, it is confirmed that the setting has been changed and that the set value is "3".

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the effect control The CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 112 IWS411). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 assumes that the set value is "1", and whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 67-21 (A). And the production mode is determined (step 112 IWS412). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS415.

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS411 to S412, the feature unit 112IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. Assuming that it is "1", whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined. As shown in FIG. 67-21 (A), the ratio of the set value "1" determined to be the second effect mode is the lowest, and the third effect mode may not be determined. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation where the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode even though the disadvantageous set value is set, and the player is disappointed. However, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112 IWS413). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 112IWS414). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS415.

FIG. 67-21 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 67-21 (B), in the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, it is determined that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed as compared with the case of the set values "2" and "3". The ratio itself is low, the ratio determined to be the first effect mode or the second effect mode is low, and the third effect mode may not be determined.

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS413 to S414, a disadvantageous setting value is set in the feature unit 112IW when the setting value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode C. In spite of this, the situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode to disappoint the player on the contrary is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls to execute the customer waiting demo effect in the mode including the pre-game suggestion effect determined to be executed in steps 112IWS410, S421, and S414 (step 112IWS415). After that, the variable display start waiting process ends.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 112IWS416 as it is. That is, in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect is restricted from being executed.

By executing the process of step 112IWS413, the feature unit 112IW does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect when the set value command cannot be normally received and is in the effect mode B. It is possible to reduce the situation where the pre-game suggestion effect is executed even though the disadvantageous setting value is set and the player is disappointed, and it is possible to prevent the player from being less interested in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, using a table in which the execution rate of the pre-game suggestion effect is set lower than the set value "1" of the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 67-21 (A), before the game is used. It may be configured to determine the presence or absence and type of suggestive effect.

Not limited to the example shown in FIG. 67-21 (A), only a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes is executed so that the execution ratio differs depending on the set value. You may do it.

Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) among a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, it is set when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by preventing the determination of the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode). The possibility that the value is 1, is denied, and it is confirmed that the value is the set value 2 or the set value 3. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific set value. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the set value 3. It will be confirmed that the set value is 3.

In the feature unit 112IW, the pre-game suggestion effect can be executed at different ratios according to the set value, but this is the pre-game suggestion effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, and second effect mode) according to the set value. The execution ratio of (including 3 effect modes) is different, the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode are different depending on the set value, and only a specific effect mode is set according to the set value. It is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

Note that the feature unit 112IW is configured so that the pre-game suggestion effect is not executed when the setting value is not changed when the power is turned on and the setting value command has not yet been received. Not limited to this, the pre-game suggestion effect may be executed even when the setting has not been changed. In this case, it is possible to determine whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode when the pre-game suggestion effect is executed at different ratios depending on whether the setting is changed or not.

For example, FIG. 67-21 (C) is a pre-game suggestion effect determination table used when a command at the time of restoration is received. Comparing the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 67-21 (A) with the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 67-21 (C), when the command at the time of restoration is received, that is, the setting change is made. When it is not performed, the rate at which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed is lower than when the setting is changed, and the difference in the execution rate between the set values is also smaller. By doing so, it is possible to make the reliability of the suggestion by the pre-game suggestion effect different depending on whether the setting is changed or not.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is not 0, the CPU 120 controls to execute the customer waiting demo effect in the mode including the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect (excluding the pre-game suggestion effect) (step 112IWS416). After that, the variable display start waiting process ends.

When the process of step 112 IWS416 is executed, for example, in the image display device 5, the execution history indicating the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect (in-game suggestion effect or jackpot suggestion effect), the execution content (execution mode), and the like. A customer-waiting demonstration effect in which information is displayed is executed. When the process of step 112IWS416 is executed, the customer waiting de effect is executed, and when a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) is performed during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect, The image display device 5 may display the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect. Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, the number of executions and the execution contents (effect mode at the time of execution) of the setting suggestion effect (initial roll effect, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect, etc.) are shown. The information may be stored, and the effect of estimating the set value from the information and notifying the setting value may be executed. It should be noted that this effect notifies the setting expectation degree (or estimated setting value) calculated based on a predetermined standard from the execution status of the setting suggestion effect, and does not notify the actual setting value. ..

In the feature unit 112IW, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only before the game is started by the processing of steps 112IWS408 to 112IWS415. Further, the process of step 112IWS416 shows the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect during the customer waiting demo effect, but the information about the pre-game suggestion effect is excluded. With such a configuration, it is possible to give an interest in the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game, to give an motivation to play the game from the early hours of the business hours of the game store, and to enhance the interest. .. Not limited to the example of the feature unit 112IW, for example, a real-time clock or the like is used so that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). May be good. Further, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect may not include the information regarding the suggestion effect during the game in the special period.

In addition to the configuration of the feature unit 112IW, the number of executions and the execution contents of the setting suggestion effect are accumulated as execution history information, and a two-dimensional code including the execution history information is displayed on the image display device 5 at the end of the game. It may be configured to do so. Further, when the player takes a picture of the two-dimensional code displayed on the game machine using a mobile terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function and sends it to a Web server on the Internet, the Web server based on the received information. The game history of the player may be managed, and a process of granting a predetermined privilege according to the game history may be performed. Further, the player may access the Web server (or analyze the two-dimensional code) using the mobile terminal to acquire the execution history information and display it on the display device provided in the mobile terminal. Further, the player may read the two-dimensional code including the execution history information using the mobile terminal so that the setting suggestion image suggesting the setting value is displayed on the display device provided in the mobile terminal. For example, a setting value estimated based on a predetermined standard is calculated from the execution history information, and a setting suggestion image suggesting the calculated setting value (just an estimation and different from the actual setting value) is displayed. You may.

(Suggestion production decision processing during the game)
FIG. 67-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the suggestion effect determination process during the game. The in-game suggestion effect determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the in-game suggestion effect determination process, when the effect control CPU 120 is in the special period (Y in step 112IWS501), it selects the first in-game suggestion effect determination table (step 112IWS502) and is not in the special period. In the case (N of step 112IWS501), the suggestion effect determination table during the second game is selected (step 112IWS503). For example, when a setting change end command or a setting value command is received, a special period flag is set, and when the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), the special period flag is reset. For example, by confirming the state of the special period flag, it is possible to confirm in step 112IWS501 whether or not the special period is in progress.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112IWS504). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table, it is determined whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed, and the effect mode when the effect is executed (step 112IWS505).

FIG. 67-23 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a first in-game suggestion effect determination table used in the special period, and FIG. 67-23 (B) is a second in-game suggestion effect used in the non-special period. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination table.

In the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 67-23 (A) and (B), the in-game suggestion effect is executed in the order of set values "1" <"2" <"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio to be calculated is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the setting value is set to be advantageous by executing the suggestion effect during the game.

Further, regarding the second production mode (appearance of mini characters A and B), the ratio of execution in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3" is high, and the first production mode (appearance of mini character A). Judgment values are assigned so that the difference in execution ratio between the set values is larger than that. That is, there is a high degree of reliability that the second effect mode is set to a set value that is more advantageous than the first effect mode.

Further, in the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 67-23 (A) and 67-23 (B), the in-game suggestion effect of the second effect mode with high reliability is executed only during the special period. It is configured as follows. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a special period, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 67-23 (A) and 67-23 (B), the third effect mode (character C appearance) may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, it is confirmed that the set value is "3" by executing the suggestion effect during the game according to the third effect mode.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the effect control The CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 112IWS506). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table, assuming that the set value is "1". Step 112 IWS507).

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS506 to S507, the feature unit 112IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. Assuming that it is "1", whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the game and the effect mode are determined. As shown in FIGS. 67-23 (A) and 67-23 (B), with respect to the set value "1", the ratio of determining that the suggestion effect is executed during the game is low, and the ratio determined as the second effect mode is low. Is the lowest and may not be determined as the third effect mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation where the suggestion effect during the game is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode even though the disadvantageous set value is set, and the player is disappointed. However, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112IWS508). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 112IWS509).

FIG. 67-23 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 67-23 (C), in the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the ratio of determining to execute the in-game suggestion effect is lower than in the case of the set value “3”. , It may not be determined as the third effect mode.

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS508 to S509, a disadvantageous setting value is set in the feature unit 112IW when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode C is set. In spite of this, the situation in which the suggestion effect during the game is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode to disappoint the player on the contrary is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the suggestion effect is not executed during the game.

By executing the process of step 112IWS508, the feature unit 112IW does not execute the suggestion effect during the game when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set. It is possible to reduce the situation where the suggestion effect is executed during the game and disappoint the player even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, and it is possible to prevent the player from being less interested in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during the game may be enabled to be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution rate of the in-game suggestion effect is set lower than the set value "1" of the in-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 67-23 (A) and 67-23 (B) is used. Therefore, it may be configured to determine the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect during the game.

Not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 67-23 (A) and 67-23 (B), only a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The proportions may be different.

Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) among a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, it is set when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by preventing the determination of the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode). The possibility that the value is 1, is denied, and it is confirmed that the value is the set value 2 or the set value 3. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific set value. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the set value 3. It will be confirmed that the set value is 3.

In the feature unit 112IW, the suggestion effect during the game can be executed at different ratios according to the set value, and this is the suggestion effect during the game (the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the second effect mode) according to the set value. The execution ratio of (including 3 effect modes) is different, the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode are different depending on the set value, and only a specific effect mode is set according to the set value. It is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

It should be noted that the feature unit 112IW is configured to be able to execute a suggestion effect during the game in a common mode (for example, the first effect mode) in the special period and the non-special period, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. , It may be possible to execute a suggestion effect during the game in a different mode. For example, the size, color, and the like of the mini character A may be different between the special period and the non-special period.

Further, the feature unit 112IW is configured so that whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the game and the effect mode when the suggestion effect is executed are different depending on whether it is a special period or a non-special period and the set value. However, in addition to such a configuration, for example, the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern, the presence / absence of reach effect, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of pseudo-continuous effect, the type of pseudo-continuous effect, and the display result are big hits. Depending on whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the game, the effect mode when the suggestion effect is executed may be different.

For example, the suggestion effect during the game may be executed only when the variation pattern includes the reach effect (that is, the variation time is longer than the non-reach variation pattern). Further, for example, in the fluctuation pattern including the super reach B and the fluctuation pattern including the super reach A having a higher expectation than the super reach B, the latter is more likely to execute the suggestion effect during the game. Or, the reliability when the suggestion effect during the game is executed may be high, the ratio of the suggestion effect during the game being executed is high, and the reliability when the suggestion effect is executed is high. It may be made higher.

Further, for example, in the fluctuation pattern including the pseudo-ream effect and the variation pattern not including the pseudo-ream effect (or the number of pseudo-reams is smaller than that of the former), the former has a higher ratio of the suggestion effect being executed during the game. It may be set to be high, the reliability when the suggestion effect during the game is executed may be high, or the ratio when the suggestion effect during the game is executed is high and when it is executed. The reliability may be increased.

Further, for example, in the fluctuation pattern in which the display result is a big hit and the fluctuation pattern in which the display result is not a big hit, the former may have a higher ratio of the suggestion effect being executed during the game, or the game. The reliability when the middle suggestion effect is executed may be high, or the ratio of the suggestion effect during the game being executed may be high, and the reliability when the middle suggestion effect is executed may be high. ..

(During big hit production decision processing)
FIG. 67-24 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect determination process during the big hit. The big hit middle effect determination process is executed in the big hit opening pre-process (step S114). In the big hit middle effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112IWS601). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the big hit, and the effect mode when the effect is executed are determined (step 112IWS602). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS607.

In step S112IWS602, when the period from the start of the game to the execution of the variation display a specific number of times (100 times in this example) (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific period), the number shown in FIG. 67-25 (A). One jackpot suggestion effect determination table is selected, and if it is not during a specific period, the second jackpot suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 67-25 (B) is selected. Then, based on the selected jackpot suggestion effect determination table and the set value, it is determined whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is executed, and the effect mode when the effect is executed. The "game start time" here refers to the time when the first fluctuation display is started after the power is turned on, but is not limited to this, for example, the first fluctuation after the end of the previous consecutive villa. It may be the time when the display is started, or it may be the time when the first variable display is started after the end of the customer waiting demonstration effect. Further, in this feature unit 112IW, the period from the start of the game to the execution of the variation display a specific number of times (100 times in this example) is set as a specific period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. However, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the period from the start of the game until the variation display is executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) may be set as a specific period. Further, for example, the specific period is divided into a plurality of periods, and the first specific period (the period from the start of the game until the variation display is executed 50 times) and the second specific period (the 51st variation after the start of the game). It is also possible to use a jackpot suggestion effect determination table in which the presence / absence of the jackpot suggestion effect and the determination rate of the effect mode are different depending on the period from the display to the execution of the 100th variation display).

In the first and second jackpot suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 67-25 (A) and 67-25 (B), the jackpot suggestion effect is executed in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio to be calculated is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the setting value is set to be advantageous by executing the suggestion effect during the big hit.

Further, regarding the second effect mode and the third effect mode, the ratio of execution in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3" is high, and the execution ratio between the set values is high between the specific period and the non-specific period. Judgment values are assigned so that the difference between them becomes large. That is, in the specific period, the suggestion effect during the jackpot, which is more reliable than in the non-specific period, is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a specific period, and it is possible to enhance the interest. Not limited to the configuration of the feature unit 112IW, the jackpot suggestion effect (or a specific effect mode thereof) may be executed only in a specific period and may not be executed in a non-specific period.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 67-25 (A) and 67-25 (B), the fourth effect mode may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, it is confirmed that the set value is "3" by executing the suggestion effect during the big hit according to the fourth effect mode.

In the feature unit 112IW, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed by the third effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 67-26 (A1), the effect symbol that becomes the big hit is stopped and displayed in the image display device 5. After that, as shown in FIG. 67-26 (B1), the dialogue C image (“high setting !?”) 112IW102 is displayed.

Further, when the jackpot suggestion effect is executed according to the fourth effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 67-26 (A1), after the effect symbol that becomes the jackpot is stopped and displayed in the image display device 5, FIG. As shown in 67-27 (C1), the dialogue D image (“high setting confirmed”) 112IW105 is displayed.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the effect control The CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 112IWS603). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the jackpot suggestion effect and the effect mode by using the selected jackpot suggestion effect determination table, assuming that the set value is "1". Step 112 IWS 604). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS607.

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS603 to S604, the feature unit 112IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. Assuming that it is "1", whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the big hit and the effect mode are determined. As shown in FIGS. 67-25 (A) and 67-25 (B), the ratio of the set value "1" determined to be the second effect mode or the third effect mode is the lowest, and the fourth effect mode is determined. There is no case. With such a configuration, the player is disappointed by the big hit suggestion effect being executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode even though the disadvantageous set value is set. It is possible to reduce the situation where the game is played and prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112IWS605). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the jackpot suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 112IWS606). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS607.

FIG. 67-25 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a jackpot suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 67-25 (C), in the jackpot suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the ratio of determining that the jackpot suggestion effect is to be executed is low, and the set values are “2” and “3”. Compared with the above, the ratio of the second effect mode and the third effect mode is determined to be lower, and the fourth effect mode may not be determined.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS605 to S606, the feature unit 112IW sets a disadvantageous setting value when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode C is set. In spite of this, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the suggestion effect during a big hit is executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode to disappoint the player, and to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game. I have to.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 112IWS607 as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, it is restricted not to execute the suggestion effect during the big hit.

By executing the process of step 112IWS605, in the case where the setting value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set, the feature unit 112IW does not execute the suggestion effect during the big hit. Even though a disadvantageous setting value is set, it is possible to reduce the situation where the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed and the player is disappointed, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during the big hit may be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution rate of the jackpot suggestion effect is set lower than the setting value "1" of the jackpot suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 67-25 (A) and 67-25 (A) and (B) is used. Therefore, it may be configured to determine the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect during the big hit.

Not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 67-25 (A) and 67-25 (B), only a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The proportions may be different.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 67-25 (A), when a big hit occurs in a specific period, the suggestion effect during the big hit is always executed, but it may not be executed at a low rate. You may. In this case, the ratio of non-execution may be different depending on the set value. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 67-25 (B), the ratio of not executing the suggestion effect during the big hit is the same regardless of the set value, but if the ratio of not being executed differs depending on the set value. You may let it.

Further, in the present feature unit 112IW, when a big hit occurs in a specific period, the big hit middle suggestion effect is executed as a setting suggestion effect, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, A setting suggestion effect (for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a dialogue image suggesting a set value is displayed) may be executed based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific period. In this case, the predetermined condition may be satisfied, for example, when the number of executions of the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect reaches the predetermined number of times, or when a specific super reach effect or a notice effect is executed.

In this feature unit 112IW, it is possible to execute the jackpot suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value, but this is the jackpot suggestion effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, third effect) according to the set value. The execution ratios of the effect mode and the fourth effect mode are different, the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode are different depending on the set value, and the set value. It is a concept including that the execution ratio is different only in a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode) according to the above.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the accessory effect (step 112IWS607).

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 67-26 (A1), it is assumed that the movable member 112IW101 is provided above the image display device 5. In such a configuration, when the accessory effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 67-26 (B2), the movable member 112IW101 is controlled to move to the front surface of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 67-26 (A1) and 67-26 (A1) and (B2), when the accessory effect is executed, the movable member 112IW101 moves to the front surface of the image display device 5. The position where the dialogue image is displayed becomes difficult to see. In the feature unit 112IW, since the suggestion effect during the jackpot and the accessory effect are executed at different timings of the fanfare period in the jackpot game, the movable member 112IW101 actually moved to the front of the image display device 5 is the jackpot. It does not obscure the dialogue image displayed by the medium suggestion effect. However, if the movable member 112IW101 is operated by the accessory effect during the fanfare period, the player may pay attention to the movable member 112IW101 and overlook the dialogue image displayed by the big hit suggestion effect. Therefore, in step 112IWS607, by using the accessory effect determination table shown in FIG. 67-25 (D), the accessory effect is not executed when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from becoming difficult to recognize and degrading the interest. Further, with such a configuration, even if the jackpot suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at the same timing, it is possible to prevent the jackpot suggestion effect from becoming difficult to recognize.

When it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect, the execution timing of either the jackpot suggestion effect or the character effect is changed (for example, the character effect is performed during the fanfare period, and the jackpot suggestion effect is performed. (Performed during the ending period), it may be possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from becoming difficult to recognize. Further, when it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect, the operation mode of the movable member 112IW101 is changed (for example, controlled so as not to stop at a position overlapping with the dialogue image by the jackpot suggestion effect), or the jackpot is hit. The display position of the dialogue image by the middle suggestion effect may be changed to prevent the big hit middle suggestion effect from becoming difficult to recognize. Further, when the execution of the suggestion effect during the big hit is decided, the execution of the character effect may be restricted by lowering the execution rate of the character effect. In addition, the execution of the character effect may be restricted only for a specific period. Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 67-25 (D), when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the accessory effect may be executed at a low rate.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the light guide plate effect (step 112IWS609) when the accessory effect is not executed (N in step 112IWS608).

Here, a light guide plate 112IW103 having translucency capable of transmitting light and a light emitting body provided so that light can be incident from the end face of the light guide plate are provided on the front surface of the image display device 5, and the light guide plate 112IW103 is provided. It is assumed that the light emitting body is provided with a reflecting portion that reflects the light incident on the inside of the light guide plate 112IW103 from the end surface of the light guide plate 112IW103 and emits it to the front surface of the game machine. Then, by making the light emitting body emit light, it is possible to execute the light guide plate effect of emitting light from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate 112IW103 to the front surface of the gaming machine. In such a configuration, when the light guide plate effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 67-26 (B3), light is emitted from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate 112IW103 to the front surface of the gaming machine, resulting in a “big hit”. Appears. Further, during the execution of the light guide plate effect, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image displayed on the image display device 5.

In step 112IWS609, by using the light guide plate effect determination table shown in FIG. 67-25 (E), the light guide plate effect is executed at different ratios depending on the presence or absence of the suggestion effect during the big hit and the effect mode when it is executed. NS. Specifically, when the jackpot suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the jackpot suggestion of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is performed. When the effect is executed, the rate at which the light guide plate effect is executed is low. That is, when the jackpot suggestion effect of the effect mode that is not suggested to be an advantageous set value is executed, the light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the jackpot suggestion effect is configured to be difficult to see. There is. For example, as shown in FIG. 67-26 (B4), the light guide plate effect is executed when the dialogue A image (“setting is ...”) 112IW104 is displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect of the first effect mode. If this is done, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the dialogue A image. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest of the game due to the suggestion effect during the big hit of the effect mode that is not desirable for the player. When the big hit suggestion effect of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is executed, the execution timing of either the big hit suggestion effect or the light guide plate effect is changed (for example, the light guide plate). The production may be performed during the fanfare period, and the suggestion production during the big hit may be performed during the ending period).

In the feature unit 112IW, the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect are executed in such a manner that it is difficult to recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit. For example, an error displayed on the image display device 9 when an error occurs. The display is also executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit. That is, the error display is displayed with priority over the jackpot suggestion effect (or pre-game suggestion effect or in-game suggestion effect). With such a configuration, the occurrence of an error can be appropriately notified. Further, when a predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect having a specific effect mode) that can be executed at the same time as the jackpot suggestion effect is provided, and the predetermined effect is a mode in which it is difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect. May give priority to the suggestion effect during the big hit. Specifically, when the image displayed on the image display device 5 by the predetermined effect is in a mode in which it is difficult to recognize the image displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect, it is displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect. The image may be displayed preferentially. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit.

Further, in the feature unit 112IW, the effect symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, but the effect symbol is variably displayed by driving a drum-shaped movable body having the effect symbol arranged on the surface. It may be applied (that is, it may be applied to a so-called drum type gaming machine). Alternatively, the effect symbol may be variably displayed by driving a belt-shaped movable body having the effect symbol arranged on the surface (that is, it may be applied to a so-called belt reel type gaming machine). In such a drum-type or belt-reel-type gaming machine, at the start of the first fluctuation after changing the setting, the drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body performs a characteristic operation (or characteristic) different from the normal operation. Operation may occur). Therefore, in the initial fluctuation after the setting change, the light guide plate effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable body at the start of the fluctuation may be executed (or the rate of execution may be increased). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the setting has been changed.

Further, in the present feature unit 112IW, the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect are configured so as to reduce the visibility of the suggestion effect during the big hit, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, For example, the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced by executing the accessory effect or the light guide plate effect. Further, in this case as well, the visibility may be reduced at a high rate when an undesired suggestion is given to the player. For example, when an even initial number is displayed, when the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, or when the in-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the visibility of these is reduced. It is also possible to increase the ratio of executing the even-numbered effect in which the movable member operates and the light guide plate effect of displaying characters and pictures by the light guide plate. Further, the effect is not limited to the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect, and includes a control to output a predetermined sound, a control to vibrate the movable member and the stick controller 31A, and a control to emit a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED in a predetermined mode. By performing the above, the player's attention may be directed to others to reduce (or make it difficult to notice) the visibility of the initial roll effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect.

Further, in addition to the setting suggestion effect of the feature unit 112IW, the simultaneous effect executed based on the measurement result (measurement result using the measurement timer set at the time of turning on the power or the real-time clock) is executed in a specific mode. May suggest the setting.

In addition, a setting suggestion effect (for example, a predetermined image) suggesting a setting according to the number of times that the variable display is continuously executed without the hold memory becoming 0 and the number of times when a start winning prize exceeding the upper limit hold memory number occurs. Display control, output control of a predetermined sound, light emission control of a predetermined lamp, etc.) may be executed.

Further, based on the detection of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B in the predetermined operation valid period, the setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting (for example, the display control of the predetermined image, the output control of the predetermined sound, the predetermined sound). (Controlling the light emission of the lamp, etc.) may be executed.

Although the feature portion 112IW has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

(Modification example 1)
For example, the feature portion 112IW illustrates a form in which the security cover 112IW500A is fixed to the outer frame 112IW001a, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 112IW003 side. May be good. Specifically, as a modification 1, as shown in FIGS. 67-28 (A) and 67-28 (B), a security cover 112IW500B composed of a short piece 112IW500Ba and a long piece 112IW500Bb is attached to, for example, a substrate case 112IW201. The right end of the long piece 112IW500Bb slides left and right between the covering position covering the right side of the board case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 and the uncovering position on the right side of the covering position. Installed so that it can be moved.

On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the security cover 112IW500B is slid to the right side with respect to the board case 112IW201, and is set via the through hole 112IW500Bc formed on the left side of the long piece 112IW500Bb. The key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be operated. That is, in the present modification 1, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the security cover 112IW500B (long piece 112IW500Bb) covers the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 in the left-right direction with respect to the board case 112IW201. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the regulated state by restricting the slide movement to. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open, the security cover 112IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 112IW201 to release the state of covering the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be brought into a state in which it can be released from the regulated state (it can be changed to the allowable state).

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 67-28 (A) and 67-28 (B), when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the protruding dimension of the security cover 112IW500B from the board case 112IW201 is length L1. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the protruding dimension of the security cover 112IW500B from the board case 112IW201 is extended to the length L2 by sliding the security cover 112IW500B with respect to the board case 112IW201. (L2> L1).

That is, as shown in FIG. 67-29 (A), when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is rotated around a predetermined rotation axis and opened, the security cover 112IW500B has a protruding dimension from the substrate case 112IW201. By sliding the board case 112IW201 until it reaches the length L2 (pachinko game machine 1 is allowed), a pachinko game clerk or the like operates the setting key 112IW051 or the setting changeover switch 112IW052. The set value of the machine 1 can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowable state, as shown in FIG. 67-29 (B), the security cover 112IW500B is attached to the board case 112IW201 until the protruding dimension from the board case 112IW201 becomes the length L1. On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not slid to move (unless the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the regulated state), the security cover 112IW500B comes into contact with the front end of the outer frame 112IW001a, making it impossible to close the gaming machine frame 112IW003. It has become.

Therefore, in the present modification 1, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 112IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state. Therefore, the setting key 112IW051 is set by the security cover 112IW500B. It is possible to prevent forgetting to cover the changeover switch 112IW052, that is, to prevent the gaming machine frame 112IW003 from being closed without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and the security can be improved.

In the state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the front end portion of the short piece 112IW500Ba is arranged between the outer frame 112IW001a and the gaming machine frame 112IW003, so that the movement from the covering position to the left-right direction is restricted. However, the security cover 112IW500B may be moved in the left-right direction as long as the state of covering the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is maintained by the security cover 112IW500B. ..

(Modification 2)
Further, as a form in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 112IW003 side, as shown in FIGS. 67-30 (A) and 67-30 (B) as a modification 2, the left end portion of the security cover 112IW500C is provided on the gaming machine. Centered on the vertical axis 112IW500Cd provided on the back side of the frame 112IW003, the covering position covering the right side of the substrate case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 and the covering position rotated from the covering position. It may be rotatably pivotally supported from the uncovered position. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 112IW500Ca is locked to the locking portion 112IW500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 112IW001a, and the long piece 112IW500Cb is set and switched to the setting key 112IW051. The rotation of the switch 112IW052 from the back surface side to the back surface side may be restricted.

Then, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the security cover 112IW500C is rotated around the pivot 112IW500Cd (counterclockwise in a plan view) with respect to the board case 112IW201 to form the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. It suffices to release the state of being covered with and make it operable. That is, in the present modification 2, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the rotation is restricted with the security cover 112IW500C (long piece 112IW500Cb) covering the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. As a result, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open, the security cover 112IW500C is rotated around the pivot 112IW500Cd (counterclockwise in a plan view) with respect to the board case 112IW201 to press the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. By releasing the covered state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be released from the regulated state (it can be changed to the allowable state).

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 67-31 (A), the security cover 112IW500C in the second modification is rotated around the pivot 112IW500Cd (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is allowed), so that the pachinko game machine 1 is in an allowable state. The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by a clerk or the like operating the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowable state, as shown in FIG. 67-31 (B), the security cover 112IW500C is rotated clockwise in a plan view and the setting key is set by the security cover 112IW500C. If the 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are not covered (unless the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the regulated state), the security cover 112IW500C will come into contact with the front end of the outer frame 112IW001a and close the gaming machine frame 112IW003. Is impossible.

Therefore, in the present modification 2, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 112IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state. Therefore, the setting key 112IW051 is set by the security cover 112IW500C. It is possible to prevent forgetting to cover the changeover switch 112IW052, that is, to prevent the gaming machine frame 112IW003 from being closed without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and the security can be improved.

(Modification example 3)
Further, in the feature unit 112IW, a mode in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the gaming machine frame 112IW003 has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass door frame is not limited thereto. The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed by opening 112IW003a. When the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 112IW003a in this way, it is shown in FIGS. 67-32 (A) to 67-32 (C) as a modification 3. As described above, the through-hole 112IW003b may be formed in the lower part of the gaming machine frame 112IW003 so that the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 can be operated via the through-hole 112IW003b. In this case, the mounting surface of the IC or the like on the main board 11 is arranged toward the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are on the side opposite to the mounting surface on the main board 11. Placed on the surface.

When the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 can be operated via the through port 112IW003b, a door body 112IW003c capable of opening and closing the through port 112IW003b is provided, and the door body 112IW003c is closed. The operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be restricted. As shown in FIGS. 67-32 (B) and 67-32 (C), when the door body 112IW003c is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 112IW003, the door body is closed by closing the glass door frame 112IW003a. Since the 112IW003c is sandwiched between the glass door frame 112IW003a and the gaming machine frame 112IW003 so as to be openable and closable, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are illegally operated when the glass door frame 112IW003a is closed. Can be strongly prevented and security can be improved.

As described above, the feature unit 112IW includes the first invention shown below. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine is configured to be able to be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to control an advantageous state based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a fluctuation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the fluctuation stop command is transmitted. Based on the value, it is described that the display is performed by three types of production patterns corresponding to the three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and the setting is made. In a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be lowered. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 112IWS005-S010 execution part) and
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to 117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 112IWS011 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The CPU 120 includes steps 112 IWS409 to S415, S504 to S509, and a portion for executing S601 to S606).
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggestion effect executing means is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous to the player among the set values of the plurality of stages. As such, the suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a portion that executes steps 112IWS421, S507, S604).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the first invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 112IWS005-S010 execution part) and
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to 117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 112IWS011 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The CPU 120 includes steps 112 IWS409 to S415, S504 to S509, and a portion for executing S601 to S606).
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggestion effect executing means is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous to the player among the set values of the plurality of stages. As such, the suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a portion that executes steps 112IWS421, S507, S604).
Moreover,
A substrate (for example, an LED substrate) on which at least a specific electronic component (for example, a connector) having a metal fixing portion (for example, a metal fixing portion 651) is mounted and a wiring pattern for electrically connecting each mounted electronic component is formed. 275)
A component fixing portion (for example, fixing pad P) for fixing the metal fixing portion with a low-temperature molten metal (for example, solder) is formed on the substrate.
An example of a gaming machine is that the component fixing portion is electrically connected to any of the wiring patterns (for example, GND pattern). According to this feature, in a gaming machine configured so that control of an advantageous state can be executed based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. Further, since the component fixing portion can be formed as a part of the wiring pattern, it is not necessary to provide the component fixing portion separately from the wiring pattern, so that the wiring pattern is satisfactorily provided while securing the area of the fixing portion. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the first invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 112IWS011 and S108. do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the set value information can be input normally at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest in.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the first invention,
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means is the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit by the fourth effect mode) in which the set value is highly specified. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect according to the first effect mode, a during-game suggestion effect, and a jackpot suggestion effect) in which the specified degree of the set value is low. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the jackpot suggestion effect determination table), the execution mode of the suggestion effect can be determined. A suggestion effect determining means for determining (for example, a portion that executes steps 112 IWS410, S421, S414, S505, S507, S509, S602, S604, S606 in the effect control CPU 120) is provided.
The suggestion effect determining means
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Step 112 IWS410, S505, S602 is executed based on the set value),
When the set value information is not input normally, the execution mode of the suggested effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the predetermined set value (for example, the set value "1") (for example, the effect control CPU 120). Executes steps 112IWS421, S507, and S604 based on the set value "1")
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data capacity.

In the feature unit 112IW, "determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect" is a concept including determining whether or not to execute the suggestion effect and also determining the effect mode of the suggestion effect. be.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means has at least a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at a different ratio depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is stated that it may be possible to execute (initial roll effect, etc.), and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, and the game is played from an early time. It is possible to give a motivation to play pachinko and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, after the setting is changed until the variation display is executed 30 times) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 67-6 (A), (B), 67-23 (A), (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 67-23 (A), (B), etc.).
It is described that a notification means capable of notifying information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416) may be further provided. , It is possible to confirm the suggestive effects performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 67-25 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) A predetermined effect execution means that can execute a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc.
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means for restricting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 67-25 (D)). It is stated that the above may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the first invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 67-25 (A), (B), etc.).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner in which it becomes difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. It is stated that it may be provided with more difficult-to-use accessory effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.), and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the first invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the jackpot game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 67-5).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the first invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) related to the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 67-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 12 of the first invention,
It is provided with an opening / closing body that can be opened / closed and a regulating member (for example, security cover 112IW500A / security cover 112IW500B / security cover 112IW500C) that can regulate the operation of the operation unit.
When the opening / closing body is closed, the operation of the operation unit is regulated by the regulating member, and the regulated state is maintained. When the opening / closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed). In the state where the security cover 112IW500A is used, the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is regulated by the security cover 112IW500A, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open. Is released from the regulated state by the security cover 112IW500A, and is in a permissible state in which the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is permitted. FIGS. 67-2, 67-3, 67-28 to 67-. 31)
It is described that the security may be improved, and the security is improved by such a configuration.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 12 of the first invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the first invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the first invention described above.

The feature portion 112IW also includes the second invention shown below. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine is configured to be able to be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to control an advantageous state based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a fluctuation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the fluctuation stop command is transmitted. Based on the value, it is described that the display is performed by three types of production patterns corresponding to the three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and the setting is made. In a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be lowered. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 112IWS005-S010 execution part) and
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to 117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 112IWS011 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The CPU 120 includes steps 112 IWS409 to S415, S504 to S509, and a portion for executing S601 to S606).
The suggestion effect execution means limits the execution of the suggestion effect when the set value information output from the information output means is not normal (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is set to N, S508 in step 112IWS413. When N and S605 are N, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect are not executed.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the second invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 112IWS005-S010 execution part) and
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to 117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 112IWS011 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The CPU 120 includes steps 112 IWS409 to S415, S504 to S509, and a portion for executing S601 to S606).
The suggestion effect execution means limits the execution of the suggestion effect when the set value information output from the information output means is not normal (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is set to N, S508 in step 112IWS413. When N is N in N, S605, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect are not executed),
Moreover,
A substrate (for example, an LED substrate) on which at least a specific electronic component (for example, a connector) having a metal fixing portion (for example, a metal fixing portion 651) is mounted and a wiring pattern for electrically connecting each mounted electronic component is formed. 275)
A component fixing portion (for example, fixing pad P) for fixing the metal fixing portion with a low-temperature molten metal (for example, solder) is formed on the substrate.
An example of a gaming machine is that the component fixing portion is electrically connected to any of the wiring patterns (for example, GND pattern). According to this feature, in a gaming machine configured so that control of an advantageous state can be executed based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. Further, since the component fixing portion can be formed as a part of the wiring pattern, it is not necessary to provide the component fixing portion separately from the wiring pattern, so that the wiring pattern is satisfactorily provided while securing the area of the fixing portion. be able to.

In the above-described embodiment, a specific electronic component having a metal fixing portion is mounted, a wiring pattern for electrically connecting each mounted electronic component is formed, and the metal fixing portion is fixed with a low-temperature molten metal. The LED board 275 is illustrated as a substrate in which the component fixing portion of the above is formed and the component fixing portion is electrically connected to any one of the wiring patterns. The effect control board 12 is provided, the main board 11 on which the game control microcomputer 100 constituting the game control means is mounted, and the control board for controlling the image display device 5 for displaying the suggestion image as the suggestion effect. A substrate configuration (a substrate configuration in which a component fixing portion for fixing a metal fixing portion with low-temperature molten metal is formed on the substrate and the component fixing portion is electrically connected to any of the wiring patterns) may be used. In this way, the main board on which the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 and the like constituting the predetermined effect means and the suggestion effect means are mounted, the game control microcomputer 100 constituting the game control means, and the like are mounted. The control board for controlling the image display device 5 for displaying the suggestion image 11 and the suggestion image can be a board on which the wiring pattern can be satisfactorily provided while securing the area of the component fixing portion.

Further, when the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, it may be notified directly by image display or voice notification, if necessary. By doing so, the player or the game hall staff can recognize that the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, so that the normal state is restored as soon as possible and the restriction of the suggestion effect is released. It becomes possible to make it.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 112IWS011 and S108. do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the set value information can be input normally at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest in.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention,
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means is the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit by the fourth effect mode) in which the set value is highly specified. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect according to the first effect mode, a during-game suggestion effect, and a jackpot suggestion effect) in which the specified degree of the set value is low. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention,
The suggestion effect execution means has at least a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at a different ratio depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is stated that it may be possible to execute (initial roll effect, etc.), and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, and the game is played from an early time. It is possible to give a motivation to play pachinko and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, after the setting is changed until the variation display is executed 30 times) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 67-6 (A), (B), 67-23 (A), (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 67-23 (A), (B), etc.).
It is described that a notification means capable of notifying information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416) may be further provided. , It is possible to confirm the suggestive effects performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the second invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 67-25 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) A predetermined effect execution means that can execute a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc.
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means for restricting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 67-25 (D)). It is stated that the above may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the second invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 67-25 (A), (B), etc.).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner in which it becomes difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. It is stated that it may be provided with more difficult-to-use accessory effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.), and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the second invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the jackpot game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 67-5).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the second invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) related to the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 67-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the second invention,
It is provided with an opening / closing body that can be opened / closed and a regulating member (for example, security cover 112IW500A / security cover 112IW500B / security cover 112IW500C) that can regulate the operation of the operation unit.
When the opening / closing body is closed, the operation of the operation unit is regulated by the regulating member, and the regulated state is maintained. When the opening / closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed). In the state where the security cover 112IW500A is used, the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is regulated by the security cover 112IW500A, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open. Is released from the regulated state by the security cover 112IW500A, and is in a permissible state in which the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is permitted. FIGS. 67-2, 67-3, 67-28 to 67-. 31)
It is described that the security may be improved, and the security is improved by such a configuration.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 11 of the second invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the second invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the second invention described above.

The feature portion 112IW also includes the third invention shown below. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine is configured to be able to be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to control an advantageous state based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a fluctuation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the fluctuation stop command is transmitted. Based on the value, it is described that the display is performed by three types of production patterns corresponding to the three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and the setting is made. In a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be lowered. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 112IWS005-S010 execution part) and
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to 117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 112IWS011 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The CPU 120 includes steps 112 IWS409 to S415, S504 to S509, and a portion for executing S601 to S606).
The suggestion effect execution means
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the in-game suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect by the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game by the first effect mode). It is possible to perform pre-suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, and jackpot suggestion effects).
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example,). By executing steps 112IWS414, S509, and S606, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, or the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the third invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 112IWS005-S010 execution part) and
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to 117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 112IWS011 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The CPU 120 includes steps 112 IWS409 to S415, S504 to S509, and a portion for executing S601 to S606).
The suggestion effect execution means
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the in-game suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect by the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game by the first effect mode). It is possible to perform pre-suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, and jackpot suggestion effects).
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example,). By executing steps 112IWS414, S509, and S606, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, or the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode).
Moreover,
A substrate (for example, an LED substrate) on which at least a specific electronic component (for example, a connector) having a metal fixing portion (for example, a metal fixing portion 651) is mounted and a wiring pattern for electrically connecting each mounted electronic component is formed. 275)
A component fixing portion (for example, fixing pad P) for fixing the metal fixing portion with a low-temperature molten metal (for example, solder) is formed on the substrate.
An example of a gaming machine is that the component fixing portion is electrically connected to any of the wiring patterns (for example, GND pattern). According to this feature, in a gaming machine configured so that control of an advantageous state can be executed based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. Further, since the component fixing portion can be formed as a part of the wiring pattern, it is not necessary to provide the component fixing portion separately from the wiring pattern, so that the wiring pattern is satisfactorily provided while securing the area of the fixing portion. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 112IWS011 and S108. do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the set value information can be input normally at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest in.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention,
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means is the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit by the fourth effect mode) in which the set value is highly specified. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect according to the first effect mode, a during-game suggestion effect, and a jackpot suggestion effect) in which the specified degree of the set value is low. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the jackpot suggestion effect determination table), the execution mode of the suggestion effect can be determined. A suggestion effect determining means for determining (for example, a portion that executes steps 112 IWS410, S421, S414, S505, S507, S509, S602, S604, S606 in the effect control CPU 120) is provided.
The suggestion effect determining means
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Step 112 IWS410, S505, S602 is executed based on the set value),
When the set value information is not input normally, the dedicated decision data (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the jackpot suggestion effect determination table) is used. The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined (for example, the effect control CPU 120 uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the jackpot suggestion effect determination table in step 112IWS414. , S509, S606)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention,
The suggestion effect execution means has at least a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at a different ratio depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is stated that it may be possible to execute (initial roll effect, etc.), and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, and the game is played from an early time. It is possible to give a motivation to play pachinko and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the third invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, after the setting is changed until the variation display is executed 30 times) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 67-6 (A), (B), 67-23 (A), (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the third invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 67-23 (A), (B), etc.).
It is described that a notification means capable of notifying information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416) may be further provided. , It is possible to confirm the suggestive effects performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the third invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 67-25 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) A predetermined effect execution means that can execute a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc.
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means for restricting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 67-25 (D)). It is stated that the above may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the third invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 67-25 (A), (B), etc.).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner in which it becomes difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. It is stated that it may be provided with more difficult-to-use accessory effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.), and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the third invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the jackpot game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 67-5).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the third invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) related to the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 67-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 12 of the third invention,
It is provided with an opening / closing body that can be opened / closed and a regulating member (for example, security cover 112IW500A / security cover 112IW500B / security cover 112IW500C) that can regulate the operation of the operation unit.
When the opening / closing body is closed, the operation of the operation unit is regulated by the regulating member, and the regulated state is maintained. When the opening / closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed). In the state where the security cover 112IW500A is used, the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is regulated by the security cover 112IW500A, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open. Is released from the regulated state by the security cover 112IW500A, and is in a permissible state in which the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is permitted. FIGS. 67-2, 67-3, 67-28 to 67-. 31)
It is described that the security may be improved, and the security is improved by such a configuration.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 12 of the third invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the third invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the third invention described above.

It should be noted that the feature unit 112IW is configured so that it can be changed to three types of effect modes A to C, and when the effect mode A is controlled, if the set value information is not input normally, It is configured so that the suggestion effect can be executed as if it is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous for the player (the configuration of the first invention described above), and when it is controlled to the effect mode B, the set value. When the information is not input normally, it is configured to limit the execution of the suggestion effect (the configuration of the second invention described above), and when it is controlled to the effect mode C, the set value information is input normally. If this is not the case, the case where the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect is executably configured as the suggestive effect (the configuration of the third invention described above) is shown. Not limited. For example, it is possible to switch which of the control methods of the first invention to the third invention described above is used to execute the suggestion effect according to the gaming state. In this case, for example, when the game state is the normal state, if the set value information is not input normally, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect assuming that the set value is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous for the player. The configuration (the configuration of the above-mentioned first invention) is configured so that if the gaming state is a time-saving state and the set value information is not input normally, the execution of the suggestion effect is restricted (the above-mentioned second invention). (Structure) If the game state is a probabilistic state, if the set value information is not input normally, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (configuration). The configuration of the third invention described above) may be performed.

Further, it is not necessary to make the suggestion effect executable by all the control methods of the first to third inventions shown above, and the suggestive effect is made executable by using only one of the control methods. May be good.

Further, in the present feature unit 112IW, when the set value command itself cannot be received due to reasons such as omission or garbled data, the execution of the suggestion effect is controlled by the control methods of the first to third inventions described above (suggestion). Although the case (restricting the production) is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, if the set value command is received but the received set value command is inconsistent, the suggestion effect may be restricted. In this case, for example, each time a setting value command is received, the setting value indicated by the setting value command received by the effect control means side is stored, and then when a new setting value command is received, a new setting value command is received. If the set value indicated by the set value command received in is not the same as the set value stored last time, it is determined that an inconsistency has occurred, and the suggestion effect is executed by the control methods of the first to third inventions described above. It may be controlled (restricting the suggestion effect).

Further, the method of differentiating the games in each set value "1" to "3" is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, in the case of odd-numbered setting values such as the set values "1" and "3", consecutive villas (a continuous big hit occurs during a probable change state) are likely to occur and consecutive villas occur. It is configured so that there is a large difference from when it is difficult, and in the case of an even number setting value such as the setting value "2", the setting value is configured so that the likelihood of occurrence of consecutive villas is relatively constant and does not change. A suggestion effect suggesting that the number is an odd number may be configured to be feasible. Then, in this case, when the set value command cannot be received normally, the execution of the suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is an odd number is controlled by the control methods of the first to third inventions described above. It may be configured to do (restrict the suggestion effect).

The feature portion 112IW also includes the fourth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the suggestion of the set value is performed only during the variable display, and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention to solve the problem.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 51) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means has a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at least in a period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display at a different ratio depending on the set value. A game machine that is characterized by being able to execute (such as or initial roll production) is described. According to this feature, the player is interested in the state of the game machine before the start of the game and plays the game from an early time. It is possible to give motivation to play pachinko and enhance the interest of playing pachinko.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the fourth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 51) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means has a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at least in a period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display at a different ratio depending on the set value. And initial roll production, etc.)
A substrate (for example, an LED substrate) on which at least a specific electronic component (for example, a connector) having a metal fixing portion (for example, a metal fixing portion 651) is mounted and a wiring pattern for electrically connecting each mounted electronic component is formed. 275)
A component fixing portion (for example, fixing pad P) for fixing the metal fixing portion with a low-temperature molten metal (for example, solder) is formed on the substrate.
An example of a gaming machine is that the component fixing portion is electrically connected to any of the wiring patterns (for example, GND pattern). According to this feature, it is possible to make the player interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, to give the motivation to play the game from an early time zone, and to enhance the interest of the game. Further, since the component fixing portion can be formed as a part of the wiring pattern, it is not necessary to provide the component fixing portion separately from the wiring pattern, so that the wiring pattern is satisfactorily provided while securing the area of the fixing portion. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention,
A gaming machine capable of variable display of production identification information (for example, production design).
In the suggestion effect executing means, different effect identification information is displayed according to the set value in the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display (for example, the suggestion effect (for example). It is stated that the odd-numbered initial roll display) may be made feasible, and according to such a configuration, the game interest can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect according to the set value when the power supply to the gaming machine is restored after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (for example, FIG. 67). As shown in -21 (A) and (B), a pre-game suggestion effect determination table with different determination values is used.)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a specific suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect during a game or a suggestion effect during a big hit) that suggests a set value after the variable display is started.
It is described that the specific suggestion effect may have a higher reliability for the suggested set value than the suggestion effect, and according to such a configuration, the game entertainment can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). The game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value adding means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 67-9, a portion capable of displaying a connection ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 112IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 5 of the fourth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the fourth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the fourth invention described above.

The feature portion 112IW also includes the fifth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 have a problem that they cannot effectively give motivation to play a game and cannot sufficiently enhance their interest. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 51) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, after the setting is changed until the variation display is executed 30 times) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 67-6 (A), (B), 67-23 (A), (B)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period of time, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the fifth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 51) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, after the setting is changed until the variation display is executed 30 times) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 67-6 (A), (B), 67-23 (A), (B)).
Moreover,
A substrate (for example, an LED substrate) on which at least a specific electronic component (for example, a connector) having a metal fixing portion (for example, a metal fixing portion 651) is mounted and a wiring pattern for electrically connecting each mounted electronic component is formed. 275)
A component fixing portion (for example, fixing pad P) for fixing the metal fixing portion with a low-temperature molten metal (for example, solder) is formed on the substrate.
An example of a gaming machine is that the component fixing portion is electrically connected to any of the wiring patterns (for example, GND pattern). According to this feature, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. Further, since the component fixing portion can be formed as a part of the wiring pattern, it is not necessary to provide the component fixing portion separately from the wiring pattern, so that the wiring pattern is satisfactorily provided while securing the area of the fixing portion. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention,
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns at different ratios depending on whether the set value is changed or not (for example, FIGS. 67-6 (A), (A), B)),
It is described that the variable display executing means may execute variable display using a common background image when the set value is changed and when the set value is not changed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention,
Variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns at different ratios when the set value is set to the first set value and when the set value is set to the second set value by the setting means. (See, for example, FIGS. 67-6 (A), (B), etc.),
The variable display executing means can execute variable display using a common background image when the set value is set to the first set value and when the set value is set to the second set value by the setting means. However, according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is that a predetermined condition is satisfied within a predetermined period (for example, a big hit in a specific period, the number of times of execution of the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect reaches the predetermined number, and a specific super reach effect. The suggestion effect can be executed based on (for example, the advance notice effect has been executed) (for example, when a big hit occurs within a specific period, the suggestion effect during the big hit can be executed). See A) and (B))
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). The game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value adding means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 67-9, a portion capable of displaying a connection ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 112IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 5 of the fifth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the fifth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the fifth invention described above.

The feature portion 112IW also includes the sixth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the suggestive effects executed in the past cannot be confirmed and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 51) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 67-23 (A), (B), etc.).
A gaming machine is described that further includes a notification means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416) capable of transmitting information regarding the executed suggestion effect. According to this feature. , It is possible to confirm the suggestive effects performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the sixth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 51) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 67-23 (A), (B), etc.).
Further provided with a notification means capable of notifying information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416).
Moreover,
A substrate (for example, an LED substrate) on which at least a specific electronic component (for example, a connector) having a metal fixing portion (for example, a metal fixing portion 651) is mounted and a wiring pattern for electrically connecting each mounted electronic component is formed. 275)
A component fixing portion (for example, fixing pad P) for fixing the metal fixing portion with a low-temperature molten metal (for example, solder) is formed on the substrate.
An example of a gaming machine is that the component fixing portion is electrically connected to any of the wiring patterns (for example, GND pattern). According to this feature, it is possible to confirm the suggestive effects performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. Further, since the component fixing portion can be formed as a part of the wiring pattern, it is not necessary to provide the component fixing portion separately from the wiring pattern, so that the wiring pattern is satisfactorily provided while securing the area of the fixing portion. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention,
The notification means can notify the number of times the suggestion effect is executed (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention,
The notification means can notify the content of the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention,
The notification means can notify information about the executed suggestion effect while waiting for a customer for which the variable display is not executed (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention,
An information generation means for generating information (for example, execution history information) related to the executed suggestion effect, and
An image generation means for generating a specific image (for example, a two-dimensional code including execution history information) in which the information can be read by an imaging device, and an image generation means.
It is described that the specific image may be provided with a display means (for example, an image display device 5) for displaying the specific image in a manner that can be captured by the image pickup device. Can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the sixth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). The game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value adding means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 67-9, a portion capable of displaying a connection ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 112IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 6 of the sixth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the sixth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the sixth invention described above.

The feature portion 112IW also includes the seventh invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that if the setting suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize due to other effects, the interest may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 51) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 67-25 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) A predetermined effect execution means that can execute a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc.
When the suggestion effect is executed, it is further provided with a limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. FIG. 67-25. (D))
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the seventh invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 51) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 67-25 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) A predetermined effect execution means that can execute a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc.
When the suggestion effect is executed, the execution of the predetermined effect is further provided with a limiting means (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted). See D)),
Moreover,
A substrate (for example, an LED substrate) on which at least a specific electronic component (for example, a connector) having a metal fixing portion (for example, a metal fixing portion 651) is mounted and a wiring pattern for electrically connecting each mounted electronic component is formed. 275)
A component fixing portion (for example, fixing pad P) for fixing the metal fixing portion with a low-temperature molten metal (for example, solder) is formed on the substrate.
An example of a gaming machine is that the component fixing portion is electrically connected to any of the wiring patterns (for example, GND pattern). According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest. Further, since the component fixing portion can be formed as a part of the wiring pattern, it is not necessary to provide the component fixing portion separately from the wiring pattern, so that the wiring pattern is satisfactorily provided while securing the area of the fixing portion. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention,
When the execution timings of the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect overlap, the limiting means changes at least one of the execution timings of the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect (for example, one of them is executed during the fanfare period and the other is the ending). Change to run during the period)
It is stated that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention,
The limiting means prohibits the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the character effect is prohibited. See FIG. 67-25 (D). )
It is stated that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention,
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means executes a predetermined effect in an effect mode in which the suggestion effect is not difficult to recognize (for example, the movable member 112IW101 is operated in an operation mode different from the usual one (for example, suggestion during a big hit). Control so that it does not stop at a position that overlaps with the dialogue image produced by the production))
It is stated that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention,
Both the suggestive effect and the predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect for displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5) include a display in one display means (for example, the image display device 5).
It is described that the above-mentioned one display means may display the display related to the suggestive effect with priority over the display related to the predetermined effect, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the interest. Can be done.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the seventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). The game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value adding means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 67-9, a portion capable of displaying a connection ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 112IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 6 of the 7th invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the 7th invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the 7th invention described above.

The feature portion 112IW also includes the eighth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-2010902 have a problem that the execution of the setting suggestion effect, which is not preferable for the player, may reduce the interest. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 51) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
It is provided with a setting suggestion execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set setting value.
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 67-25 (A), (B), etc.).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner in which it becomes difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. A game machine that is characterized by having more difficult-to-use character effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.) is described, and according to these features, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the eighth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 51) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
It is provided with a setting suggestion execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set setting value.
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 67-25 (A), (B), etc.).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner in which it becomes difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. It is equipped with more difficult character effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.)
Moreover,
A substrate (for example, an LED substrate) on which at least a specific electronic component (for example, a connector) having a metal fixing portion (for example, a metal fixing portion 651) is mounted and a wiring pattern for electrically connecting each mounted electronic component is formed. 275)
A component fixing portion (for example, fixing pad P) for fixing the metal fixing portion with a low-temperature molten metal (for example, solder) is formed on the substrate.
An example of a gaming machine is that the component fixing portion is electrically connected to any of the wiring patterns (for example, GND pattern). According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest. Further, since the component fixing portion can be formed as a part of the wiring pattern, it is not necessary to provide the component fixing portion separately from the wiring pattern, so that the wiring pattern is satisfactorily provided while securing the area of the fixing portion. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the eighth invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, an accessory effect) for operating the movable member (for example, the movable member 112IW101), and according to such a configuration. , The effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention,
A light guide plate having translucency capable of transmitting light (for example, a light guide plate 112IW103) and
It is provided with a light emitting body provided so that light can be incident from the end surface of the light guide plate.
The light guide plate is provided with a reflecting portion that reflects light incident on the inside of the light guide plate from the end surface of the light guide plate by the light emitting body and emits it to the front surface of the gaming machine.
The predetermined notification means is capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, a light guide plate effect) that emits light from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate to the front surface of the gaming machine by causing the light emitting body to emit light. It is described that it is also good, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing the predetermined notification for displaying an error, and according to such a configuration, an error can be appropriately notified.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means includes the first setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggestion effect of the first effect mode. See FIGS. 67-25 (A) and 67-25 (B)), which suggests that the setting suggestion execution means is set to the first set value. , A second setting suggestion suggesting that the second set value is set to a second set value that is more advantageous to the player than the first set value (for example, a jackpot suggestion effect of the third effect mode. FIG. 67-25 ( A), (see (B)) can be executed,
When the first setting suggestion is executed, the predetermined notification means can execute the predetermined notification at a higher rate than when the second setting suggestion is executed (see, for example, FIG. 67-25 (E)).
It is stated that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the eighth invention,
It is provided with setting suggestion setting means capable of setting the execution ratio of setting suggestion (for example, the setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the operating means such as the push button 31B and the operating means (management) such as the switch provided inside the gaming machine. It is possible to change the settings related to the setting suggestion effect by operating (only the person can operate).
It is stated that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine that displays variable identification information.
A variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information by rotating a variable display member (for example, a drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body) on which the identification information is arranged is provided.
The variable display device performs a specific operation in the first variable display of the identification information after the set value is changed.
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute the predetermined notification at a high rate in the first variable display of the identification information after the set value is changed. According to such a configuration, the predetermined notification means may be executed. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). The game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value adding means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 67-9, a portion capable of displaying a connection ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 112IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 8 of the eighth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the eighth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the eighth invention described above.

The feature portion 112IW also includes the ninth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the gambling property may become too high at a setting having a high advantage. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the ninth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 51) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value.
The predetermined control period (for example, the fanfare period during the jackpot game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 67-5).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the ninth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 51) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value.
The predetermined control period (for example, the fanfare period during the jackpot game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 67-5).
Moreover,
A substrate (for example, an LED substrate) on which at least a specific electronic component (for example, a connector) having a metal fixing portion (for example, a metal fixing portion 651) is mounted and a wiring pattern for electrically connecting each mounted electronic component is formed. 275)
A component fixing portion (for example, fixing pad P) for fixing the metal fixing portion with a low-temperature molten metal (for example, solder) is formed on the substrate.
An example of a gaming machine is that the component fixing portion is electrically connected to any of the wiring patterns (for example, GND pattern). According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high. Further, since the component fixing portion can be formed as a part of the wiring pattern, it is not necessary to provide the component fixing portion separately from the wiring pattern, so that the wiring pattern is satisfactorily provided while securing the area of the fixing portion. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the ninth invention,
The fanfare control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 67-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the ninth invention,
The interval control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 67-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the ninth invention,
The ending control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 67-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the ninth invention,
It is a gaming machine that can play games using the gaming value.
A game value-adding means that adds game value based on the fulfillment of specific conditions,
The setting means is such that the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the size of the game value given by the game value-adding means are larger than the first set value as the size of the game value used for the game. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that occupies a high proportion.
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when the second set value is set than when the first set value is set (for example, FIGS. 67-5 (A) and 67-5 (B)). reference)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the ninth invention,
It is described that a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect during a big hit) suggesting a set set value may be provided in a predetermined control period in an advantageous state. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of a predetermined control period in an advantageous state.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the ninth invention,
Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production
The effect executing means can execute a common effect (for example, a common fanfare effect, an interval effect, an ending effect, etc.) in a predetermined control period in an advantageous state regardless of the set value. It is described that such a configuration may enhance the interest of a predetermined control period in an advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the ninth invention,
It is stated that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be predetermined according to the set value, and according to such a configuration, the gambling becomes too high. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the ninth invention,
It is a gaming machine that can control multiple types of advantageous states.
The game control means can control any of the plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, jackpot types A to C) at different ratios based on the set set value.
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the advantageous state (see, for example, FIG. 67-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). The game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value adding means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 67-9, a portion capable of displaying a connection ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 112IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 10 of the ninth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the ninth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the ninth invention described above.

The feature portion 112IW also includes the tenth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the gambling property may become too high at a setting having a high advantage. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the tenth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 51) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value.
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) related to the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 67-7).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the tenth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 51) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value.
The predetermined control period (eg, fluctuation time) for the variable display varies depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 67-7).
Moreover,
A substrate (for example, an LED substrate) on which at least a specific electronic component (for example, a connector) having a metal fixing portion (for example, a metal fixing portion 651) is mounted and a wiring pattern for electrically connecting each mounted electronic component is formed. 275)
A component fixing portion (for example, fixing pad P) for fixing the metal fixing portion with a low-temperature molten metal (for example, solder) is formed on the substrate.
An example of a gaming machine is that the component fixing portion is electrically connected to any of the wiring patterns (for example, GND pattern). According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high. Further, since the component fixing portion can be formed as a part of the wiring pattern, it is not necessary to provide the component fixing portion separately from the wiring pattern, so that the wiring pattern is satisfactorily provided while securing the area of the fixing portion. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the tenth invention,
The variable display period differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 67-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the tenth invention,
It is stated that the display result of the variable display may be displayed differently depending on the set value, and such a configuration makes the gambling too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the tenth invention,
It is a gaming machine that can play games using the gaming value.
A game value-adding means that adds game value based on the fulfillment of specific conditions,
The setting means is such that the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the size of the game value given by the game value-adding means are larger than the first set value as the size of the game value used for the game. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that occupies a high proportion.
The predetermined control period for the variable display is longer when it is set to the second set value than when it is set to the first set value (see, for example, FIG. 67-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the tenth invention,
It is stated that the predetermined control period for the variable display may be predetermined according to the set value, and according to such a configuration, the gambling becomes too high. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the tenth invention,
Variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods at different ratios according to a set value (see, for example, FIG. 67-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the tenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). The game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value adding means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 67-9, a portion capable of displaying a connection ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 112IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 7 of the tenth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the tenth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the tenth invention described above.

The configuration shown by the feature unit 112IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown by other feature units such as the feature unit 31AK to configure the gaming machine. For example, when the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect shown by the feature unit 112IW are executed, a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect. Occasionally, the title corresponding to the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect may be notified in the same manner as the feature unit 31AK.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9… Game effect lamp 10… General winning opening 11… Main board 12… Production control board 13… Voice control board 14… Lamp control board 15… Relay board 20… Ordinary symbol display 21… Gate switch 22A, 22B… Starting port Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit 250… Movable body 275… LED board 601… Motor drive IC
602 ... LED drive IC
603 ... Connector 650 ... Connector 651 ... Metal fixing part 800 ... First effector 803 ... Decorative member 820-822 ... Rear LED
844A to 844E ... Boss 850 ... Conductive part 851 ... Non-conductive part 900 ... Second effector P ... Fixed pad

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can play games,
A specific electronic component having a connection terminal and a metal fixing portion different from the connection terminal is at least surface-mounted, and has a substrate on which a wiring pattern for electrically connecting each mounted electronic component is formed.
The surface of the substrate has a plurality of component fixing portions for fixing the metal fixing portion with the low-temperature molten metal corresponding to the plurality of the metal fixing portions.
All of the component fixing portions are electrically connected to any of the wiring patterns.
The metal fixing portion is provided on both of the longitudinal end portions of the specific electronic component so as to be drawn out from a mounting compatible surface which is a surface facing the surface of the substrate among the surfaces of the specific electronic component. Ori,
The portion of the surface of the substrate covered by the specific electronic component by mounting the specific electronic component electrically forms each of the component fixing portions corresponding to the metal fixing portions provided on both of the end portions. The connecting electrode to be connected has a planar pattern having a shape corresponding to the mounting compatible surface.
The connecting portion between the planar pattern and the component fixing portion is narrower than the width of the component fixing portion .
The substrate has a through hole in the component fixing portion and has a through hole.
The specific electronic component is electrically connected to the wiring pattern on the surface of the substrate opposite to the surface on which the specific electronic component is mounted through the through hole.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images